JP2023175932A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a highly amusing performance.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 can execute a plurality of reliability-suggestive performances for suggesting reliability to a jackpot. The reliability-suggestive performance includes for example a performance executable during display of a decorative performance in a first mode and a performance executable during display of a decorative pattern in a second mode. Reliability-suggestive performances executable during display of a decorative pattern in a first mode are, for example, a retention icon change performance, an icon change performance concerned, a pseudo continuation performance, an operation promotion performance, a background performance, a chance pattern performance, a pattern change performance, and the like. Reliability-suggestive performances executable during display of a decorative pattern in a second mode are, for example, an icon change performance concerned, a title indication, an operation promotion performance, a cut-in, and the like.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can execute effects based on a determination as to whether or not to execute a special game.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a predetermined starting hole, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. Some gaming machines of this type are capable of performing a preview performance (for example, a premiere performance) that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed, prior to being notified that it has been determined that a jackpot game will be executed. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-96091

By the way, it cannot be said that the performances performed on conventional gaming machines are necessarily highly entertaining, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the entertainment.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

The present invention employs the following configuration to solve the above problems.
That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. The performance control means includes a preliminary determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling the performance, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance of the preliminary determination means. A preliminary effect can be executed based on the determination result, and a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information is displayed, a notification effect is executed to notify the result of the determination according to the display mode of the corresponding display, and the special It is possible to display a suggestion image that suggests that a game will be executed, and it is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings, and the preview The effects include a first preview effect that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode, and a second preview effect that is executed when the corresponding display is in a special mode. It is possible to execute a first effect that can be displayed in a normal mode and a second effect that is a mode different from the first effect and that can display the corresponding display in the special mode, The same special performance can be performed when the first performance is executed and when the second performance is performed, and the special performance is a performance different from the notification performance, and the first preview performance is different from the notification performance. The rate at which the special performance is executed is different depending on the case where the suggestion image is displayed after the end of the first preview performance and the case where the suggestion image is not displayed after the end of the first preview performance, and the rate at which the preliminary performance is performed is different. In this case, the preview performance is more likely to be performed than when the advance performance is not performed.

According to this invention, it is possible to perform highly entertaining performances.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 A plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of display 4 in FIG. 1 A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining various random numbers used for special symbol determination Flowchart illustrating the flow of performance in normal gaming state Flowchart illustrating the flow of performance in a fixed-variable gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the decorativeness of decorative patterns Screen diagram showing a specific example of a production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of a production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 2) A time chart showing a specific example of how decorative patterns are displayed when a promotion effect is executed. Screen diagram showing a specific example of character SP reach A screen diagram showing a specific example of the hit effect in the normal gaming state Screen diagram showing a specific example of Battle Reach in a variable game state Screen diagram showing a specific example of a hit effect in a variable probability gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of special symbols in the variable probability gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of reach symbols in normal gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of reach symbols in variable probability gaming states Explanatory diagram to explain various jackpot predictions Screen diagram showing a specific example of premier character production Screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow color title display Screen diagram showing specific examples of blue title display and red title display Screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow color character display Screen diagram showing a specific example of cut-in performed in response to an operation A schematic front view of the gaming machine 1 showing a specific example of one-shot notification A screen diagram illustrating how the premiere character performance is performed multiple times within the same variation. Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table Time chart showing specific examples of performances in normal gaming state Time chart showing a specific example of performance in a fixed-variable gaming state Explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the pending icon Screen diagram illustrating the customer waiting menu screen Explanatory diagram to explain the jackpot notice type selection table used when jackpot notice up mode is set A block diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of switch processing in step S2 of FIG. 36 Detailed flowchart of the first starting port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 37 Detailed flowchart of the second starting port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 37 Detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S218 and S228 in FIGS. 38 and 39 Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 36 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 41 Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. 41 Detailed flowchart of the stopping process in step S319 in FIG. 41 Flowchart showing an example of a game state setting process executed at the end of a jackpot game in the game control board 100 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the production control board 130 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 46 Detailed flowchart of pending command reception processing in step S13 of FIG. 47 Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. 47 Detailed flowchart of jackpot preview effect pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. 49 Detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. 49 Detailed flowchart of reliability suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. 49 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140 Detailed flowchart of image output control processing in step S41 of FIG. 53 Screen diagram showing a specific example of the first mission production Screen diagram showing a specific example of the second mission production Explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting a variation pattern of special symbols during the normal gaming state in the second embodiment A time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the pending icon change effect can be executed and a period in which it cannot be executed. An explanatory diagram to explain the display mode of the icon at the time of jackpot Explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon in case of a loss A time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the icon change effect can be executed and a period in which it cannot be executed. Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of performances in a pseudo-continuous performance Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of executions of pseudo-continuous performance and reliability Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects when a background effect is executed An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of a background effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the performance after the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance at the time of a jackpot Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the performance after the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance in the event of a loss Time chart for explaining chance effect and symbol change effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between reliability suggesting effects A screen diagram illustrating how the background effect and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. A screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect (jackpot notice), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. A screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect, background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. A screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect (jackpot notice), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. A screen diagram illustrating how the chance effect and symbol change effect are executed in normal mode A. A screen diagram illustrating how the chance effect, symbol change effect, and icon change effect are executed in normal mode A. Explanatory diagram for explaining the aspects of SPSP reach (battle production) An explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the additional display that is displayed in addition to the numbers that make up the decorative pattern Explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples of decorative patterns of the first aspect and the second aspect

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with accessories related to winning and determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and this glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which game balls can flow down. has been done.

When the player grips the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 28 are guided to a firing device (not shown), and the game balls are played with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 20. It is launched into area 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the fired game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10, and when it comes into contact with the game nails, windmills, etc. The player falls down the game area 10 along the game board 2 while changing the direction of movement. Note that the firing of the game balls is temporarily stopped by the player operating the stop button 22.

The upper tray 28 is for storing game balls and prize balls to be supplied to the firing device. A lower tray 29 for storing prize balls is provided below the upper tray 28. When the player operates the eject button 23, a portion of the lower surface of the lower tray 29 opens, and the game balls accumulated in the lower tray 29 fall into a box (not shown) arranged below the lower tray 29. Note that the upper plate 28 and the lower plate 29 may be configured as one plate.

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the player maintains the state in which the handle 20 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively weak batting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the player keeps the handle 20 rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

A first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, two normal winning openings 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passage path of the game ball hit to the left as accessories related to winning and judgment. It is being In addition, on the passage path of the game ball hit right, there are the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 13, two normal winning openings 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 are provided.

In the process of flowing down along the game board 2, the game ball launched into the game area 10 enters one of the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, big winning hole 13, and normal winning hole 14. You may win a prize by doing so. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 28 or the lower tray 29 depending on the winning spot. Note that the game balls that do not win are discharged from the gaming area 10 via the discharge port 18.

The first starting port 11 is a starting region that is always open, and the second starting port 12 is a starting region that is normally opened only when the electric tulip 17 as an electric accessory is operating. In the game machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins a prize, or when a game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is played. It is determined whether or not to execute, and a symbol indicating the determination result is displayed on a first special symbol display 41 or a second special symbol display 42 of the display 4, which will be described later. Then, when the symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game in which the jackpot 13 is opened is executed.

In addition, in the following explanation, the judgment executed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 is called "first special symbol judgment," and the judgment that is executed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting hole 12 is called "first special symbol judgment." The determination to be executed will be referred to as the "second special symbol determination", and these determinations will be collectively referred to as the "special symbol determination".

The big winning hole 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big winning hole 13 is provided at the opening of the big winning hole 13. The big prize opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the jackpot game in which the plate is operated to open the jackpot 13. is executed. During the jackpot game, the jackpot is opened until a predetermined condition (in this embodiment, eight game balls enter the jackpot 13 or 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the jackpot 13 was opened). A long open round game in which 13 is maintained in an open state and then closed is executed a predetermined number of times at predetermined time intervals.

In this way, the jackpot 13 is kept open during the jackpot game, so by hitting right during the jackpot game, the player can win more prizes than when the jackpot game is not being played. You can get the ball.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. This electric tulip 17 has two positions: a closed position in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 (see the solid line in FIG. 1), and an open position in which the second starting port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). Possible to change posture.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12, although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, if it is determined to open the second starting port 12, the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintains the open position for a specified time and then returns to the closed position a specified number of times. In this way, when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 12, but when the electric tulip 17 is activated, the game ball is easily able to pass through the second starting port 12. Become.

In addition, in the following explanation, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 will be referred to as "normal symbol determination".

The normal winning hole 14 is always open like the first starting hole 11, and is a winning hole from which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball wins. Note that, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins in the normal winning opening 14, no judgment is made.

[Example of configuration of presentation means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a speaker 24, a performance accessory 7, a board lamp 25, etc. for performing various performances. Further, the frame member 3 has a built-in frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) that is not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays effect images, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as the "liquid crystal screen 5") is provided at a position where it can be easily recognized by the player. The liquid crystal screen 5 includes, for example, decorative patterns, characters and items that notify the judgment results of special pattern judgments, pending images (pending icons) that are displayed as many times as the number of pending special pattern judgments, and a variable display of special patterns. A presentation image is displayed that includes various display objects such as the icon that suggests that the vehicle is inside. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 24 outputs music, audio, sound effects, etc., and performs a sound performance in synchronization with the display performance performed on the liquid crystal display device 5 or asynchronously.

The performance accessory 7 is arranged in front of and to the side of the liquid crystal screen 5. The performance accessory 7 has a built-in light emitting element (for example, an LED). The performance accessory 7 performs a predetermined performance using both or one of the movement of the accessory itself and light. In this embodiment, the performance accessory 7 is configured to have a shape imitating a sword, and is rotated around the handle (lower end) of the sword in an initial position where the sword appears to be standing almost upright (Fig. 1 (see FIG. 11(A)) and a rotating posture in which the sword appears to be approximately horizontal (see FIG. 11(A)).

The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects using light, such as changing lighting or blinking patterns and changing the color of light emitted.

[Input means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with a performance button 26 and a performance key 27 as input means for the player to input. The performance button 26 is a push button that is pressed by the player to input operation information. The production key 27 is a so-called cross key used by the player to perform selection operations, cursor movement, etc., and includes an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, a performance may be performed depending on the operation of the performance button 26 and the performance key 27. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 can adjust the volume, adjust the light intensity, change the appearance rate of a predetermined performance, etc. by operating the performance button 26 and the performance key 27, but these are based on FIG. 33. will be explained in detail later.

[Example of configuration of display unit 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. 1. The display 4 mainly displays information regarding special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. It is comprised of a special symbol pending display 43, a second special symbol pending display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol pending display 46, a game status display 47, a round display 48, and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 41 determines the first special symbol determination by variably displaying the symbol and then stoppingly displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Announce the results. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 42 determines the second special symbol determination by variably displaying the symbol and then stoppingly displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Announce the results. The first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 include a jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a "jackpot" or a determination result of the special symbol determination as a symbol indicating the determination result. A losing symbol indicating that is a "losing" is displayed in a stopped state.

The first special symbol reservation display 43 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations is both set to "4".

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by variably displaying the symbols and then stoppingly displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol pending display 46 displays the number of pending normal symbol determinations. The gaming status display 47 displays the gaming status at the time when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round display 48 displays the opening pattern of the jackpot 13 during the jackpot game (a round which is the number of round games). number).

In the following explanation, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 will be referred to as "special symbols," and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 45 will be referred to as "normal symbols." shall be called. In addition, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as the "second special symbol". There may be a distinction.

[Configuration of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.
A control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the control device of the game machine 1 includes a game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game, such as various determinations and transmission of commands, and a game control board 100 that controls the performance based on commands received from the game control board 100. It is composed of a production control board 130 that controls the performance, an image and sound control board 140 that controls production using images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 that controls production using various lamps and movable bodies, and the like. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the production control board 130, the image and sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured as one board.

[Configuration example of game control board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various calculation processes related to determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on programs stored in the main ROM 102 and the like. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the above programs or as a work area for data processing.

The game control board 100 includes a first starting port switch 111, a second starting port switch 112, an electric tulip control section 113, a first gate switch 114, a second gate switch 115, a big winning port switch 116, and a big winning port control section. 117, a normal winning a prize opening switch 118, and each display 41 to 48 forming the display 4 are connected. Note that the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment includes four normal winning opening switches 122 corresponding to the four normal winning openings 14 (see FIG. 1), but in FIG. only is indicated.

The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 11 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second starting port switch 112 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 12 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second starting port 12 by operating an electric solenoid connected to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 in a drive-transferable manner according to a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects passage of the game ball to the first gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second gate switch 115 detects passage of the game ball to the second gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

The big winning hole switch 116 detects winning of the game ball to the big winning hole 13 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The grand prize opening control unit 117 opens and closes the grand prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid that is coupled to a plate that closes the grand prize opening 13 so as to be able to transmit drive force, based on a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The normal winning hole switch 118 detects that the game ball has entered the normal winning hole 14 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

When a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 116, or the normal winning port switch 118, the main CPU 101 outputs a predetermined number of signals corresponding to the location where the game ball has won. It instructs a payout control board (not shown) to pay out the prize balls, and manages the number of prize balls to be paid out based on information from the payout control board. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the payout control board supplies game balls to the upper tray 28 or the lower tray 29 by controlling a drive motor that sends game balls from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. .

The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Moreover, various random numbers as acquired information are acquired at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input, and a second special symbol determination is executed using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, the various random numbers are jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuating pattern random numbers.

Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, etc.) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a reach effect or a reach-less effect when it is determined that the game is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when the special symbol is displayed in a variation manner.

Upon acquiring these random numbers, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on whether the acquired jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102. judge. Here, when it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, the type of jackpot is determined based on which of the predetermined random numbers stored in the main ROM 102 the acquired symbol random number matches. Here, the types of jackpots include, for example, a "probable variable jackpot" in which the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and a "probable variable jackpot" in which the game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game ends. An example of this is the ``normal jackpot.'' Note that the gaming state and the type of jackpot will be described in detail later based on FIG. 6.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the judgment based on the jackpot random number, based on whether the acquired reach random number matches a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102, Decide whether to perform a reach effect or a reach-less effect. Moreover, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern of the special symbols when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, regardless of whether or not a jackpot game is played. This will determine the variation time of the special symbol.

When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 101 controls opening and closing of the jackpot 13 via the jackpot control unit 117 to execute a jackpot game according to the jackpot type. Execute.

Further, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first gate switch 114 or the second gate switch 115 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the obtained random number. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control section 113.

Further, the main CPU 101 causes each of the displays 41 to 48 making up the display 4 to execute the processing described above based on FIG.

[Example of configuration of production control board 130]
The production control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effects based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub-RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub-CPU 131 executes the above programs, and as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

The sub CPU 131 sets performance contents based on game information regarding special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. At that time, input of operation information from the effect button 26 or effect key 27 may be accepted, and effect contents may be set in accordance with the operation information. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command to the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 to instruct execution of the set performance contents.

[Example of configuration of image sound control board 140]
The image and sound control board 140 includes a central CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, a signal output section 147 (not shown), and the like. ing. The supervising CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling images and sounds for realizing the performance for which the content of the performance has been set on the performance control board 130, based on the program stored in the control ROM 142. The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the overall CPU 141 executes the above programs, and as a work area for data processing.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The audio DSP 145 generates audio data output from the speaker 24. The overall CPU 141 generates control signals based on commands from the production control board 130 and programs stored in the control ROM 142, outputs them to the VDP 144 and the audio DSP 145, and controls these operations.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 includes an image ROM that stores material data necessary for generating the effect image, a drawing engine that executes drawing processing of the effect image, and a liquid crystal display of the effect image drawn by the drawing engine. It is configured to include an output circuit for outputting to the device 5, etc. The drawing engine draws an effect image on the frame buffer based on a control signal from the central CPU 141 using material data stored in the image ROM. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in this frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the audio DSP 145 also includes an audio ROM that stores various audio data related to performance sounds such as music, voices, and sound effects, and a ROM that is used as a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The audio DSP 145 reads audio data corresponding to the control signal from the central CPU 141 from the audio ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the audio data after data processing to the speaker 24 .

The signal output unit 147 outputs a predetermined signal to the supervising CPU 141 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1 second intervals). For example, the signal output unit 147 may output a predetermined signal at regular time intervals. The overall CPU 141 executes different processes depending on when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output section 147 and when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output section 147.

[Example of configuration of lamp control board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. The lamp CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the production accessory 7, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, etc., based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the above program, and as a work area for data processing.

The lamp ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emitting pattern data is data indicating the light emitting pattern of each of the light emitting elements built into the performance accessory 7, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, etc. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the performance accessories 7 and the like.

The lamp CPU 151 reads out the light emitting pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emitting pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and reads out the light emitting pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 to the lamp RAM 153. Controls the light emission of the frame lamp 37. Further, the lamp CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from among the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and drives the motor that operates the effect accessory 7. control.

Further, when the player operates the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command to the effect control board 130 to notify the effect.

[About variable effects]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various effects are performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 while the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. An overview of the variable production will be provided.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, a first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. Stop display. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable effect including a variable display of decorative symbols is performed (for example, see FIG. 10). Then, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a variable time corresponding to the variable pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, as this first special symbol is stopped and displayed, The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination (for example, see FIG. 11(H)). In this way, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are synchronized. Further, the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner when the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed when the second special symbol stops being displayed. The fluctuating display of decorative patterns is also synchronized. That is, the decorative pattern is a display (hereinafter referred to as "corresponding display") that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being executed.

During such variable display of symbols, a so-called reach effect may be performed. Specifically, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays, for example, three rows of decorative patterns in which numbers 1 to 9 are consecutively written vertically from bottom to top. , when the variable display of the first special symbols is started, these symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll from top to bottom (for example, see FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B)). On the other hand, when a reach effect is performed, before all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, first, for example, the decorative symbols in the left and right columns (left and right symbols) are not completely displayed. Pseudo-stop to avoid stopping. In addition, a pseudo-stop is an effect in which the decorative pattern is slightly moved on the spot without moving much, and in the following explanation, it is referred to as a real stop (sometimes simply called a "stop display") in which the decorative pattern is completely still. When distinguishing, it may be called a pseudo-stop.

When the left symbol and the right symbol come to a pseudo-stop, if the same ornamental symbol as these symbols comes to a pseudo-stop on the active line, a reach is established, and a combination that indicates a jackpot (for example, a combination with the same ornament such as "333" or "777") A ready-to-win effect is performed that makes the player feel a sense of expectation that the decorative symbols will come to a pseudo stop (and a real stop) when three symbols are aligned (double number). In this reach effect, the player moves the decorative symbols constituting the middle row of symbols while the same decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as "reach symbols") are pseudo-stopped as the left and right symbols. This is an effect in which the player is scrolled at a low speed so that it can be identified, and finally a middle symbol that is common to the reach symbol or a middle symbol that is different from the reach symbol is stopped on the activated line to notify a win or loss.

Note that in addition to decorative patterns, other effect images such as characters and items may be used for this reach effect (see FIG. 10(G)). In addition, in the following explanation, in a symbol variation in which a reach effect is performed, the effect performed until the reach effect is established may be referred to as a "pre-reach effect." Pre-reach performance and reach performance are two cases: a pseudo-stop (and real stop) in a combination mode where the decorative symbols indicate a jackpot, and a real stop in a combination mode other than the combination mode that indicates a jackpot (i.e., a combination mode that indicates a loss). This is a viable production for both.

The reach effect will be described in detail later, but if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", the losing symbol will be stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and a losing symbol will be displayed to notify you of the loss. The three decorative patterns come to a stop in the combination shown. For example, when a ready-to-win effect is performed, the three decorative symbols indicating the winning number (for example, "343") are stopped as the losing symbols are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect is not performed, the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, and the three decorative symbols representing winning numbers (for example, "154") are stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game will not be executed, a loss notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner that indicates a loss, and then the actual stop is made to notify the loss (that the jackpot game will not be executed). executed.

If this loss notification performance is executed, the jackpot game will not be executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol will begin immediately. .

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", reach effect is usually executed while the first special symbol is fluctuating, and as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Then, the three decorative symbols come to a pseudo stop in a manner indicating a jackpot (for example, a double number such as "333" or "777"), and then the real stop occurs. In this way, when it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, a hit notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, and then stopped for real to notify a jackpot (that a jackpot game will be executed). executed. When this winning notification performance is executed, a jackpot game is executed.

[About the icon]
Even if a game ball wins in the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during the special symbol fluctuation display or jackpot game, the special symbol judgment and symbol fluctuation display triggered by this winning will be immediately executed. It cannot be executed. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 (or second starting port 12), the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) and symbol fluctuation display are immediately performed. If it cannot be executed, the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is suspended within a range not exceeding a predetermined number (“4” in this embodiment), and the suspended number is displayed as the first special symbol pending display. It is displayed on the device 43 (or the second special symbol reservation display 44).

On the other hand, the liquid crystal screen 5 has a first pending icon display area 51 and A second hold icon display area 52 is provided (see FIG. 1).

The first pending icon display area 51 is an area where a pending icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is pending is displayed. In this first pending icon display area 51, the same number of pending icons as the number of pending first special symbol determinations indicated by the first special symbol pending display 43 (see FIG. 3) are displayed.

The second pending icon display area 52 is an area where a pending icon indicating that the second special symbol determination is pending is displayed. In this second pending icon display area 52, the same number of pending icons as the number of pending second special symbol determinations indicated by the second special symbol pending display 44 (see FIG. 3) are displayed.

In FIG. 1, three pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 to suggest that the number of pending points for the first special symbol determination is "3", and three pending icons are displayed for the second special symbol determination. A state in which two pending icons are displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 is illustrated to indicate that the pending number is "2."

Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the area 53 is used as a display area for displaying a variation suggestion image (hereinafter referred to as "the icon") that suggests that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (See Figure 1).

In the gaming machine 1, when the fluctuating display of symbols is started in order to extinguish the right to determine the first special symbol that has been reserved, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51 is displayed first. The pending icon (the pending icon closest to the area 53) is moved from the first pending icon display area 51 to the area 53 and displayed as the icon. Then, when other pending icons are displayed in the first pending display area 51, the other pending icons are shifted to the area 53 side within the first pending icon display area 51.

Note that such shift processing is similarly performed for the pending icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 52. The icon is an image that is displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a corresponding display that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed. In addition, the pending icon is displayed while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (or before a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the special symbol's stop display), so the right to judge the pending special symbol is not displayed. This is an image that informs you that the food cannot be digested right away. Therefore, the pending icon is an image that is displayed in response to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, and can be said to be a corresponding display that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. . Therefore, the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is performed with priority over the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51.

A first special symbol determination (or a second special symbol determination) is performed based on acquired information such as a jackpot random number acquired in response to a game ball winning in the first starting hole 11 (or second starting hole 12). Previously, the hold icon corresponding to the obtained information is displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 (or the second hold icon display area 52). Then, when special symbol determination and special symbol fluctuation display are performed based on the obtained information corresponding to the pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 (or second pending icon display area 52), The hold icon moves to the area 53 and is displayed in the area 53 as the icon suggesting that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

Note that, for example, normal icons and special icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51. Here, the normal icon is a default hold icon, and is, for example, a white hold icon. The special icon is a pending icon that indicates jackpot reliability, and corresponds to a pending icon displayed in a color other than white. The special icons in this embodiment, when arranged in order from lowest to highest implied jackpot reliability, are: blue pending icon (blue pending), green pending icon (green pending), red pending icon (red pending) , the gold pending icon (gold pending), and the rainbow pending icon (rainbow pending), and the respective jackpot reliability rates are 5%, 15%, 50%, 75%, and 100% (see Figure 32). ).

The display mode of a normal icon may not change until the special symbol determination corresponding to the pending icon is completed, that is, from the time the normal icon moves to the area 53 until it is deleted from the area 53. . Furthermore, when the hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, for example, it may be displayed as a special icon from the beginning. Further, for example, when a normal icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 changes to a special icon in the first pending icon display area 51 or the area 53, The special icon may change to a higher-ranking special icon once or multiple times in the first pending icon display area 51 or the area 53. In the following explanation, a performance that indicates the reliability of a jackpot by displaying a special icon as a pending icon will be referred to as a "preliminary performance."

In the second pending icon display area 52, normal icons and special icons are displayed, similar to the first pending icon display area 51. Therefore, explanation regarding the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 will be omitted.

[About gaming status]
Hereinafter, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming state. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three gaming states: "normal gaming state", "variable probability gaming state", and "time-saving gaming state".

The "normal game state" is a normal game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state in which the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively low, and the electric chew support function is not provided. That is, in the normal game state, the probability that a jackpot game will be executed based on the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened according to the normal symbol judgment is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively long time (for example, 25 seconds). , and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds x once).

The "variable probability game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively high, and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the variable probability game state, the probability of executing the jackpot game based on the special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/50) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). , and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds x 3 times).

The "time saving game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability that a jackpot game will be executed based on the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, about 1/200). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). , and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds x 3 times).

Comparing each gaming state regarding the variation time of special symbols, the variation time of special symbols in the "probable variable gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" is relatively short compared to the variation time of the special symbol in the "normal gaming state". Easy to set on time.

In addition, as shown in the explanation of each game state, the probability that it will be determined that the special game will be executed (jackpot probability), the probability that it will be determined that the second starting port 12 will be opened (the winning probability of normal symbol determination), and the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The time and the opening time of the second starting port 12 are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other probabilities and times may be used.

In addition, in the following explanation, the state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 12 due to the electric chew support function being provided will be referred to as the "high base state", and the state in which the electric chew support function is provided will be referred to as the "high base state". A state in which it is not easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 12 due to the absence of the ball is referred to as a "low base state".

A game ball hit to the right by a player may not win a prize in the first starting hole 11 but can win a prize in the second starting hole 12. However, in the low base state, the second starting port 12 is difficult to open, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (which corresponds to the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment), the player plays the game by hitting the left hand aiming at the first starting opening 11. Become.

When a game ball hit to the left enters the first starting slot 11 during the normal gaming state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. As the first special symbol shown, a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, if the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game will not be played and the gaming state will not change. On the other hand, when a jackpot symbol indicating a "probable jackpot" is displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game is executed in which a long open round game is played a predetermined number of times according to the jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game ends, The game will be controlled in a variable probability gaming state. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured as a gaming machine called a variable probability loop type, and after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability gaming state basically continues until the next jackpot.

In addition, when the gaming state shifts to the variable probability gaming state, that is, when shifting from the low base state to the high base state, it is easier for the game ball to win in the second starting port 12 than in the first starting port 11. . Therefore, when the game is controlled in a high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at the second starting opening 12. This is the same when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, and in the variable probability game state and the normal game state, basically, the second special symbol determination is performed.

When a jackpot symbol indicating a "probable variable jackpot" is displayed as a second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state, the game is controlled again in the variable probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and a "normal jackpot" is displayed as the second special symbol. When the jackpot symbol shown is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, in the normal game state, if a jackpot symbol indicating a "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which a long open round game is performed a predetermined number of times according to the jackpot symbol is executed, and the jackpot game After the end, the game will be controlled in a time-saving game state. In this time-saving gaming state, if the special symbol determination (basically the second special symbol determination) is not determined to be a jackpot even if it is performed 50 times (an example of the prescribed number of times in FIG. 5), the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, if a jackpot is determined in the second special symbol judgment within 50 times, and a jackpot symbol indicating "probable variable jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the jackpot symbol according to the jackpot symbol will be displayed as the second special symbol. After the end of the jackpot game, the game is controlled in a variable probability game state. In addition, when a jackpot symbol indicating a "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, after the jackpot game including the long open round game for a predetermined number of times according to the jackpot symbol is finished, the time saving game state is resumed. The game will be controlled accordingly.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the main CPU 101 can control the game in any one of the three game states: the normal game state, the variable probability game state, and the time-saving game state. In addition, after executing the jackpot game, the game can be controlled in one of two types of game states: a variable probability game state and a time-saving game state.

In addition, in other embodiments, for example, a new jackpot in which the game is controlled in the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is provided, and after the end of the jackpot game, three of the probability-changing gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the normal gaming state are set. A configuration may be adopted in which the game can be controlled in any one of the game states.

[About special symbol determination using random numbers]
Next, special symbol determination using jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various random numbers used for special symbol determination.

The jackpot random numbers illustrated in FIG. 6(A) are random numbers used in the jackpot determination process (step S309 in FIG. 41) to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability that it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed is A low probability state with a relatively low probability and a high probability state with a relatively high probability of executing a jackpot game are individually set.

In this embodiment, two winning values "0" and "1" are stored in the main ROM 102 regarding the low probability state, and the main CPU 101 stores the winning values obtained when the game is controlled in the low probability state. When the jackpot random number matches either of these two winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed. Regarding the high probability state, in this embodiment, eight winning values from "0" to "7" are stored in the main ROM 102, and the jackpot random number obtained when the game is controlled in the high probability state is If it matches any of these eight winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed.

In this embodiment, the possible range of the jackpot random number is "0" to "399" in both the low probability state and the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/200 (=2/400), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50 (=8/400). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the probability is high, it is four times more likely to hit the jackpot than when the probability is low.

When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game, the main CPU 101 determines which random number among the random numbers set in advance for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the judgment. Determine the type of jackpot based on.

Note that, for example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by the hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, in response to operating (for example, pressing) a setting value switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming control board 100 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the setting value related to the jackpot probability is set to a predetermined value. (for example, any value from "1" to "3"). The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to a different probability.

For example, the larger the setting value is, the more likely it is to be a jackpot, and the ratio between the jackpot probability in the high probability state and the jackpot probability in the low probability state may be fixed regardless of the setting value. For example, the jackpot probability in a low probability state is set to 1/220 when the setting value is "1", 1/200 when the setting value is "2", and the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 when the setting value is "2". 3'', it is set to 1/180. Also, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 1/27.5 (= 1/220 x 8 times) when the setting value is "1", and when the setting value is "2" It is set to 1/25 (=1/200×8 times), and when the setting value is “3”, it is set to 1/22.5 (=1/180×8 times).

(Types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in this embodiment, three types of jackpots are prepared by winning the first starting opening: "16R probability variable jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot". has been done. Here, the "16R variable probability jackpot" (16R variable probability jackpot) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state after a jackpot game in which 16 long open round games are performed is executed. "6R probability variable jackpot" (6R probability variation) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a probability variation gaming state after a jackpot game in which six long open round games are executed. "6R normal jackpot" (6R normal) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state after a jackpot game in which six long open round games are executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in this embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" are stored for the 16R definite variation, 110 random numbers from "10" to "119" are stored for the 6R definite variation, and 80 random numbers from "120" to "199" are stored for the normal value.

In this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to "0" to "199". Therefore, when it is determined that there is a jackpot in response to the first winning entry, the percentage of the jackpot type being determined to be 16R probability variation is 5% (= 10/200 x 100), and the jackpot type is determined to be 6R probability variation. The percentage determined is 55% (=110/200×100), and the percentage determined as the jackpot type is 6R is 40% (=80/200×100).

Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot, the proportion that the jackpot symbol X1 indicating a 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol is 5%, and the jackpot symbol X2 indicating a 6R probability variation is The percentage of the stopped display is 55%, and the percentage of the jackpot symbol X3 indicating 6R normal is stopped and displayed is 40%.

Furthermore, when these three types of jackpots are compared in terms of the number of prize balls that a player can obtain, the following can be said. That is, for example, if it is assumed that 15 prize balls are paid out every time a game ball enters the big winning hole 13, and one long open round game ends when 8 game balls enter the prize, 16R In the variable game, the player can win 1920 (=15×8×16) prize balls. Further, under the same assumption, the player can win 720 (=15×8×6) prize balls in 6R normal and 6R fixed variations.

(Type of jackpot related to second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(C), in this embodiment, the types of jackpots due to the second starting opening winning are "16R probability variable jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "4R probability variation jackpot", and "8R normal jackpot". There are four types available. Here, the jackpot game performed when the "16R probability variable jackpot" (16R probability variation) occurs and the subsequent gaming state are the same as in the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, "8R probability variable jackpot" (8R probability variation) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a probability variation gaming state after a jackpot game in which eight long open round games are executed. "4R probability variable jackpot" (4R probability variation) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a probability variation gaming state after a jackpot game in which four long open round games are executed. "8R normal jackpot" (8R normal) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state after a jackpot game in which eight long open round games are executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 6(C), in this embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 80 random numbers from "0" to "79" are stored for the 16R definite variation, 20 random numbers from "80" to "99" are stored for the 8R probability variation, and 4R 20 random numbers from "110" to "119" are stored for the variable probability, and 80 random numbers from "120" to "199" are stored for the 8R normal.

Here, in this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random numbers related to the second special symbol determination is the same as the possible range of the symbol random numbers related to the second special symbol determination. For this reason, when it is determined that there is a jackpot in response to the winning from the second starting opening, the percentage of the jackpot type being determined to be 16R probability variation is 40% (=80/200 x 100), and the jackpot type is determined to be 8R probability variation. The percentage determined is 10% (=20/200×100), and the percentage that the jackpot type is determined to be 4R probability variation is also 10% (=20/200×100), and the percentage that the jackpot type is 8R normal. The ratio determined is 40% (=80/200×100).

Therefore, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the proportion that the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating a 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol is 40%, and the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating an 8R probability variation is The percentage of stop display is 10%, the percentage of stop display of jackpot symbol Y3 indicating 4R probability change is 10%, and the percentage of stop display of jackpot symbol Y4 indicating 8R normal is 40%.

Furthermore, when these four types of jackpots are compared in terms of the number of prize balls that a player can obtain, the following can be said. That is, for example, if it is assumed that 15 prize balls are paid out every time a game ball enters the big winning hole 13, and one long open round game ends when 8 game balls enter the prize, 16R In the probability variation, the player can win 1920 (=15×8×16) prize balls, as in the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed. Further, under the same assumption, the player can win 960 prize balls (=15×8×8) in 8R probability variation and 8R normal. Furthermore, in the 4R probability game, the player can win 480 (=15×8×4) prize balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a 4R jackpot game in which the player can win 480 prize balls, and a 6R jackpot game in which the player can win 720 prize balls. A jackpot game of 8R in which a player can win 960 prize balls, and a jackpot game of 16R in which a player can win 1920 prize balls can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the odd numbered symbols (1 symbol, 3 symbol, 5 symbol, 7 symbol, 9 symbol) in which the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are odd numbers in green function as variable probability symbols. Furthermore, even-numbered symbols (2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols) in which the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are blue and even numbers function as normal symbols. And, the 7 symbols are only used for the hit notification effect when it becomes 16R probability change. Therefore, in the normal game state or the variable probability game state, when the jackpot symbols X1 and Y1 corresponding to the 16R probability variable come to a final stop, the three decorative symbols showing the double number "777" will come to a final stop, and the other probability variable jackpots will come to a final stop. When the jackpot symbols X2, Y2, and Y3 corresponding to this come to a final stop, three decorative symbols that indicate the number of odd-numbered symbols that are different from the seven symbols such as "111," "333," "555," and "999" The book will stop. Further, when the jackpot symbols X3 and Y4 corresponding to 6R normal and 8R normal come to a final stop, three decorative symbols showing the double number of even-numbered symbols also come to a final stop.

Note that the type of jackpot is not limited to the above-mentioned type, and may be any type as long as it can put the player in an advantageous state depending on the result of the special symbol determination. For example, a jackpot corresponding to jackpot symbols X1 and Y1 can be achieved by playing 10 long open round games (for example, a player can win 1500 (=15 x 8 x 10) prize balls), and immediately after the jackpot game ends. It may also be a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state.

[Flow of performance in normal gaming state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the production that is performed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The flow will be explained below. Here, FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of performance in the normal gaming state.

As described above, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player will hit the game ball to the left aiming at winning the game ball into the first starting hole 11. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11, the main CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination. In this first special symbol determination, in addition to the process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot described above based on FIG. 6 and the process of determining the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, a variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected. Processing is included, and the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 receives a variation start command from the game control board 100 including information indicating the result of the first special symbol determination, and based on this information, the sub CPU 131 controls the LCD screen 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25, A performance pattern of a performance performed using various performance means such as a frame lamp 37 and a performance accessory 7 is set. Then, the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing to realize effects based on these settings.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, on the liquid crystal screen 5, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started (see FIG. 7(A)). Here, if it is determined at the start of the symbol variation to perform a no-reach effect, for example, a no-reach effect is performed in which the left and right symbols pseudo-stop in a manner that does not form a reach (see Fig. 7 (B)). ). Examples of this no-reach production include a production where 2 symbols as the left symbol pseudo-stop, followed by a pseudo-stop of 5 symbols as the right symbol, and a production where 6 symbols as the left symbol and 4 symbols as the right symbol pseudo-stop at the same time. Can be mentioned. When this no-reach performance is performed, a loss notification performance is usually performed in which the three decorative symbols indicating the winning result come to a pseudo stop and then come to a real stop (see FIG. 7(C)). In this embodiment, the same (or similar) performance as the pre-reach performance is executed as the non-reach performance, except that the reach is not achieved. For this reason, until the decorative symbol stops and this variable display indicates that there is no possibility of achieving a reach, the game does not know whether the no-reach effect is being executed or the pre-reach effect. people cannot tell the difference.

On the other hand, if it is determined at the start of the symbol variation to perform a reach effect, for example, the decorative symbols common to each other as the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped and a reach is established (see FIG. 7(D)), A normal reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal reach") is performed (see FIG. 7(E)). This normal reach effect is a reach effect that increases the player's expectation that the middle symbol, which is the same as the reach symbol, will stop on the active line connecting two reach symbols (see FIG. 10(D)). When this normal reach is performed, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbol rows that has been scrolled at high speed gradually decreases. For example, when a reach is established with 3 symbols (see Figure 10 (C)), if the 3 symbols as the middle symbol pseudo-stops on the active line and then comes to a real stop with the 2 reach symbols, "333 A jackpot is announced when all the symbols are aligned (see FIG. 7(H)). On the other hand, if a medium symbol different from the reach symbol makes a pseudo stop on the active line and then comes to a real stop along with two reach symbols, the reach loss number, for example "343", is stopped and displayed to notify you of the loss (Fig. 7(C)).

On the other hand, if the middle row scroll display continues even after the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol passes the active line, the reach effect changes from normal reach to character SP reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "Character SP reach"). will develop (see Figure 7(F)). This character SP reach is a reach performance with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. In the character SP reach in this embodiment, the following effects are performed. That is, when the character SP reaches the character SP reach, a title related to the character SP reach is displayed, which displays a message such as "Take back the treasure chest from the enemy!", although it is not shown in the figure. Then, a competition effect is performed in which the own character (hereinafter referred to as "own character") and the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "enemy character") compete for the treasure chest (Fig. 7 (F-1), 13(A)).

Then, as a result of this competition performance, a competition failure performance (see FIG. 7 (F-2)) or a competition success performance (see FIG. 7 (F-5)) is performed. Here, the contention failure effect is configured, for example, as a presentation display showing a situation where the character loses the contention with the enemy character (see FIG. 13(B)). When this capture failure effect is executed, a development suggestion effect (Figure 7 (F -4)), or a non-development suggestion effect (see Figure 7 (F-3)) is performed that suggests that the character SP reach will not develop into SPSP reach. This non-development suggesting effect is configured, for example, as a effect display showing an enemy character running away after stealing a treasure chest (see FIG. 13(C)). If this non-development suggestion performance is performed, there is no possibility of a jackpot being announced, and a loss is announced by the false stop of the reach loss (for example, "343") and then the actual stop (Figure 7 (See (G)). On the other hand, the development suggestion production is configured as a production display that shows, for example, an ally character (ally character) coming to the aid of the own character, the own character standing up, and then chasing after an enemy character who has run away (Fig. 13(E) and (F)). Then, when this development suggestion effect is performed, it will develop into SPSP Reach, which shows how the own character discovers the escaped enemy character and a battle between the own character and the enemy character unfolds (Figure 7 (I )reference).

This SPSP reach is a reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach and SP reach, and when your character wins a battle with an enemy character, the symbols match and a jackpot is announced (see Figure 7 (H)). When the player's own character is defeated by the enemy character, the winning move will be pseudo-stopped, then the real stop will be made, and the loss will be reported (see FIG. 7(G)).

As is clear from the explanation so far, the capture failure effect (see FIG. 7 (F-2)) can be executed both when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot and a loss. However, once the performance progresses to a non-development suggesting performance, there will be no jackpot announcement afterwards. On the other hand, when the performance progresses from the capture failure performance to the development suggestion performance, a jackpot notification may be made and a loss notification may be made in the subsequent SPSP reach. In other words, if the performance progresses to a non-developmental suggestion performance, there is no possibility of a jackpot remaining, whereas if the performance progresses to a development suggestion performance, there is no possibility of a jackpot remaining. ing.

Therefore, when a competition failure performance is performed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that a development suggestion performance will be performed instead of a non-development suggestion performance.

On the other hand, the capture success effect (see FIG. 7 (F-5)) is configured as a display showing, for example, that the own character outbids the enemy character and succeeds in capturing the treasure chest (see FIG. 13 (A) and (Refer to (H)), when this successful capture effect is performed, the effect display showing how the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols is decreasing is not performed, and a double eye is formed immediately after the successful capture effect. After the three decorative symbols that appear come to a pseudo stop, the main stop immediately occurs (see FIGS. 13(H) and (I)).

In this way, when the winning success effect is performed, the winning notification effect is executed to notify that it has been determined that the jackpot game will be executed. For this reason, when the game develops into a contest performance, the player can enjoy the game while first expecting that a successful take performance will be performed instead of a failed take performance.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, an effect called "next preview" may be performed during normal reach (see FIG. 7(K)). This next preview is a performance that suggests that it will later develop into SPSP reach, and when the next preview is made, the normal reach will directly develop into SPSP reach without going through character SP reach (Figure 7 ( (See E), (K), (I)).

On the other hand, in some cases where the first special symbol judgment results in a probability-variable jackpot (16R probability variation in Figure 6(B)), a no-reach effect (see Figure 7(B)) is performed. After that, a jackpot effect (see FIG. 7(J)) may be performed, and immediately after that, a jackpot notification (see FIG. 7(H)) may be performed. This jackpot effect is one of the preview effects that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed before the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and will be described in detail later based on FIG. 14. However, it is configured as an effect in which the symbols (in this embodiment, variable probability symbols) suddenly line up. Since the jackpot effect is configured as an effect in which three probability-variable symbols forming the double number suddenly pop out, it is a suggestive effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in a probability-variable game state after the jackpot game ends. It has a function.

In this way, by performing the hit effect immediately after performing the no-reach effect, it is possible to create a sense of surprise and surprise for players who were not expecting a jackpot at all based on the fact that the reach was not established. This is possible, and as a result, it is possible to obtain high performance effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, a hit effect can be executed when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation or 6R probability variation, but a structure in which the jackpot effect is not executed when it is 6R normal. has been adopted. In other words, the hit effect can be executed when the odd numbered symbols come to a final stop with the stop display of the first special symbol, but it is not performed when the even numbered symbols come to a final stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a surprise when the symbols suddenly line up, and also, after the end of the jackpot game, in a more advantageous gaming state (probability variable gaming state) compared to the normal 6R. Since the game is controlled, it is possible to effectively improve the player's joy at winning the jackpot.

On the other hand, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the hit effect can be executed only when the probability is 16R, and the hit effect is not executed when the probability is 6R or 6R normal. Further, regardless of the type of jackpot, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot effect can be executed. However, when such a configuration is adopted, it is not possible to make the player who was hoping for a guaranteed jackpot feel sufficient joy when performing a hit effect in which even-numbered symbols that function as normal symbols suddenly line up. As a result, there is a possibility that high performance effects cannot be obtained. For this reason, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which at least the winning effect can be executed when it is a variable jackpot, but the winning effect is not executed when it is a normal jackpot.

Regarding the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 7, the flow of effects from the start of variation in FIG. 7(A) to the jackpot notification in FIG. 7(H), and the flow of effects from the start of variation in FIG. The flow of the performance up to the loss notification in C) and (G) is based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot game, the determination result of whether or not to perform the reach effect, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. Based on this, the settings are made by the sub CPU 131.

Further, the specific effects described based on FIG. 7 are merely examples, and each effect may be other effects. For example, the contest effect may be an effect that displays a scene in which the player's character is about to lose his mobile phone to an enemy character but tries to take it back. In this case, a production that displays a scene in which the own character succeeds in taking back the cell phone from the enemy character is executed as a capture success production, and conversely, a production that displays the scene in which the own character is robbed of the cell phone by the enemy character is executed. It is conceivable that the performance displaying the performance may be executed as a capture failure performance. In addition, character SP reach is not a production that starts with a contest production, but is simply a production display that shows how the own character attempts to destroy a middle symbol that is different from the reach symbol, and it is not a production that starts with a contest production. For example, the symbols may be aligned, and if the symbols fail to be destroyed, a hit miss may be displayed.

In other embodiments, a production pattern that directly develops from reach establishment to character SP reach or SPSP reach without going through normal reach may be prepared.

[Flow of performance in fixed variable gaming state]
Next, while referring to FIG. 8, when the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state, the process is performed between when the variable display of the second special symbol starts and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Explain the flow of the production. Here, FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of performance in the variable probability gaming state.

As described above, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, the player will hit the game ball to the right with the aim of winning the game ball into the second starting hole 12. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second starting port 12, the main CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination. In this second special symbol determination, in addition to the process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot described above based on FIG. 6 and the process of determining the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, a variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected. Processing is included, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 receives a variation start command from the game control board 100 including information indicating the result of the second special symbol determination, and based on this information, the sub CPU 131 controls the LCD screen 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25, A performance pattern of a performance performed using various performance means such as a frame lamp 37 and a performance accessory 7 is set. Then, the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing to realize effects based on these settings.

When the second special symbol determination is performed, on the liquid crystal screen 5, along with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started (see FIG. 8(A)). Here, if it is determined at the start of the symbol variation to perform a no-reach effect, for example, a no-reach effect is performed in which the left and right symbols pseudo-stop in a manner that does not form a reach (see FIG. 8(B)). ). This no-reach performance can be similar to the no-reach performance described based on FIG. 7(B), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. In this way, when a no-reach effect is performed in a variable probability game state, a loss notification effect is usually performed in which the three decorative symbols forming the winning combination come to a pseudo stop and then come to a real stop (Fig. 8 (C) )reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined at the start of the symbol variation to perform a reach effect, for example, the decorative symbols that are common to each other as the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped and a reach effect is established (see FIG. 8(D)). A battle reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "battle reach") is performed (see FIG. 8(E)). This battle reach is a reach effect in which your character and the enemy character battle, and when the victory suggestion effect (see Figure 8 (F)) that shows your character winning against the enemy character is performed, you will receive a guaranteed jackpot. This will be notified (see FIG. 8(G)). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variable probability game state, odd numbered symbols (1 symbol, 3 symbol, 5 symbol, 7 symbol, 9 symbol) function as variable probability symbols, and even numbered symbols (2 symbol, 4 symbol, 6 symbol). , 8 symbols) function as normal symbols. Therefore, in the variable probability jackpot notification of FIG. 8(G), an effect display is performed in which the three decorative symbols that are arranged in odd numbers come to a pseudo stop and then come to a real stop.

In addition, the victory suggestion performance is performed when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a probability-variable jackpot, and if this victory suggestion production is performed and a probability-variable jackpot is announced, the probability-variable gaming state will continue. .

On the other hand, following the battle reach, there is a case where a defeat suggestion effect (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed that shows how the own character is defeated by the enemy character. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, a normal hit notification is performed in which the three decorative symbols, which are even-numbered symbols and are aligned, are pseudo-stopped and then actually stopped (Fig. 8 (See (I)). Note that the display mode of the decorative patterns used for the normal jackpot notification is not limited to this, and for example, any combination other than the decorative patterns used for the variable jackpot notification may be used. You may also use it.

Further, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability-variable jackpot, a revival performance (see FIG. 8(J)) may be performed following the defeat suggesting performance. This resurrection performance is configured as a performance display that shows how the player's own character, who has fallen down after being defeated by an enemy character, is revived and stands up due to the appearance of an ally character. When this revival performance is performed, the above-mentioned victory suggestion performance (see FIG. 8(F)) is performed, and a probability-variable jackpot notification (see FIG. 8(G)) is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the resurrection effect is performed only when the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed in the 16R probability variation, and the resurrection effect is performed. At this point, it is highly likely that 16R will win. Therefore, the revival performance can be regarded as a preview performance (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot notice") that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed. In addition, the jackpot notice is a performance that can be executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", and it is not executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a "loss", and the jackpot reliability is low. It is 100% production. In this embodiment, many jackpot previews are prepared in addition to the revival performance, and in this specification, these jackpot previews will also be explained as appropriate.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured as a so-called battle type gaming machine, and is configured such that reach is not achieved unless a jackpot of some kind such as a variable probability jackpot or a regular jackpot is won in a variable probability gaming state. The game has an easy-to-understand gameplay in which if your character wins against the enemy character, the variable game state continues, and if your character loses to the enemy character, the variable game state ends and the game enters the time-saving game state. There is.

On the other hand, in some cases where the second special symbol judgment results in a probability-variable jackpot (16R probability variation in Figure 6(C)), a no-reach effect (see Figure 8(B)) is performed. Immediately after the jackpot performance (see FIG. 8(K)) is performed, a probability-variable jackpot notification (see FIG. 8(G)) may be performed. In other words, the hit effect can be executed when the 7-symbol set comes to a final stop with the stop display of the second special symbol, but it is not executed when the 7-symbol set comes to a full stop with the stop display of the second special symbol. This jackpot effect is one of the preview effects that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed before the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and will be described in detail later based on FIG. 16. However, it is structured as a performance in which the patterns (variable patterns) suddenly line up.

In this way, by performing the hit effect immediately after performing the no-reach effect, it is possible to create a sense of surprise and surprise for players who were not expecting a jackpot at all based on the fact that the reach was not established. This is possible, and as a result, it is possible to obtain high performance effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the probability variable game state, when the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, 4R probability variation, the jackpot effect can be executed, and when it is 8R normal, the jackpot effect is executed. It uses a configuration that does not perform winning effects. On the other hand, in other embodiments, in the probability variable gaming state, the jackpot effect can be executed only when the probability is 16R, and when it is other jackpots such as 8R probability, 4R probability, and 8R normal, the jackpot is executed. A configuration in which no performance is performed may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot performance can be executed regardless of the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination.

Regarding the series of performances illustrated in FIG. 8, the flow of the performance from the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 8(A) to the loss notification in FIG. 8(C), and the flow of the performance from the start of the fluctuation in FIG. ), the flow of performance from the start of variation in Figure 8(A) to the normal winning notification in Figure 8(I) is the determination of whether or not to execute a jackpot game. As a result, it is set by the sub CPU 131 based on the determination result of whether or not to perform the reach effect and the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

[About the decorativeness of decorative patterns]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the decorativeness of the decorative symbols in the normal game state and the variable probability game state will be explained. Here, FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decorativeness of the decorative pattern.

(Decorativeness of decorative patterns in normal game state)
When the game is controlled in the normal game state, decorative symbols in the following display mode are displayed in each production section during the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, before the reach, which is the production period from when the variable display of decorative symbols starts until the reach is established, decorative symbols with characters attached to large numbers are displayed, although they are not shown in the figure. This also applies during normal reach due to the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10(D)).

On the other hand, during character SP reach or SPSP reach due to the variable display of the first special symbol, a decorative symbol consisting of small numbers to which no character is attached is displayed. In other words, when a normal reach progresses to a character SP reach or SPSP reach, the character is removed from the decorative pattern consisting of large numbers attached to it, and the decorative pattern (number) becomes smaller and moves from the center of the screen to the screen. It moves to the periphery (for example, see FIGS. 10(E) to (G)). This character is a display (hereinafter referred to as "additional display") that is superimposed behind the numbers (green or blue in this embodiment) that make up the decorative pattern, and for example, each number that makes up the decorative pattern. different.

In the following explanation, a decorative pattern consisting of large numbers with characters attached will be referred to as a "first mode decorative pattern", and a decorative pattern consisting of small numbers without a character will be referred to as a "second mode decorative pattern". call.

For example, when the decorative pattern of the first mode is pseudo-stopped, and when the decorative pattern of the first mode changes to the decorative pattern of the second mode (and vice versa), it is an additional display. The character's arms and legs move to create cool poses. However, while scrolling, the limbs of the additionally displayed character do not move or pose, regardless of the scrolling speed. Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the numbers forming the decorative symbol become a still image, and the additionally displayed characters do not move at all and become a still image. In other embodiments, while the special symbols are displayed in a static state, the numbers forming the decorative symbols become still images, while the additionally displayed characters may be posed in a fashionable manner.

In addition, at the time of winning/losing notification in which a decorative pattern for notifying a jackpot or loss is stopped and displayed in conjunction with the stop display of the first special pattern, a decorative pattern in the same display mode as before the reach is displayed (for example, Fig. 11 (E ), (see (H)). Therefore, when a hit notification performance or a loss notification performance is performed following the character SP reach or SPSP reach, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern may be reversed from that illustrated in FIG. 10(F). Change occurs. In other words, a decorative pattern consisting of small numbers to which no characters are attached (decorative pattern of the second aspect) moves from the periphery of the screen to the center of the screen while increasing in size, and as a result, characters are attached to the decorative pattern (numbers). be done. The decorative pattern is expanded from being a decorative pattern of the second mode to a state of being a decorative pattern of the second mode enlarged three times, and then becomes a state of being a decorative pattern of the first mode. In addition, the decorative pattern of the 2nd aspect expanded three times and the decorative pattern of the 1st aspect may be generally the same in vertical and horizontal size.

As is clear from the explanation up to this point, in the normal gaming state, before the reach where decorative symbols with large numbers and characters (i.e. the decorative symbols of the first aspect) are displayed, the normal reach It can be said that the decorative design is highly decorative during the middle and win/lose notification times. On the other hand, in Character SP Reach and SPSP Reach, a production using objects different from decorative patterns such as characters and items is developed, so small numbers without characters attached are used so as not to interfere with this production. By displaying a decorative pattern consisting of (i.e., a decorative pattern of the second aspect) on the periphery of the screen, the decorative pattern is suppressed from lowering the visibility of the performance image used for the above-mentioned performance.

(Decorativeness of decorative patterns in variable game state)
When the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state, for example, the decorative symbols of the second mode are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbols. Specifically, in each production section during the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9, decorative symbols in the following display manner are displayed. In other words, although it is not shown in the diagram, before the reach, which is the production period from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols until the reach is established, decorative symbols without characters attached to large numbers (specific , a decorative pattern which is a three-fold enlargement of the decorative pattern of the second aspect is displayed (for example, see FIG. 15(C)). This also applies to the time of winning/losing notification when the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is permanently halted in conjunction with the final halt of the second special symbol. Note that the "decorative pattern obtained by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second aspect three times" may be displayed by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second aspect, or by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second aspect three times. The image data is prepared in advance in the control ROM 144 of the image and sound control board 140 separately from the image data related to the decorative pattern of the second aspect, and this data may be used for display.

In addition, in the variable probability game state, the player is most interested in whether a reach is achieved with variable probability symbols or whether a reach is achieved with normal symbols. In addition, the jackpot probability is higher in the variable probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state (see Figure 6 (A)), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. In the variable probability game state, the performance develops at a good tempo, and after the jackpot game ends, the win or loss will be announced in a relatively short time. For these reasons, in the variable probability game state, there is little need to increase the decorativeness of the decorative symbols more than necessary, and in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which characters are not attached to the numbers constituting the decorative symbols.

On the other hand, in the variable probability game state, if a reach is achieved and the battle progresses to reach, a battle between the own character and the enemy character develops in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. For this reason, if a decorative pattern with a large number is displayed in the center of the screen even though no character is attached, it will interfere with the battle performance. Therefore, during battle reach, the size and display position of the decorative pattern changes in order to display the second aspect of the decorative pattern in the same way as during character SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state. In other words, the state where the decorative pattern of the second mode is enlarged three times is reduced to the same size as the decorative pattern of the second mode during the character SP reach or SPSP reach when the battle reach is developed. The second aspect of the decorative pattern, which is not enlarged, is displayed at the periphery of the screen.

As is clear from the notation in Fig. 9, the numbers constituting the decorative patterns are displayed in large numbers before reaching the reach and when announcing a win or loss in the variable probability gaming state, which is similar to before reaching or when announcing the win or losing in the normal gaming state. , is different in that no characters are attached. Also, when compared with character SP reach mode and SPSP reach mode in the normal gaming state, although they are common in that no characters are attached, they are different in that the numbers forming the decorative symbols are large. From these facts, it can be said that the decorative patterns displayed before the reach or at the time of winning/losing notification in the variable probability gaming state have a medium level of decorativeness. On the other hand, during Battle Reach, the numbers that make up the decorative patterns are small and no characters are attached, which is the same as during Character SP Reach or SPSP Reach, so the decorations of the decorative patterns displayed during Battle Reach are the same. It can be said that the gender is low.

In this manner, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, control is performed to change the display mode of the decorative symbols in order to change the decorativeness of the decorative symbols in accordance with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Specifically, the state of being a decorative pattern of the first aspect becomes a state of being a decorative pattern of the second aspect, or the state of being a decorative pattern of the second aspect becomes a state of being a decorative pattern of the first aspect. do. Note that both the decorative pattern of the first aspect and the decorative pattern of the second aspect may be displayed at the same time. For example, in a normal reach, the pseudo-stopped left symbol and right symbol are the decorative symbols of the first mode, and the middle symbol that slowly scrolls downward is the decorative symbol of the second mode (e.g., enlarged with scrolling). (or may be reduced).

[Specific example: Pattern that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach]
FIGS. 10 and 11 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of effects that develop into SPSP reach via normal reach. FIG. 12 is a time chart showing a specific example of the display mode of decorative symbols when the promotion effect is executed.

In FIG. 10(A), in a state where two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is a loss. It is illustrated that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern indicating a certain situation is stopped and displayed. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as green pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol started, the first pending icon corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 Special symbol determination is executed. Accordingly, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 is shifted to the corresponding area 53, and the second pending icon is shifted to the position where the first pending icon was displayed. A shift process is performed, and along with this, variable display of decorative symbols is started (see FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B)).

Here, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, if a variable effect pattern is set that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach, for example, the following effect is performed.

That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the decorative symbols fluctuating, first the three symbols on the left will pseudo-stop, then the same three symbols will pseudo-stop as the right symbols, and a reach will be established (Figure 10(C) reference). When reach is established in this way, the above-mentioned normal reach is performed (see FIG. 10(D)).

During this normal reach, if the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (3 symbols in this case) passes the active line as a result of scrolling the symbol row in the middle row, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the middle row will increase after that. This may develop into SPSP reach (see Figures 10(E) to (G)). At this time, the three symbol rows that were displayed large in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 are reduced in size and moved to the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5 while maintaining the ready-to-reach state (see FIG. 10(F)). The decorative pattern is first a decorative pattern of the first mode, first enlarged three times to a state of a second mode decorative pattern, and then reduced to a non-enlarged second mode decorative pattern. be in a certain state. When the size and display area of the three pattern rows are changed in this way (that is, when the state of the decorative pattern of the first mode is changed to the state of the decorative pattern of the second mode), the LCD screen SPSP reach is executed using the area in the center of the screen of No. 5 (see FIG. 10(G)).

In the present embodiment, the ready-to-reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second mode) is pseudo-stopped in the upper left end area of the liquid crystal screen 5, whereas the middle symbol continues to be scrolled at high speed. When the decorative pattern of the first mode was displayed, the scrolling speed was slowed down or accelerated to draw attention to the trend of the middle pattern, whereas the decorative pattern of the second mode was small, so if the middle pattern Even if the scrolling speed is changed, it is difficult to understand, and there is a possibility that the presentation effect cannot be effectively improved. Therefore, when the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed, a configuration is adopted in which the display mode of the middle pattern is different from that when the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed. Specifically, when the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed, the scrolling speed of the middle pattern is kept constant (high-speed fluctuation). In addition, in other embodiments, when the decorative pattern of the second aspect is displayed, the scrolling speed of the medium pattern may be slowed down (or increased), or the medium pattern that is fluctuating at high speed may be hidden. Good too. Further, the speed at which the decorative patterns in the second aspect scroll at high speed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols in the first aspect scroll at high speed, or both may be at the same speed.

Furthermore, the ready-to-reach pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) displayed in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed in front of other performance images. For this reason, for example, when another effect image is displayed on the entire screen, the above-mentioned ready-to-reach symbol will be displayed superimposed on the near side. In addition, by displaying only the above-mentioned ready-to-win symbol in the upper left end area of the liquid crystal screen 5, the above-mentioned ready-to-win symbol may be visible even if other effect images are displayed.

Figure 10 (G) shows a situation where two own characters and an enemy character are facing each other, but when it develops into SPSP reach, first of all SPSP characters such as "Decisive battle 〇〇〇VS XXX A title display is performed that displays the reach title related to the reach effect. Then, a battle performance is started showing a battle between the player's own character and the enemy character.

While the SPSP reach is being performed in this way, an operation promotion effect is performed at the end of the SPSP reach (see FIG. 10(H)). This operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 26, and specifically includes, for example, a button image imitating the performance button 26, a message such as "Press!" that urges the operation, and a message that prompts the player to operate the performance button 26. The button operation is configured as an effect that displays a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period.

Here, if the player performs an operation within the validity period, a performance called a cut-in is performed as a performance corresponding to the operation (see FIG. 10(I)). Here, the cut-in is configured as an effect in which a specific effect image is displayed superimposed on the effect image related to SPSP reach, and the reliability of the jackpot is suggested by the display mode of the specific effect image. As will be detailed later, in this embodiment, the blue cut-in suggests that the jackpot reliability is about 10%, the red cut-in suggests that the jackpot reliability is about 60%, and the jackpot reliability is 100%. Rainbow-colored cut-ins suggesting the above are prepared, and any one of these three cut-ins is executed in response to an operation based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the cut-in does not occur unless the player performs an operation, but in other embodiments, if the player does not perform the operation, the cut-in occurs at the timing when the validity period ends. A configuration that automatically generates cut-in may also be adopted. Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the operation promotion effect and the cut-in according to the operation occur during SPSP reach but not during character SP reach, but in other embodiments, A configuration may also be adopted in which a cut-in can occur in reach effects other than reach (for example, during character SP reach).

If the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot, at the end of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, that is, at the end of SPSP reach, a victory notification effect that notifies that your character has defeated the enemy character and won the battle. is performed (see FIG. 11(A)). This victory notification performance includes, for example, displaying the words "Victory!!" on the LCD screen 5, outputting the sound "Victory!!" from the speaker 24, and rotating the performance accessory 7 while emitting rainbow-colored light. An example of this is a performance that makes people laugh. In addition, when this victory notification performance is performed, the same decorative pattern as the reach pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) is pseudo-stopped as a medium pattern between the reach pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) (Fig. 11 (A) and timing T1 in FIG. 12(A)). Accordingly, although not shown in the figure, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit rainbow-colored light.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol comes to an end, three decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) in which characters are attached to large numbers pseudo-stop at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (Fig. 11 (B) and timing T2 in FIG. 12(A)). In addition, in FIG. 11(B), for convenience of explanation, the notation of the characters attached to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern is omitted.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the three decorative patterns of the first mode forming the double-eyes stopped, the "first reflex effect" is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 second). (See FIG. 12(A)). The "first reflection effect" is an effect in which highlight light such as metallic luster is added to each decorative pattern, and a sound effect such as "Pishan!" is outputted from the speaker 24. In the first reflection performance, for example, highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the left symbol, and at the same time, highlight light is added to the middle symbol and the right symbol in the same way. As a result, the light irradiated onto the decorative pattern can be made to look like it is mirror-reflected on the front surface of the decorative pattern, and three identical decorative patterns can be emphasized as if they were objects with metallic luster, so the patterns are aligned. You can emphasize things even more.

In this embodiment, the first reflective performance is a performance performed using the decorative pattern of the first mode, and is a performance not performed using the decorative pattern of the second mode.

In addition, while there are cases where a winning notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols ("333" in the example shown in FIG. 11(B)) come to a real stop, the three decorative symbols forming the double number are pseudo-stopped. After that, a promotion effect (see FIG. 11(C)) may be performed (timing T3 in FIG. 12(A)). This promotion performance is a performance that notifies you whether or not you will be promoted to 16R probability variation depending on whether or not the three decorative symbols forming the zero number change to the three decorative symbols forming the zero number of "777". . This promotion performance is composed of a first half and a second half, and the first half performance is common both when a promotion failure performance is performed in the second half and when a promotion success performance is performed in the second half. Specifically, in the first half of this promotion effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. The three decorative patterns become smaller and the smaller state is maintained for about several seconds (for example, 3 seconds).

In the example shown in FIG. 11(B), three decorative patterns indicating the number "333" are pseudo-stopped. Therefore, when the jackpot symbol X2 as the first special symbol comes to a final stop, these decorative symbols also come to a final stop, thereby informing that the 6R chance win has been won.

Here, if the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 6R probability, a promotion failure performance is performed as the second half of the promotion performance following the first half of the promotion performance (Figs. 11(C) and (D), (See timing T4 in 12(A)). This promotion failure production is a production in which the three decorative symbols that became smaller in the first half of the promotion production return to a pseudo-stop while increasing in size, without changing to other decorative symbols, to notify promotion failure. Accompanied by production sound output. In the example shown in FIG. 11, following the promotion failure performance, a winning notification performance is performed in which the three decorative symbols forming the double number "333" stop as they are (FIGS. 11(E), 12(A) )). Then, when this winning notification performance is performed for a predetermined period of time, the opening period of the jackpot game starts, and during the opening period, a performance that notifies the type of jackpot and a right-handed suggestion that encourages the player to play right-handed is performed (Fig. 11(F)). Specifically, the words "BIG BONUS" are displayed and a sound is output to inform that the type of jackpot is 6R probability, and a sound saying "Please hit right" is output, and the sound "BIG BONUS" is output. An effect is performed in which the characters "Uchi" and a rightward arrow are displayed at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5. In addition, during the subsequent round game, one decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) showing the same number as the main stopped decorative pattern is displayed, and this decorative pattern is erased when the ending starts. .

On the other hand, if the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 16R, a promotion success performance is performed as the second half of the promotion performance following the first half of the promotion performance (Figs. 11 (C) and (G), Fig. 12 (See timing T4 in (A)). In this promotion success effect, the three decorative patterns (in this case, "333") that faded out and became smaller at the back of the LCD screen 5 change to the three decorative patterns "777", which indicates that the probability is 16R. This is an effect in which the player stops at a large scale in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and is accompanied by the output of an effect sound to notify that the promotion has been successful. When this promotion success performance is performed, a winning notification performance is performed in which the three decorative symbols showing the number of doubles of "777" stop as they are (see timing T5 in FIGS. 11(H) and 12(A)). Then, during the opening period of the jackpot game, an effect that notifies the type of jackpot and a right-handed suggestion that encourages the player to play right-handed is performed (see FIG. 11(I)). The production during this opening period is the same as the opening production described above based on Figure 11 (F), except that the words "HYPER BONUS" are displayed and the sound is output instead of "BIG BONUS". It is something to do. Note that during the round game, one 7 symbol (decorative symbol of the second mode) is displayed, and this 7 symbol is erased when the ending starts.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the promotion failure effect or promotion success effect, the "second reflection effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (e.g., 1 second) (see FIG. 12(A). )reference). For example, the "second reflection effect" adds highlight light to each decorative pattern in the same way as the first reflection effect, and also adds the character's lines attached to the numbers that make up the decorative pattern (for example, "Time is full"). '') is output from the speaker 24. In the second reflection effect, for example, a highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the numbers that make up the left symbol, and at the same time, the numbers that make up the middle and right symbols are also highlighted in the same way. Add light. In this way, the second reflection effect is such that while the numbers are highlighted, the characters are not highlighted, whereas the first reflection effect is where the entire decorative pattern is highlighted. It is different from the reflection effect. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize the decorative pattern of the pattern that is about to stop without reducing the visibility of the character uttering the above-mentioned lines.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second reflective performance is a performance that is performed using the decorative pattern of the first mode, and is a performance that is not performed using the decorative pattern of the second mode.

As illustrated in FIG. 12(A), in this embodiment, the stop display timing of the first special symbol is configured to arrive when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the second reflection effect. ing. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the decorative pattern starts to stop when a predetermined time (4 seconds in the example of FIG. 12A) has elapsed from the end of the second reflection effect. By providing a predetermined time between the second reflective performance and the main stop, for example, even if frames are dropped due to double buffering in the second reflective performance, this can be prevented from affecting the main stop.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 1, when executing the image data drawing process, the central CPU 141 of the image and sound control board 140 creates two image data development areas and develops the image data alternately in each development area. Perform double buffering. For example, if the amount of image data when executing the second reflection effect is large, it will take time to generate the image, and the previously displayed screen may be redisplayed, which may cause dropped frames. There is.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 (not shown) is input, the image sound control board 140 is configured to control the image quality determined at the start of the variable performance (determined by the performance control board 130). Generate and output. On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image and sound control board 140 does not generate the image determined at the start of the variable performance (determined by the performance control board 130). For example, the signal output unit 147 does not output a predetermined signal when the previously displayed screen is being displayed again (when a frame is dropped). In this case, the image and sound control board 140 may generate and output another image different from the image determined at the start of the variable performance (determined by the performance control board 130).

For example, by selecting variation pattern D or I, it is decided that the jackpot mode decorative symbol (first mode decorative symbol) will be permanently stopped at the timing when 70 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation of the first special symbol. In this case, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image and sound control board 140 can stop the decorative pattern at the above-mentioned timing. On the other hand, even if it is determined to output an image with the decorative pattern permanently stopped at the above timing, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image and sound control board 140 The decorative pattern does not stop at the above timing. In this case, the image and sound control board 140 may output an image other than the permanently stopped decorative pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, decorative patterns may not be displayed in a situation where a frame is dropped.

This embodiment employs a configuration in which a predetermined time is provided between the second reflection effect and the main stop, so that after the second reflection effect ends, a period when the amount of image data is small (the above-mentioned predetermined time) is used. It is possible to stop the decorative pattern through this. Thereby, the decorative pattern can be reliably stopped without being affected by dropped frames.

As illustrated in FIG. 12(B), in this embodiment, even in the probability variable gaming state and the time saving gaming state (i.e., during the variable display of the second special symbol), in the normal gaming state (i.e., the first special symbol A similar promotion effect may be executed (during the fluctuating display of). Specifically, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol comes to an end, three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol that is triple the decorative symbol of the second mode) are displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. A pseudo-stop occurs at (for example, see timing T6 in FIGS. 28(H) and 12(B)). When a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the pseudo-stop, a performance similar to the first half of the promotion performance in the normal gaming state is performed in a shorter execution time (for example, 2 seconds) than in the normal gaming state ( timing T7 in FIG. 12(B)).

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the promotion failure presentation or promotion success presentation following the first half of the promotion presentation, the "third reflex presentation" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). (Timing T8 in FIG. 12(B)). The "third reflection effect" is the same effect as the first reflection effect, but the highlight light is attached to a decorative pattern that is three times larger than the decorative pattern of the second mode, and the decoration pattern of the first mode is It differs from the first reflection performance in that it is not a decorative pattern. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the third reflection effect, the stop display timing of the second special symbol arrives, and the decorative symbol stops accordingly (timing T9 in FIG. 12(B)). ). The predetermined time period between the third reflective performance and the main stop is a period for preventing dropped frames from affecting the main stop even if frames are dropped in the third reflective performance. By suppressing this period to the minimum time that can prevent the effects of dropped frames, it can be configured to be shorter than the period between the reflex effect and the main stop in the normal gaming state, and the game progress in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. It is possible to speed up the process.

In addition, with reference to FIG. 11, we have described the case where a promotion effect is performed in which the odd-numbered zero-numbered symbols other than the 7 symbols (probable variation symbols) are changed to 7 symbols to make it appear that the 6R probability variation has been promoted to the 16R probability variation. A promotion effect may be performed to make it appear as if a normal jackpot has been promoted to a probability-variable jackpot by changing the even-numbered symbols of a double-digit number to an odd-numbered symbol of a double-digit number. Further, in this embodiment, these promotion effects are performed shortly before the first special symbol stops, but in other embodiments, these promotion effects may be performed during the jackpot game.

During a jackpot game, a promotion effect that makes it appear that a normal jackpot has been promoted to a variable jackpot is performed, for example, by performing an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 during a predetermined round game. An example of such an effect is displaying characters such as ``Get it!'' or outputting a predetermined notification sound in response to a button operation.

Also, during a jackpot game, as a promotion effect to make it appear that the round has been promoted from 6R fixed round or 6R normal round to 16R round round, for example, in the 6th long open round game, characters such as "GET EXTRA ROUND!" are displayed. An example is a performance in which the performance accessory 7 is operated while simultaneously outputting the sound. Incidentally, such a round promotion performance may be performed not during the long open round game of the 6th round but when the long open round game of the 7th round is started.

In addition, a configuration is adopted in which the jackpot notice is more likely to be executed (or may always be executed) when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a probability-variable jackpot than when it is a normal jackpot. It is possible that By adopting such a configuration, when the jackpot preview performance is executed, the promotion success performance is more likely to be executed compared to the case where the jackpot preview performance is not executed, and the player's response to the jackpot preview performance is more likely to be executed. Expectations can be effectively raised. Incidentally, when the jackpot notice is executed, the promotion success effect may be executed without fail.

In addition, when variation pattern A is selected, a collision effect is performed in which the symbols suddenly line up and the main stop occurs, so when the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in variation pattern A, a promotion effect is performed. is never done.

Note that in other embodiments, the first reflection effect may be performed using the second decorative pattern. For example, immediately after the victory notification performance ends (timing T2 in FIG. 12(A)), a decorative pattern obtained by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second mode three times is pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. By performing the first reflection performance using such decorative patterns, continuity with the victory notification performance can be enhanced and a sense of unity can be improved. After this first reflection effect, a second reflection effect may be performed using the decorative pattern. In this case, since no character is attached to the decorative pattern, the entire decorative pattern will be highlighted in the second reflective presentation as in the first reflective presentation. Alternatively, after the first reflection performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the first half of the promotion performance has ended, the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 instead of the decorative pattern. A second reflection effect may be performed using this decorative pattern by causing a pseudo-stop.

In other embodiments, for example, a second reflection effect may be used in which a highlight light is not attached to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern while a highlight light is attached to the characters constituting the decorative pattern. You can also use it as This makes it possible to emphasize the decorative patterns in the form of matching patterns without reducing the visibility of the numbers.

In other embodiments, for example, an effect that highlights the entire decorative pattern (specifically, the entire numbers and characters that make up the decorative pattern) or an effect that highlights the entire screen centering on the decorative pattern, It may also be used as a second reflection effect. As a result, for example, a more dynamic performance can be achieved than by highlighting only numbers, and decorative patterns in the form of matching patterns can be further emphasized.

In other embodiments, only the second reflection effect may be executed without executing the first reflection effect. In addition, the period from the end of the second reflective performance to the actual stop of the decorative symbols (normal gaming state) and the period from the end of the third reflective performance to the actual stop of the decorative symbols (variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state) The same time (for example, 4 seconds) may be used.

In addition, the period from the end of the second reflective performance to the final stop of the decorative symbols (normal game state), the period from the end of the third reflective performance to the final stop of the decorative symbols in the variable probability gaming state, and the period from the end of the third reflective performance to the final stop of the decorative symbols in the time-saving gaming state. The period from the end of the 3-reflection performance to the actual stop of the decorative pattern may be different or may be the same.

Each performance that is executed from a pseudo-stop in which the decorative symbols are aligned until the actual stop can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitively foretells that a jackpot game will be executed. In addition, each performance from the start of promotion failure performance or the start of promotion success performance until the final stop of the decorative pattern has a function to foretell which type of jackpot game will be executed, and a function to predict the game state after the jackpot game ends. It can be regarded as a jackpot notice with a function to foretell.

Note that not only when a jackpot is announced with SPSP Reach, but also when a jackpot is announced with Normal Reach or Character SP Reach, the same procedure as explained with reference to FIG. 11(B) onwards and FIG. 12(A) A similar performance is performed.

In addition, the effects described with reference to FIG. 11(B) and subsequent figures and FIG. 12 may or may not be executed when the reach symbol is 7 symbols (i.e., 16R probability variation). . In the former case, there is no need to change the length of the performance after the symbols are aligned depending on the type of reach symbol, and in the latter case, it is possible to suppress the execution of promotion performances where there is no possibility of changing the pattern of the symbols. can.

Further, depending on the type of jackpot, the period from the end of the second reflection performance (or third reflection performance) to the main stop of the decorative symbols may be different or may be the same. For example, the period from the end of the second reflection performance (or third reflection performance) to the final stop of the decorative pattern may be longer or shorter in the case of 16R probability change than in the case of other jackpots. It's okay.

[Specific example of character SP reach]
Next, a specific example of character SP reach in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 13. Here, FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of character SP reach.

During the variable display of the first special symbol, if the normal reach (see Figure 7 (E)) develops into a character SP reach competition effect (see Figure 7 (F-1)), the three symbols forming the reach With the column displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5, a competition effect is performed that shows the player's character and the enemy character competing for a treasure box (an example of an item) (see FIG. 13(A)). Although it is not shown in Figure 13(A), when the competition effect starts, characters such as ``Take back the treasure chest from the enemy!'' are displayed and the voice thereof is output, which is related to the character SP reach. A title display that displays the reach title is performed.

Following this competition effect, a capture failure effect may be performed in which the player's character collapses after the treasure chest is stolen by the enemy character (see FIG. 13(B)). Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of symbol variation is a loss, the enemy character who stole the treasure chest leaves and displays the words "Escape..." to suggest non-development. is performed (see FIG. 13(C)). This non-development suggestion production is a production that suggests that the character SP reach will not develop into SPSP reach, and if the non-development suggestion production is performed, the actual stop will be made after pseudo-stopping the number of reach misses (for example, "343"). A loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 13(D)).

On the other hand, following the scrambling effect, a development suggestion effect is performed in which friends come to rescue the character, who has fallen down, stands up, and the words ``Chasing the enemy!'' are displayed (Figure 13 (E) and (See (F)). This development suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the character SP reach will develop into SPSP reach. When a development suggestion production is performed, a title display that displays the reach title related to SPSP reach such as "Decisive Battle 〇〇〇VS XXX" is displayed, and a battle production in which the own character and the enemy character engage in a battle begins. (See FIG. 13(G)).

In addition, when it develops into SPSP Reach in this way, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot, a hit notification effect will be executed following SPSP Reach, and if it is a loss, it will become SPSP Reach. Subsequently, a loss notification performance will be executed.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot, a capture success effect showing that your character succeeds in capturing the treasure chest from the enemy character may be performed following the contest effect (Fig. 13(H)). In this successful takeover effect, three decorative symbols (probable variation symbols or normal symbols) forming a double number will pop out from the retrieved treasure box, and when these three decorative symbols come to a final stop, you will win the jackpot. This will be notified (see FIG. 13(I)).

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a winning success performance (see FIG. 13(H)) or a winning failure performance (see FIG. 13(B)) as a result performance of the competition performance (see FIG. 13(A)). ) can be executed, and the capture success effect is executed when variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and after that, the winning notification effect is always executed (for example, FIG. 17(A) and (B)).

On the other hand, when the capture failure effect (see Figure 13 (B)) is executed, the development suggestion effect (Figure 13 ( E) and (F)) are performed, and there are times when a non-development suggesting effect (see FIG. 13(C)) is performed, which suggests that the character SP reach will not develop into SPSP reach.

Once this non-development suggestion performance is performed, there is no possibility that a winning notification performance will be performed afterwards, but if a development suggestion performance is performed, a winning notification performance will be performed in the subsequent SPSP reach. (See the flow of (F-4), (I), and (H) in FIG. 7, and the column of variation pattern E in FIG. 17). In this way, even if a capture failure performance is performed following a capture performance, there is still a possibility that a winning notification performance will be performed afterwards, so even if a capture failure performance is performed, the player will You can enjoy the game without losing your hope of winning the jackpot, while expecting that a performance suggesting development will be performed.

[Specific example of hit effect in normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a specific example of the hit effect in the normal game state will be explained. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the hit performance in the normal game state.

In FIG. 14(A), in a state where two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is a loss. It is illustrated that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern indicating a certain situation is stopped and displayed. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as a white pending icon.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol started, the first pending icon corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 Special symbol determination is executed. Accordingly, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 is shifted to the corresponding area 53, and the second pending icon is shifted to the position where the first pending icon was displayed. A shift process is performed, and along with this, high-speed scrolling display of decorative patterns is started (see FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B)).

Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a hit performance is executed.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the start of the high-speed scrolling display of decorative patterns, a darkening effect is performed in which a black effect image is displayed on the entire screen on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 14(C)). In this embodiment, this blackout effect is performed from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols until two seconds have elapsed. It is possible to make the player feel that the player 1 is out of order.

The darkening effect is, for example, an effect in which a black effect image is displayed on the entire screen in front of the decorative pattern. Therefore, during the blackout effect, although the decorative pattern of the first mode continues to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is not visible (a state in which the decorative pattern of the first mode is not displayed). In addition, with the start of the blackout effect, from the state in which the decorative symbols of the first mode are displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols (for example, the decorative symbols of the second mode) are changed to the second mode during character SP reach and during SPSP reach. The decorative pattern may be displayed in a variable manner at a position different from the position at which it is displayed (for example, at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display screen 5).

Note that this darkening effect may be accompanied by turning off the light emitting elements built into the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effect accessory 7. Furthermore, as in this embodiment, if a darkening effect is performed to hide the decorative symbols on the LCD screen 5, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to recognize whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. be. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a symbol called a fourth symbol, which is different from the decorative symbol, is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the liquid crystal screen 5 to notify that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. A configuration is adopted in which the symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner at a constant speed while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a win or loss when the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Note that two fourth symbols are prepared separately, one corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol. The fourth pattern is a small image of red, yellow, green, and blue in the same shape (for example, a square with a side of 5 mm), and these are placed in the same position in the order of red → yellow → green → blue → red →... A variable display is performed by being displayed in . For example, when the red 4th symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the 1st special symbol, it is a 16R probability variation, when the yellow 4th symbol is stopped and displayed, it is 6R probability variation, and the green 4th symbol is stopped and displayed. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, it is 6R normal, and when the blue fourth symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a loss. The fourth symbol is an image displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. Note that the fourth symbol is displayed in front of other performance images, and is displayed in a position where it can be seen even when the performance accessory 7 is operated, so that part or all of it does not become invisible. However, when such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that the interest of the blackout effect may be reduced. Therefore, in other embodiments, instead of displaying the fourth symbol on the liquid crystal screen 5, a fourth symbol lamp (for example, an LED) for displaying the fourth symbol is separately provided, and the black color is displayed during the darkening effect. A configuration may be adopted in which no effect image other than the effect image is displayed.

The fourth symbol and the decorative symbol start to be displayed in a variable manner along with the variable display of the special symbol, and are stopped and displayed as the special symbol stops being displayed. Here, the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed informs the same content (jackpot or loss) as the special symbol that is stopped and displayed and informs the player, and in this respect, it is the same as the decorative symbol. . However, the fourth symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol and is displayed in an inconspicuous position and manner, so it is a symbol that is difficult for the player to notice. In addition, the number of symbols that are displayed in a variable manner for the 4th symbol is smaller than for the decorative symbol, and the 4th symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a constant speed regardless of the type of performance being executed, whereas the decorative symbol is displayed at a scrolling speed. It can be said that the display modes of the two are different because the speed may be slower or faster. Note that the speed at which the fourth pattern is variably displayed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative patterns in the first mode and the second mode scroll at high speed.

Next, following the blackout effect, a display in which the three decorative patterns that make up the zeros of "777" suddenly pop out and pseudo-stop in the center of the LCD screen 5 is performed for about 3 seconds, for example (Fig. 14(D)). Then, these three decorative symbols "777" stop as they are, and a winning notification effect is performed to notify the 16R probability variation (see FIG. 14(E)).

Although such a hit performance can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability-variable jackpot, it is not executed when the determination result is a loss. For this reason, the jackpot effect can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitively foretells that a jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, the hit performance is a performance that foretells a jackpot without going through reach establishment. Therefore, when a collision effect is performed, the decorative pattern is not displayed in a small size. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that he has suddenly won, even though the character SP reach or SPSP reach has not developed to the point where he can expect a jackpot, and a high performance effect can be obtained.

Note that the winning effect is an effect that makes the player feel that a jackpot has suddenly been announced immediately after the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols starts, so the hitting effect starts after the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols starts. It is preferable that the time required for the collision effect and the time required for the collision effect to be short, but as long as such conditions are not significantly deviated from, the collision effect may be performed after the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts. The time until the winning effect is started and the time from when the hit effect is started until the hit notification effect is performed may be different from the time exemplified in this embodiment.

In addition, here, an example is explained in which the impact effect is composed of a blackout effect (see FIG. 14(C)) and an effect in which a double eye suddenly appears (see FIG. 14(D)). In other embodiments, a collision effect that does not include a blackout effect may be performed. In other words, any effect display related to the jackpot effect may be used as long as it can make the player feel that he has suddenly won a jackpot.

[Specific example of battle reach in variable game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a specific example of a battle reach in a variable probability gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the battle reach in the variable probability gaming state.

In FIG. 15(A), in a state where three pending icons are displayed in the second pending icon display area 52, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is a loss. It is illustrated that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern indicating a certain situation is stopped and displayed. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as green pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the second special symbols and decorative symbols started, the second pending icon corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 Special symbol determination is executed. Accordingly, the first pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 is shifted to the corresponding area 53, and the remaining pending icons are shifted to the corresponding area 53 within the second pending icon display area 52. A shift process is performed, and along with this, high-speed scrolling display of decorative patterns is started (see FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B)).

When the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon shifted to the area 53 is 16R, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed. In such cases, the following effects may be performed.

That is, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the 7 symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) will pseudo-stop in the left column, and the 7 symbols will pseudo-stop in the right column as well. A reach-achieving promotion effect is performed to arouse the player's expectations (see FIG. 15(C)). This reach establishment promotion is a performance that slowly moves the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) that shows the same number as the left pattern (here 7 pattern) from top to bottom in the right row, and the left pattern When a decorative pattern showing a number common to the number stops in the right column, a reach is established (see FIG. 15(D)). On the other hand, if a decorative symbol indicating a number different from the left symbol comes to a pseudo-stop in the right column, reach is usually unsuccessful and a loss is reported.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which it is possible to establish a reach with 7 symbols only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which, if a reach is achieved with 7 symbols in the variable probability game state, a winning notification performance in which 7 symbols are available is always performed afterwards. Therefore, reaching a reach with 7 symbols can be considered as one of the jackpot predictions.

In addition, although here, a case has been described as an example in which a reach-to-reach effect is performed to encourage the establishment of a 7-symbol reach-to-win, a similar effect is performed when encouraging a reach-to-reach effect with other decorative symbols.

When a reach is established as described above, a title display is performed that displays a reach title related to the battle reach, such as "Decisive Battle 〇〇〇VS XXX", although it is not shown in Fig. 15. While this reach title is being displayed, the second aspect of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, a battle effect is started showing a battle between the player's character and the enemy character while the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed (see FIG. 15(E)). At this time, the three symbol rows forming the reach are moved to the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 while being reduced in size.

In the final stage of the battle reach, an operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 26 (see FIG. 15(F)). Note that this operation promotion performance is similar to the operation promotion performance performed during the SPSP reach described above based on FIG. 10(H), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Here, if the player operates the performance button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion performance, a victory suggestion performance that suggests that the own character has defeated the enemy character and won is performed (see FIG. 15 (G)). . In this victory suggestion performance, the words "Defeated!!" indicating that the own character has defeated the enemy character are displayed and the sound thereof is output, and the performance accessory 7 moves while emitting light in rainbow colors. At this time, the three symbol rows displayed in a small size at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are pseudo-stopped in a manner that indicates a double number (see FIG. 15(G)).

It should be noted that if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot with variable probability, it is preferable to perform a win-suggesting performance regardless of whether or not the player operates the performance button 26 during the validity period. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the player does not operate a button during the valid period of the operation promotion performance during battle reach, the victory suggestion performance is performed at the timing when the valid period ends. configuration has been adopted.

In this way, when the victory suggestion effect is performed, the three decorative symbols that had been pseudo-stopped in the upper left corner of the LCD screen 5 are displayed in a large size in a pseudo-stopped state in the center of the LCD screen 5 (see FIG. 15(H)). ), with the final stop of the second special symbol, these three decorative symbols come to a final stop (see FIG. 15(I)).

Here, an example has been described in which a reach is achieved with 7 symbols and an operation promotion performance is performed during the battle reach, but a similar performance is performed when a reach is achieved with other decorative symbols. However, if the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is a probability/variable jackpot, a victory suggestion effect will be performed, but if it is a normal jackpot, a defeat suggestion effect will be performed, which shows the player's character being defeated by the enemy character. be exposed. That is, even if the player operates the performance button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion performance, the victory suggestion performance will not be performed, and instead, the defeat suggestion performance will be performed. When this defeat suggestion performance is performed, three decorative symbols (for example, an even numbered symbol) indicating a normal jackpot (in this embodiment, 8R normal corresponding to the jackpot symbol Y4) are displayed in a large pseudo-picture in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Stop and then stop. In this case, after the jackpot game in which eight long open round games are completed, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state. In other words, the player falls from the variable probability gaming state.

[Specific example of a hit effect in a variable game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a specific example of the winning effect in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the hit effect in the variable probability gaming state.

In FIG. 16(A), in a state where three pending icons are displayed in the second pending icon display area 52, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is a loss. It is exemplified that a loss notification effect is being performed in which a decorative pattern (here, "246") indicating a certain situation is stopped and displayed. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as red pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol started, the first pending icon corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 51 Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, a shift process is performed for each pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 51, and variable display (high-speed scrolling display) of decorative patterns is started (FIGS. 16A and 16B). )reference).

Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a hit performance is executed.

This hit effect has some similarities with the hit effect performed during the normal gaming state, so we will omit the explanation of the common points, but immediately after the fluctuating display of the second special symbol starts. A darkening effect is performed (see FIG. 16(C)), and the effect accessory 7 operates almost at the same time as three decorative patterns showing the number "777" suddenly appear in the center of the LCD screen 5. (See FIG. 16(D)). Then, a winning notification effect is performed in which the three pseudo-stopped decorative symbols come to a real stop (see FIG. 16(E)).

It should be noted that this jackpot performance is similar to the jackpot performance that is performed during the normal gaming state, and is a special performance when winning a probability-variable jackpot. For this reason, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot or loss, the hit performance will not be performed. As is clear from this, the jackpot performance in the variable probability gaming state can be regarded as one type of jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination, three types of probability variable jackpots are prepared: 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 4R probability variation, and even if you win any probability variation jackpot, you will not receive a jackpot. A configuration is adopted that allows execution of winning effects. On the other hand, in other embodiments, it is possible to execute a hit effect when winning a 16-probability variant, but not to execute a hit effect when winning an 8R probability-variable or a 4R probability-variable. May be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot performance can be executed regardless of the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are the same when a collision effect is performed, but even if these variation times are different from each other, good. In addition, the performance mode of the hit performance performed during the normal game state and the performance mode of the hit performance performed during the variable probability game state may be the same or different from each other. .

Note that the presentation mode of the jackpot effect is not limited to the one described above, and any presentation mode may be used as long as it can make the player feel that he has suddenly won a jackpot. For example, in some cases where the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) results in a winning of 16R, even if the hit effect is executed immediately after the reach is established or during the reach effect. good.

For example, in a hit effect immediately after a reach is established, a middle symbol showing the same number as the pseudo-stopped reach symbol suddenly appears on the active line immediately after the reach is established (for example, 0.5 seconds later). Immediately after the stop, all the decorative patterns may come to a final stop (all decorative patterns of the first aspect). In such a case, the hit performance can be said to be a performance that results in a jackpot without being executed even if the reach is established. Note that the hit effect may be executed almost simultaneously with the reach establishment. In this case, for example, when the left symbol is pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol that shows the same number as the left symbol suddenly becomes active almost at the same time as the right symbol that shows the same number as the left symbol comes to a pseudo stop on the active line. It may appear on the line and make a pseudo-stop, and immediately after that, all the decorative patterns may come to a real stop (both are the decorative patterns of the first aspect).

For example, the impact effect during normal reach may be executed when the scrolling speed of the middle symbol that has been scrolled at high speed gradually decreases. For example, when a hit effect is executed during a normal reach, at the timing when the middle symbol begins to slowly scroll downward, a middle symbol showing the same number as the pseudo-stopped reach symbol suddenly appears on the active line. Immediately after the pseudo-stop, all the decorative patterns may come to a real stop (all decorative patterns of the first aspect). In such a case, the hit performance can be said to be a performance that suddenly becomes a jackpot in normal reach without developing into character SP reach or SPSP reach.

Also, for example, the collision effect during the character SP reach is a scene in which the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second mode) is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the LCD screen 5, and the own character and the enemy character compete for the treasure chest. It may be executed during a contest performance that shows. For example, when a hit effect is executed during a contest effect, a middle symbol (for example, a decorative symbol in the second mode enlarged three times) showing the same number as the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped will appear on the LCD screen 5. It suddenly appears in the center and pseudo-stops. Then, the ready-to-reach symbol is erased, and three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol that is a triple enlargement of the decorative symbol in the second mode) pseudo-stop at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the same pattern, and immediately after that, All decorative patterns may be stopped. In such a case, the hit performance can be said to be a performance in which the character SP reach suddenly becomes a jackpot without the performance performed at the end of the character SP reach, and without progressing to the SPSP reach.

For example, the collision effect during battle reach shows a battle between the own character and the enemy character while the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second mode) is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the LCD screen 5. It may also be executed during a battle performance. For example, when a collision effect is executed in the middle of a battle effect, a middle symbol (for example, a decorative symbol in the second mode enlarged three times) showing the same number as the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped appears on the LCD screen 5. It suddenly appears in the center of the screen and comes to a pseudo-stop. Then, the ready-to-reach symbol is erased, and three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol that is a triple enlargement of the decorative symbol in the second mode) pseudo-stop at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the same pattern, and immediately after that, All decorative patterns may be stopped. In such a case, the hit effect can be said to be an effect in which the player suddenly hits a jackpot in the battle reach without executing the effect executed at the final stage of the battle reach.

[Variation pattern selection table used in normal gaming state]
FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in the normal gaming state.

The main ROM 102 includes a variable pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot (see FIG. 17(A)) and a variable pattern selection table for normal jackpot as a variable pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variable pattern for special symbols in the normal gaming state. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(B)) and a variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17(C)) are stored. Here, the variable pattern selection table for variable probability jackpot is used in the process of selecting the variable pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot" in the normal gaming state. Ru. In addition, the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table is used for processing to select a variation pattern for the first special symbol when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "normal jackpot" in the normal gaming state. . In addition, the variation pattern selection table for reach loss selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a loss and it is determined to perform a reach effect in the normal gaming state. used for processing.

Note that in the explanatory diagrams related to various tables shown in FIG. 17 and subsequent figures, the possible range of each random number is set to be smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate explanation.

(Variation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 17(A), in the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern random number are associated with each other. In addition, in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern random number, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the type of fluctuation performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation performance pattern The specific content of the performance, the possible range of the variation pattern random number, and the rate at which each variation pattern is selected are also listed.

As shown in FIGS. 17(A) to (C), the possible range of the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set to "0" to "99". When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the normal gaming state and selects 16R probability variable or 6R probability variation as the type of jackpot, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number and symbol random number is "0" ~ If it is either "9", the variation pattern A is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern A from the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table. In addition, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "10" to "11", by reading fluctuation pattern B from the fluctuation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot, fluctuation pattern B is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. select. Also, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "12" to "19", by reading the fluctuation pattern C from the fluctuation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot, the fluctuation pattern C is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. select. In addition, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "20" to "49", the fluctuation pattern D is read out from the fluctuation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern D is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. select. In addition, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "50" to "99", by reading the fluctuation pattern E from the fluctuation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot, the fluctuation pattern E is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. select.

In the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(A)), ten random numbers from "0" to "9" are assigned to variation pattern A. Therefore, the rate at which variation pattern A is selected in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 10% (=10/100). In addition, since two random numbers "10" to "11" are assigned to fluctuation pattern B, the rate of selection of fluctuation pattern B in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 2% (=2 /100). In addition, since eight random numbers from "12" to "19" are assigned to fluctuation pattern C, the rate of selection of fluctuation pattern C in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 8% (=8 /100). In addition, since 30 random numbers from "20" to "49" are assigned to fluctuation pattern D, the rate of selection of fluctuation pattern D in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 30% (= 30%). /100). In addition, since 50 random numbers from "50" to "99" are assigned to fluctuation pattern E, the percentage of selection of fluctuation pattern E in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 50% (= 50%). /100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the normal gaming state and selects 6R normal as the type of jackpot, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number and symbol random number is "0" to "3". In either case, the variable pattern B is selected as the variable pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variable pattern B from the normal jackpot variable pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(B)). Also, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "4" to "14", by reading the fluctuation pattern C from the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table, the fluctuation pattern C is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. select. In addition, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "15" to "46", by reading the fluctuation pattern D from the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table, the fluctuation pattern D is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. select. Also, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "47" to "99", by reading the fluctuation pattern E from the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table, the fluctuation pattern E is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. select.

In the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(B)), four random numbers from "0" to "3" are assigned to variation pattern B. Therefore, the rate at which variation pattern B is selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 4% (=4/100). In addition, since 11 random numbers from "4" to "14" are assigned to fluctuation pattern C, the percentage of fluctuation pattern C selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 11% (=11 /100). In addition, since 32 random numbers from "15" to "46" are assigned to fluctuation pattern D, the percentage of fluctuation pattern D selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 32% (= 32%). /100). In addition, since 53 random numbers from "47" to "99" are assigned to fluctuation pattern E, the percentage of selection of fluctuation pattern E in the case of a normal jackpot is 53% (= 53%). /100).

(Fluctuation pattern selection table for reach loss)
If the main CPU 101 determines in the first special symbol determination that the jackpot game is not to be executed, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the reach effect based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, symbol random number, and variable pattern random number. select. Specifically, whether to select one of the variation patterns from a group of variation patterns in which a reach effect is performed, or one of the variation patterns to be selected from a group of variation patterns in which a reach effect is performed. decide. Here, when it is selected to perform the reach effect, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17(C)).

In the normal gaming state, when the main CPU 101 determines not to execute a jackpot game and selects to perform a reach effect, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, symbol random number, and reach random number is set to "0" or more. If it is either "39", the variation pattern G is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern G from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss. Also, if the acquired variation pattern random number is one of "40" to "69", variation pattern H is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading variation pattern H from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss. do. Also, if the obtained variation pattern random number is one of "70" to "89", variation pattern I is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading variation pattern I from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss. do. Also, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "90" to "99", the fluctuation pattern J is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the fluctuation pattern J from the fluctuation pattern selection table for reach loss. do.

In the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17(C)), 40 random numbers from "0" to "39" are assigned to variation pattern G. Therefore, when performing a reach effect and notifying a loss, the rate at which the variation pattern G is selected is 40% (=40/100). In addition, since 30 random numbers from "40" to "69" are assigned to fluctuation pattern H, the rate at which fluctuation pattern H is selected when performing a reach effect and notifying a loss is as follows. It is 30% (=30/100). In addition, since 20 random numbers from "70" to "89" are assigned to variation pattern I, the rate at which variation pattern I is selected when performing a reach effect and notifying a loss is: It is 20% (=20/100). In addition, since 10 random numbers from "90" to "99" are assigned to fluctuation pattern J, the rate at which fluctuation pattern J is selected when performing a reach effect and notifying a loss is: It is 10% (=10/100).

The main CPU 101 refers to one of the variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 17 based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination. to select one of the plurality of variation patterns.

Although not shown in the figure, there is also a variable pattern selection table for no-reach loss that is used when notifying a loss without performing a reach effect, and the main CPU 101 is configured to select a variable pattern for a loss without a reach. If you make a judgment and choose to perform a no-reach effect, depending on the number of reservations when the first special symbol starts to be displayed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds, a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds, etc. One of the variation patterns and the variation pattern with a variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected.

Furthermore, as is clear from the comparison of the variation pattern selection tables in FIGS. 17(A) to 17(C), except for variation pattern A, the variation time and performance contents correspond when each variation pattern is selected. . For example, when variation pattern B is selected from the variation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot, when variation pattern B is selected from the variation pattern selection table for normal jackpot, and when variation pattern G is selected from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss. The two cases are similar in that the variation time of the special symbol is 20 seconds, and only the normal reach effect is performed as the reach effect. The reason why such a configuration is adopted is that the performance immediately before the hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is made common, and the subsequent performance is made in accordance with the determination result.

On the other hand, in other embodiments, even if the three selection tables illustrated in FIGS. The fluctuation time may be made different.

From the description of the three variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 17, the following can be said. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, generally speaking, a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected, and a variation pattern with a short variation time is difficult to be selected (Fig. 17(A) and (B)). In addition, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a loss and a reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a long variation time, and a variation pattern with a short variation time tends to be selected (Fig. 17(C)). From these facts, it can be said that the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to perform a winning notification performance, and conversely, the shorter the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to perform a loss notification performance. In other words, when a reach effect is performed over a relatively long period of time, such as from normal reach to character SP reach and then to SPSP reach, a hit notification effect is likely to be executed, and only normal reach effect is performed. If the time required for a reach effect is relatively short, it can be said that the loss notification effect is likely to be executed. In other words, rather than being notified of wins and losses during normal reach, it is better to develop from normal reach to character SP reach or SPSP reach, or from normal reach to SPSP reach via character SP reach. , it can be said that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

<About the impact effect in normal game mode>
The following can be said about the winning performance performed during the normal gaming state. In other words, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a probability-variable jackpot, the proportion at which the hit effect is executed is 10%, which is the same as the proportion at which variation pattern A is selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table for probability-variable jackpot. (=10/100). On the other hand, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table and the reach loss variation pattern selection table, there are no variation patterns in which a hit effect is performed (see FIGS. 17(B) and (C)).
For these reasons, the jackpot performance in the normal gaming state is a jackpot notice that definitively foretells that a jackpot game will be executed, and also foretells that the game will definitely move to the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that this is a prediction of a surefire jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot effect is executed, the probability that the game will be controlled in the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game (100% here) is that the game will be controlled in the time-saving game state. It has the characteristic of being higher than the probability (0%).

In addition, when focusing on the variation pattern A with the shortest variation time of 5 seconds in the variation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot (see FIG. 17(A)), while the production content is associated with a jackpot effect, No other performances are associated. From this, it is clear that if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a probability-variable jackpot and variable pattern A is selected, the hit effect that functions as a probability-variable jackpot notice will be executed with a 100% probability. It is.

In addition, the proportion of probability-variable jackpots in the jackpots related to the first special symbol determination is 60% (=5%+55%) (see FIG. 6(B)). Further, in the case of a probability-variable jackpot, the ratio of the hit performance being executed is 10% (=10/100). Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot effect will be executed is 6% (=0.6 x 0.1 x 100). .

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which when a hit effect is executed during the normal gaming state, there is a 100% probability of transitioning to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, but in other embodiments, the hit effect When the game is executed, the probability of transitioning to the variable probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a value less than 100%, so that the game can be controlled in the time-saving gaming state with a certain probability (for example, 20%) after the end of the jackpot game. It's okay. In this case, when the hit effect is executed, the probability of transitioning to the fixed variable gaming state may be higher than the probability of shifting to the time saving gaming state, or these probabilities may be made the same, or the probability of shifting to the fixed variable gaming state may be set to be the same. The probability of transitioning to the state may be lower than the probability of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which a collision effect is always executed when variation pattern A is selected, but in other embodiments, a case where a collision effect is not executed even if variation pattern A is selected is explained. You may also adopt a configuration in which there is. That is, the probability that the collision effect will be executed when the variation pattern A is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability that variation pattern A is selected and a jackpot effect is executed is set to a higher value than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

In addition, the hit performance is a performance that functions as a guaranteed variable jackpot notice, and in this embodiment, after the hit performance is executed, a 16R jackpot game is executed, and a 6R jackpot game is executed. There are cases. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when a jackpot effect is executed, a 16R jackpot game is executed, but a 6R jackpot game is not executed. Good too. In other words, the hit effect may be executed in the case of 16R probability variation, and may not be executed in the case of 6R probability variation.

<About the successful capture performance>
In this embodiment, while the character SP reach may be executed in the normal game state, the character SP reach is never executed in the variable probability game state. For this reason, the capture success effect that may be performed during character SP reach (for example, see FIG. 13(H)) can be said to be a special effect exclusive to the normal game state, which is not performed during the variable probability game state. can. The following can be said about the capture success performance, which is a special performance in the normal game state.

When the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a probability-variable jackpot, the rate at which variation pattern C in which a winning success effect is performed is selected from the variation pattern selection table for probability-variable jackpot (see FIG. 17(A)) is 8% (= 8/100). In addition, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a normal jackpot, the rate at which the variation pattern C in which the capture success effect is performed is selected from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see Figure 17 (B)) is 11%. (=11/100). In the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(C)), a variation pattern H in which a capture failure effect is performed is prepared, but a variation pattern in which a capture success effect is performed is not prepared. This also applies to the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss and a no-reach performance is performed.
From these facts, it can be said that the winning success performance is a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, as is clear from the notation of the variable pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot (see Figure 17 (A)) and the variable pattern selection table for normal jackpot (see Figure 17 (B)), the winning success effect is the first special The jackpot related to symbol determination is executable both when it is a probability variable jackpot and when it is a normal jackpot. That is, when a win notification performance is performed following a winning success performance, after the end of the jackpot game, the game may be controlled in a variable probability game state or the game may be controlled in a normal game state. From this, it can be said that the winning success performance is a performance that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed, but does not suggest the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. At the stage when the winning success performance is performed, the player cannot determine whether the game will be controlled in the variable probability gaming state or in the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, so the player cannot play the game in the variable probability gaming state. You can enjoy the game while expecting that it will be controlled.

In addition, the ratio of probability-variable jackpots to the jackpots related to the first special symbol determination is 60%, and with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probability-variable jackpots (see FIG. 17(A)), a variation pattern in which a winning success effect is performed is selected. The rate at which C is selected is 8%. Therefore, the probability that the game will be controlled in a variable probability game state after the winning success effect is performed and the jackpot game ends is 4.8% (=0.6×0.08×100).
On the other hand, the ratio of normal jackpots to the jackpots related to the first special symbol determination is 40%, and with reference to the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(B)), the variation pattern in which the capture success effect is performed. The rate at which C is selected is 11%. Therefore, the probability that the game will be controlled in the normal game state after the winning success effect is performed and the jackpot game ends is 4.4% (=0.4×0.11×100).
Based on these facts, when a winning success effect is executed, there are cases where the game is controlled in a variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and cases where the game is controlled in a normal game state, but the probability of the former is is slightly higher than the latter.

In addition, in the variable pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot (see FIG. 17(A)), when focusing on variation pattern C with a variation time of 40 seconds, while the capture success effect is associated as the production content, No performance is prepared to which a success performance is not associated. From this, it is clear that if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a guaranteed variable jackpot and variable pattern C is selected, the capture success effect that functions as a jackpot notice will be executed with a 100% probability. be.

In addition, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(B)), when focusing on variation pattern C with a variation time of 40 seconds, while the capture success effect is associated as the production content, No performance is prepared to which a success performance is not associated. From this, it is clear that even if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a normal jackpot and variable pattern C is selected, the capture success effect that functions as a jackpot notice will be executed with a 100% probability. be.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the capture success effect is always executed when the variation pattern C is selected, but in other embodiments, a case where the capture success effect is not executed even if the variation pattern C is selected. You may also adopt a configuration in which there is. That is, the probability that the capture success effect is executed when the variation pattern C is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Further, in another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a winning success effect is executed in the case of a variable probability jackpot, while a capture success effect is not executed in the case of a normal jackpot. That is, the winning success performance may be a performance exclusively for a variable jackpot, similar to the hit performance of this embodiment. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning success performance is executed in the case of a normal jackpot, while the winning success performance is not executed in the case of a variable probability jackpot.

[Variation pattern selection table used in fixed variation gaming state]
FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of special symbols in the variable probability gaming state.

The main ROM 102 includes a variable pattern selection table for variable probability jackpot (see FIG. 18(A)) and a variable pattern selection table for normal jackpot as a variable pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variable pattern of a special symbol in the variable probability gaming state. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 18(B)) is stored. Here, the variable pattern selection table for variable probability jackpot is used in the process of selecting the variable pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot" in the variable probability gaming state. Ru. In addition, the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table is used for processing to select a variation pattern for the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "normal jackpot" in the variable probability gaming state. . Note that a variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a loss is also prepared, but is not shown.

(Variation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 18(A), in the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the variation pattern random number are associated. In addition, in FIG. 18, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and the variation pattern random number, the variation time of the second special symbol, the type of variation effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each variation pattern, and the variation effect pattern. The specific content of the performance, the possible range of the variation pattern random number, and the rate at which each variation pattern is selected are also listed.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the possible range of the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set to "0" to "99". The main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the variable probability game state, and when the type of jackpot is selected as 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, or 4R probability variation, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number and symbol random number is " If it is any one of "0" to "29", the variable pattern L is selected as the variable pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variable pattern L from the variable pattern selection table for probability variable jackpot. In addition, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "30" to "79", the fluctuation pattern M is read out from the fluctuation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern M is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. select. In addition, if the obtained fluctuation pattern random number is one of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern N is read out from the fluctuation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern N is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. select.

In the variable pattern selection table for probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 18(A)), 30 random numbers from "0" to "29" are assigned to the variable pattern L. Therefore, the rate at which variable pattern L is selected in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 30% (=30/100). In addition, since 50 random numbers from "30" to "79" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern M, the rate of selection of the fluctuation pattern M in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 50% (= 50%). /100). In addition, since 20 random numbers from "80" to "99" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern N, the rate of selection of the fluctuation pattern N in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 20% (= 20%). /100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the probability variable gaming state and selects 8R normal as the type of jackpot, the variable pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number and symbol random number is "0" to "99". In either case, the variable pattern O is selected as the variable pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variable pattern O from the normal jackpot variable pattern selection table (see FIG. 18(B)). In the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see Figure 18 (B)), 100 random numbers from "0" to "99" are assigned to variation pattern O, so if it is a normal jackpot, The rate at which variation pattern O is selected is 100% (=100/100).

When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the second special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 selects one of the fluctuation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 18 according to the type of jackpot. With reference to this, one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected.

<About the impact effect in certain variable gaming conditions>
The following can be said about the winning performance performed during the variable probability gaming state. In other words, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, the rate at which the hit effect is executed is determined by selecting the variation pattern L with reference to the variable pattern selection table for probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 18(A)). The selected ratio is 30% (=30/100). On the other hand, the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18(B)) does not provide a variation pattern in which a jackpot effect is performed (see FIG. 18(B)). This also applies to the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss. For these reasons, the hit performance in the variable probability gaming state is a jackpot notice that definitively foretells that a jackpot game will be executed, and also foretells that the game will definitely shift to the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that this is a prediction of a surefire jackpot.

In addition, when focusing on the variation pattern L with the shortest variation time of 5 seconds in the variation pattern selection table for guaranteed variable jackpot (see FIG. 18(A)), while the production content is associated with a jackpot effect, No other performances are associated. From this, it is clear that if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a probability-variable jackpot and variable pattern L is selected, the hit performance that functions as a probability-variable jackpot notice will be executed with a 100% probability. It is.

In addition, the percentage of the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 60% for a probability-variable jackpot, and the percentage of the hit effect executed in the case of a probability-variable jackpot is 30% as described above. Therefore, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot effect will be executed is 18% (=0.6 x 0.3 x 100). .

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which when a hit effect is executed during the variable probability gaming state, the transition to the variable probability gaming state will occur with a 100% probability after the end of the jackpot game, but in other embodiments, the hit effect When the game is executed, the probability of shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game may be set to a value less than 100%, so that the game can be controlled in the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, when the hit effect is executed, the probability of transitioning to the fixed variable gaming state may be higher than the probability of shifting to the time saving gaming state, or these probabilities may be made the same, or the probability of shifting to the fixed variable gaming state may be set to be the same. The probability of transitioning to the state may be lower than the probability of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which a collision effect is always executed when the variation pattern L is selected, but in other embodiments, a case where a collision effect is not executed even when the variation pattern L is selected is explained. You may also adopt a configuration in which there is. That is, the probability that the collision effect will be executed when the variation pattern L is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern L is selected and a jackpot effect is executed is set to a higher value than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

<About the revival performance>
As is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(A), if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, a revival effect (see FIG. 8(J)) is executed as a variation pattern of the second special symbol. A variation pattern N may be selected. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a normal jackpot, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(B), a variation pattern in which a revival effect is performed is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It will not be done. This also applies to the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss. From these facts, it can be said that the revival performance performed during the probability-variable gaming state is a probability-variable jackpot notice, similar to the jackpot performance.

Further, when the variation pattern L is selected, a collision effect is executed, but a resurrection effect is not executed. Further, when the variation pattern N is selected, although a revival effect is executed, a collision effect is not executed. From these facts, it can be said that a prohibition is imposed on the hit performance and the resurrection performance in the variable probability gaming state so that both cannot be performed within the same fluctuation.

Although it is not shown in FIG. 7, for example, in the final stage of SPSP reach, it is possible to perform a revival performance in which the three decorative symbols in the same pattern are pseudo-stopped after pretending to be a loss, even in the normal gaming state. This resurrection effect is subject to the same prohibition as the variable probability game state so that it will not be executed together with the hit effect within the same variation when the variation pattern A is selected.

In addition, the ratio of probability-variable jackpots to the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination is 60%, and with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probability-variable jackpots (see FIG. 18(A)), variation pattern N in which the revival effect is performed is selected. is selected 20% of the time. Therefore, the probability that the game will be controlled in the variable probability game state after the revival performance is performed and the jackpot game ends is 12% (=0.6×0.2×100).
On the other hand, with reference to the variable pattern selection table for probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 18(A)), the rate at which the variable pattern L in which the jackpot effect is performed is selected is 30%. Therefore, the probability that the game will be controlled in a variable probability game state after the jackpot effect is performed and the jackpot game ends is 18% (=0.6×0.3×100).
From these facts, it can be said that when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the hit performance will be executed is higher than the probability that the resurrection performance will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which a revival effect is always executed when the variation pattern N is selected, but in other embodiments, the revival effect may not be executed even if the variation pattern N is selected. You may adopt this configuration. That is, the probability that the revival effect will be executed when the variation pattern N is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern N is selected and a revival effect is executed is set to a higher value than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which a revival effect is always executed when variable pattern N is selected in a variable probability gaming state, regardless of the type of variable probability jackpot, but in other embodiments, a 16R variable probability In this case, the revival performance may be made executable, while in the case of 8R probability variation or 4R probability variation, the revival production may not be executed. That is, the revival performance may function as a special jackpot notice for the 16R probability change.

[About the reliability of 7 symbol reach (normal gaming state)]
FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of ready-to-win symbols in the normal gaming state. FIG. 19(A) is a diagram showing a normal losing ready-to-win symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final ready-to-reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing".

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the same decorative symbols in the left and right columns are pseudo-stopped and a reach is established, a predetermined reach effect is performed. Or, it refers to the ready-to-win symbol displayed in the ready-to-win performance that is performed immediately before the loss notification performance. For example, when a normal reach is performed and a win notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed, the reach pattern displayed during the normal reach corresponds to the final reach pattern. In addition, if normal reach progresses to SPSP reach via character SP reach, and a hit notification performance or loss notification performance is performed following this SPSP reach, the reach symbol displayed during this SPSP reach performance corresponds to the final reach symbol.

The sub CPU 131 obtains a ready-to-reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final ready-to-win symbol, and if the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, the final ready-to-reach symbol corresponding to the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number is normally selected. The final ready-to-win symbol is selected by reading it from the losing ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(A)).

In this embodiment, the possible range of the ready-to-win symbol selection random number is set to "0" to "99". In the normal loss reach symbol selection table (see Figure 19(A)), 12 random numbers are set for each of 1 symbol, 2 symbol, 4 symbol, 5 symbol, 6 symbol, 8 symbol, and 9 symbol. Assigned. Furthermore, 10 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a loss, the percentage of 1 symbol, 2 symbol, 4 symbol, 5 symbol, 6 symbol, 8 symbol, or 9 symbol being selected as the final reach symbol is 12%. (=12/100), the rate at which 3 symbols are selected is 10% (=10/100), and the rate at which 7 symbols are selected is 6% (=6/100).

FIG. 19(B) is a diagram showing a normal 16R probability variable jackpot reach symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final ready-to-reach symbol, and if the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the final ready-to-reach symbol corresponding to the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number is normally selected. At 16R, the final ready-to-win symbol is selected by reading from the ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(B)).

In the normal reach symbol selection table for 16R guaranteed variable jackpot (see Figure 19(B)), 44 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and 7 random numbers are assigned to all other decorative symbols. A numerical value is assigned. Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is 16R probability variation, the percentage of 7 symbols being selected as the final reach symbol is 44% (=44/100), and other decorative symbols are selected. The percentage of all cases is 7% (=7/100).

FIG. 19(C) is a diagram showing a normal 6R normal jackpot ready-to-win symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final ready-to-win symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "6R normal". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final ready-to-reach symbol, and if the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal, the final ready-to-reach symbol corresponding to the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number is selected as normal. At 6R, the final ready-to-win symbol is selected by reading from the normal jackpot ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(C)).

In the normal 6R normal jackpot ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(C)), random numbers are not assigned to odd symbols. This is because the odd numbered symbols function as variable probability symbols. On the other hand, 25 random numbers are assigned to each even numbered symbol. Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is 6R normal, the proportion of each even numbered symbol being selected is 25% (=25/100), and the proportion of odd numbered symbols being selected is 0. %.

The following can be said from the ready-to-win symbol selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 19(A) to 19(C). That is, in the normal loss ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(A)), 6 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss". In this case, 7 symbols are selected as reach symbols at a rate of 6%. This means that even if a reach is achieved with 7 symbols, a loss notification effect may be performed later.
On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "6R normal", although the 7 symbol is not selected as the reach symbol (see FIG. 19(C)), the first special symbol determination result is "6R normal". When the result is "16R probability change", 7 symbols are selected as the reach symbols at a high rate of 44%.
In this way, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "16R probability change", 7 symbols are likely to be selected as the reach symbol, and when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose" Since it is difficult to select the 7 symbols as a reach symbol, it can be said that the 7 symbol reach, in which a reach is achieved with 7 symbols in the normal gaming state, is a performance with relatively high jackpot reliability. In addition, in the case of "16R probability change", 7 symbols may always be selected as the reach symbol.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in Fig. 19(B), even if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is 16R probability variation, an odd number pattern other than an even number pattern or a 7 pattern may be selected as a reach pattern. However, when these reach symbols are selected, the above-mentioned promotion performance (first half) and promotion success performance are performed based on FIG. will be held. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 11(B), even if three decorative symbols other than the 7 symbols come to a pseudo-stop, the player can enjoy the game without losing his expectations for the 16R guaranteed strange jackpot. .

[About the reliability of 7 symbol reach (variable gaming state)]
FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of ready-to-win symbols in a variable probability gaming state. FIG. 20(A) is a diagram illustrating a ready-to-win symbol selection table for loss during probability variation, which is referred to in order to determine the final ready-to-reach symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lose".

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, no reach effects other than battle reach are performed in the variable probability gaming state, so the reach symbols displayed during the battle reach correspond to the final reach symbols in the variable probability gaming state.

The sub CPU 131 acquires the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final ready-to-reach symbol, and if the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a loss, the final ready-to-reach symbol corresponding to the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number is changed. The final ready-to-win symbol is selected by reading it from the losing ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(A)).

In the reach symbol selection table for probability change (see Figure 20(A)), 15 random numbers are assigned to each of the 1 symbol, 2 symbol, 4 symbol, 6 symbol, 8 symbol, and 9 symbol. . Furthermore, five random numbers are assigned to each of the 3 symbols and 5 symbols. Further, no random value is assigned to the 7 symbols. Therefore, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a loss, the proportion of 1 symbol, 2 symbol, 4 symbol, 6 symbol, 8 symbol, or 9 symbol being selected as the final reach symbol is 15% (=15 /100), the rate at which 3 or 5 symbols are selected is 5% (=5/100), and the rate at which 7 symbols are selected is 0% (=0/100).

FIG. 19(B) is a diagram showing a reach symbol selection table for 16R probability variable jackpot during probability variation, which is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires a ready-to-win symbol selection random number when selecting the final ready-to-win symbol, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the final ready-to-win symbol corresponding to the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number is selected with probability variation. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the reach symbol selection table for medium 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 20(B)).

In the reach symbol selection table for 16R guaranteed variable jackpot (see Figure 20 (B)), 7 symbols are assigned 50 random numbers, and 3 symbols are assigned 16 random numbers. 10 random numbers are assigned to 5 symbols. Four random numbers are assigned to each of the other ready-to-reach symbols. Therefore, when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is 16R probability variation, the proportion of 7 symbols selected as the final reach symbol is 50% (=50/100), and the proportion of 3 symbols selected is 16% (=16/100), the percentage of 5 symbols selected is 10% (=10/100), and the percentage of other decorative patterns selected is 4% (=4/100). 100).

FIG. 20(C) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win symbol selection table for 8R normal jackpot during variable probability, which is referred to in order to determine the final ready-to-win symbol when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "8R normal". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final ready-to-reach symbol, and if the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is 8R normal, the final ready-to-reach symbol corresponding to the ready-to-reach symbol selection random number is changed with certainty. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the medium 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(C)).

In the probability variable 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(C)), random numbers are not assigned to odd symbols. On the other hand, 40 random numbers are assigned to 4 symbols, and 20 random numbers are assigned to all other even symbols. Therefore, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is 8R normal, the proportion of 4 symbols selected is 40% (=40/100), and the proportion of other even-numbered symbols selected is all 20% (=20/100), and the ratio of odd numbered symbols being selected is 0%.

The following can be said from the ready-to-win symbol selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 20(A) to 20(C). That is, in the reach symbol selection table for 8R normal jackpot during probability variation (see Figure 20(C)), random values are not assigned to 7 symbols, but in the reach symbol selection table for 16R probability variation jackpot during probability variation (see Fig. 20(C)), random values are not assigned to 7 symbols. In B), 50 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. In the ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(A)), random values are not assigned to the 7 symbols.
For these reasons, if a reach is achieved with 7 symbols in the variable probability game state, no loss will be notified after that, and the hit notification effect will be such that the three decorative symbols showing the number of doubles of "777" come to a stop. will be held. If you think about it in this way, a 7-symbol reach in which a 7-symbol reach is achieved in a fixed-variable gaming state can be seen as a jackpot notice that definitively foretells that a jackpot game will be executed, and also, Since is a 16R fixed-variable exclusive performance, it can be said that the 7 symbol reach in the fixed-variable gaming state is a probability-variable jackpot notice.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in Figure 20(B), even if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is 16R, an odd number pattern other than an even number pattern or a 7 pattern may be selected as a reach pattern. However, when these ready-to-reach symbols are selected, a promotion performance similar to the promotion performance performed during the normal gaming state is performed, and finally a winning notification performance is performed when the number of doubles of "777" is aligned. be exposed.

[About changes in reliability of 7 symbol reach]
As is clear from the explanation regarding the 7-symbol reach based on FIG. 19, the 7-symbol reach in the normal gaming state can be performed regardless of whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot." Although the jackpot reliability is relatively high, the jackpot reliability is less than 100%. On the other hand, as is clear from the explanation regarding the 7-symbol reach based on FIG. 20, the 7-symbol reach in the variable probability gaming state is executable when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "jackpot". However, it is a performance with 100% jackpot reliability that will not be executed if it is a "lose". As is clear from these, even with the same 7-symbol reach, there are differences in jackpot reliability depending on the gaming state, and by changing the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the variable probability gaming state, the 7-symbol reach is different. The jackpot reliability changes from a value less than 100% to 100%.

In addition, the 7-symbol reach as a jackpot notice with a jackpot reliability of 100% is a special effect for variable probability gaming states, and in the normal gaming state, a jackpot notice (for example, a sudden hit effect) that is different from this 7-symbol reach is performed. be exposed.

[About various jackpot notices]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23 and 25 to 28, various types of jackpot notices that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 will be explained. Here, FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various jackpot notices. FIG. 22 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of premier character production. FIG. 23 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow color title display. FIG. 25 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow-colored character display. FIG. 26 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of cut-in performed in response to an operation. FIG. 27 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1 showing a specific example of one-shot notification. FIG. 28 is a screen diagram illustrating how the premiere character performance is performed multiple times within the same variation.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has, in addition to the above-mentioned hit effect and winning success effect in the normal gaming state, the hit effect and 7 symbol reach in the variable probability game state, as a jackpot notice, a premium character effect, and a rainbow color title display. , rainbow color cut-in, rainbow color text display, and one-shot announcement.

<Summary of Premier Character Production>
The premier character performance (see FIG. 22) is a performance in which a performance image showing a specific character (hereinafter referred to as "premier character") is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the voice of the premier character is output from the speaker 24. In FIG. 22, a raccoon dog character is displayed as a premium character, and an example of the raccoon character emitting a voice saying "Go for it!" is illustrated. This premier character performance has multiple execution timings within the same fluctuation, for example, during the contest performance in character SP reach (see Figure 22 (A)) or during SPSP reach (see Figure 22 (B)). It is possible. Note that this premier character does not appear if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "lost".

Please note that the type of premier character is not limited to one type, but you can prepare multiple types of premier characters and display any one of them, or display multiple premier characters at the same time. Good too. Further, the premium character may be any character as long as it does not appear if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "lost".

<Overview of rainbow color title display>
The rainbow color title display (see FIG. 23) is an effect that displays the reach title displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in rainbow-colored characters when a specific reach effect such as character SP reach or SPSP reach is started. This rainbow title display also has multiple execution timings within the same variation. In Figure 23 (A), before the start of the contest effect (see Figure 7 (F-1)) in the character SP reach, the reach title ``Take back the treasure chest!'' is displayed in rainbow-colored letters. An example of how this is done is shown below. FIG. 23B shows an example of how the reach title "Defeat the enemy boss!" is displayed in rainbow-colored letters at the start of SPSP reach.

In addition, if this rainbow title display is not performed when a specific reach effect such as Character SP Reach or SPSP Reach starts, the reach title may be displayed in blue text, or the reach title may be displayed in red text. A red title is displayed (see FIG. 24). FIG. 24 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of blue title display and red title display. In the blue title display illustrated in FIGS. 24(A) and (C), the reach title is displayed in blue characters, and in the red title display illustrated in FIGS. 24(B) and (D), the reach title is displayed in red characters. is displayed. Note that each of the above three types of title display is an image that is displayed on the entire screen, and the display area for the entire screen is wide.

Here, the blue title display indicates that the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 10%), and the red title display indicates that the jackpot reliability is relatively high. It is a title display (for example, jackpot reliability is 30%). These two types of title displays (blue title display and red title display) can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and a "loss". On the other hand, the rainbow color title display can be executed with a certain probability when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", but if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Lose" This is different from the above two types of title display in that it is not executed when the title is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the title display itself is performed in the normal game state but not in the variable probability game state. However, even in the variable probability game state, for example, for Battle Reach, a similar title display or a rainbow display is displayed. The title may be displayed in color. Furthermore, the color of the title display that functions as a jackpot notice is not limited to rainbow colors, and may be, for example, gold. Further, a specific picture may be displayed around the title to function as a jackpot notice.

In addition, before displaying the title display, the display area of the entire screen is displayed in the order of blue title display, red title display, and rainbow color title display, and then these images are scrolled and displayed to see which title is displayed. You may perform an effect that makes you look forward to seeing it actually displayed.

<Overview of rainbow color character display>
Rainbow color text display (see Figure 25) is a rainbow color text display that displays text (for example, lyrics that are displayed when a specific song is being played) that is displayed during a specific reach effect such as Character SP Reach or SPSP Reach. This is a performance that is displayed in color. FIG. 25(A) shows that the characters displayed during the contest performance in the character SP reach are displayed in rainbow colors. Further, FIG. 25(B) shows that the characters displayed during SPSP reach are displayed in rainbow colors.

In addition, when this rainbow color character display is not performed, a blue character display in which characters are displayed in blue during a reach effect, or a blue character display in which characters are displayed in red during a reach effect may be performed. Here, the blue text display is an effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, jackpot confidence is 15%), and the red text display is an effect indicating that the jackpot confidence is relatively high. (For example, jackpot confidence is 40%). Displaying characters in these two types of colors can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and a "loss". On the other hand, the rainbow character display can be executed with a certain probability if the first special symbol determination result is a "jackpot", but if the first special symbol determination result is a "loss" It differs from the above two types of character display in that it is not executed in the case of

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the character display itself is performed in the normal game state but not in the variable probability game state, but even in the variable probability game state, for example, for Battle Reach, the same blue character display, Red characters or rainbow colored characters may be displayed. Furthermore, the color of the character display that functions as a jackpot notice is not limited to rainbow colors, and may be, for example, gold.

<Overview of rainbow cut-in>
The rainbow color cut-in (see FIG. 26) is a performance that performs the operation corresponding performance described above based on FIG. 10 using a rainbow color performance image. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, for example, at the final stage of SPSP reach, the operation promotion effect described above based on FIG. 10(H) is performed (see FIG. 26(A)). On the other hand, if the player operates the effect button 26 within the validity period, a blue cut-in (Fig. 26(B)) is performed, and a red cut-in (see FIG. 26(C)) is performed in which a cut-in image with a red effect is superimposed on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. There are cases. Here, while the blue cut-in is said to have a jackpot reliability of 10%, the red cut-in is said to have a jackpot reliability of 60%, and when these two cut-ins are compared, Based on the difference between the color of the effect related to the cut-in image and the number of characters included in the cut-in image, players believe that the red cut-in has higher jackpot reliability than the blue cut-in. It is possible to easily recognize that.

Note that these blue cut-ins and red cut-ins can be executed both when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a “jackpot” and when it is a “loss”. It is characterized in that it is likely to be executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a "loss", and difficult to be executed when it is a "jackpot". Conversely, the red cut-in has the characteristic that it is likely to be executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", and difficult to be executed when it is a "loss". In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three types of jackpots are prepared as jackpots related to the first special symbol determination: 16R probability variation, 6R probability variation, and 6R normal jackpot, but blue cut-in and red cut-in are , when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot", it can be executed regardless of the type of these jackpots. Note that in the case of a loss, a blue cut-in is always executed, and in the case of a jackpot, a red cut-in or a blue cut-in may be executed.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "16R probability change", when the player operates the up key or down key of the effect key 27, a rainbow color cut-in (see FIG. 26(D) ) may be performed. This rainbow-colored cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image with a rainbow-colored effect is superimposed on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. As illustrated in FIG. 26(A), the effect button This is a performance that will not occur unless the player operates the up key or the down key within the valid period in a situation where an operation promotion performance is being performed to encourage the operation of 26.

In addition, when the sub CPU 131 acquires information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability change" from the game control board 100 and sets a performance pattern for performing an operation promotion performance during SPSP reach. Also sets whether to operate the up key or the down key to generate a rainbow cut-in. For example, it may be set to generate a rainbow cut-in when the up key is operated, and to generate a blue cut-in or a red cut-in when the down key is operated. Further, for example, it may be set to generate a blue cut-in or a red cut-in when the up key is operated, and to generate a rainbow-colored cut-in when the down key is operated.

Rainbow color cut-in may be executed if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "16R probability change", but it may not be executed if the judgment result is "loss". do not have. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of the rainbow cut-in is 100%.

Further, the rainbow color cut-in in this embodiment is a special effect related to 16R probability variation. For this reason, even if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", if the type is "6R probability variation" or "6R normal" instead of "16R probability variation", the up key will be used within the validity period. Or, even if the down key is operated, a rainbow cut-in will not occur. Therefore, even if the rainbow color cut-in does not occur in response to the operation of the up key or the down key, the player can enjoy the game while expecting "6R probability change" or "6R normal".

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform cut-in in any one of a plurality of performance modes, and can perform cut-in in any one of the plurality of performance modes (this embodiment ``Rainbow cut-in'') can be used as a jackpot prediction.

When it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, the gaming machine 1 executes a blue cut-in, a red cut-in, and a rainbow cut-in. That is, in the case of a jackpot, any of the three cut-ins can be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that a jackpot game is not to be executed, there are times when a blue cut-in is executed and times when a red cut-in is executed, but there is no time when a rainbow cut-in is executed. . This is why the rainbow cut-in functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells the execution of a jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "16R probability change", and if the key assigned by the sub CPU 131 between the up key and the down key is operated within the validity period, the result will be 100%. A case where rainbow cut-in occurs with probability will be explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the assigned key is operated in the above situation, a production lottery using random numbers is used to determine whether or not to generate a rainbow cut-in. The rainbow-colored cut-in may be generated only when the player wins this effect lottery. Note that this probability of winning may be, for example, 50%. In this way, even if the necessary conditions for rainbow cut-in to occur are met, by preventing rainbow cut-in from occurring at a certain rate, rainbow cut-in will not occur. Even in this case, the player can continue to hold out the hope of "16R probability change".

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the left key or right key of the performance key 27 is operated during the valid period of the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 26(A), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is A one-shot notification (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, may occur on the condition that it is "16R definite change".

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which a rainbow-colored cut-in is performed using a cut-in image in which a rainbow-colored effect is applied to a production image including three characters. The display mode of the cut-in image is not limited to this. In other embodiments, for example, a cut-in displaying a cut-in image showing golden letters may be executed as a jackpot preview.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration in which a predetermined performance is executed in one of a plurality of performance modes in the first performance mode and the second performance mode, in other embodiments, a step-up performance may be performed as the predetermined performance. is possible. This step-up performance is a performance that can be developed step-by-step up to a predetermined number of steps (for example, "5") up to a predetermined number of steps or less, and eventually progresses to any one of Steps 1 to 4. The step-up performance may be performed as a reliability-suggesting performance that suggests the reliability of the jackpot, and the step-up performance that finally develops to step 5 may be performed as a jackpot notice.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a configuration is adopted in which a cut-in occurs at the final stage of SPSP reach, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time of the first special symbol in which SPSP reach is not performed is selected. In this case, cut-in does not occur. On the other hand, in other embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which a cut-in can occur at a timing other than the final stage of SPSP reach, and for example, in a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time such as variation pattern A or variation pattern B. A rainbow cut-in may occur when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

(Summary of one-shot notification)
The one-shot announcement (see Fig. 27) outputs a special effect sound that is not output when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "lost" from the speaker 24, and also lights up the board lamp 25 and frame lamp 37 in rainbow colors. It is a performance that makes you feel.

In this embodiment, this one-shot announcement is a performance performed during the variable probability gaming state, but in other embodiments, the one-shot announcement may also be made during the normal gaming state.

[Specific example of premier character performance in variable game state]
FIG. 28 is a screen diagram illustrating how the premiere character performance is performed multiple times within the same variation. In FIG. 28(A), in a state where two pending icons are displayed in the second pending icon display area 52, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is a loss. A state in which a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern indicating a certain situation is stopped and displayed is illustrated. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as red pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the second special symbols and decorative symbols started, the second pending icon corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, a shift process is performed for each pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52, and high-speed scroll display of decorative patterns is started (see FIGS. 28(A) and 28(B)). .

When the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon shifted to the area 53 is 8R probability variation, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y2 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed. In such cases, the following effects may be performed.

In other words, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbols, 3 symbols will pseudo-stop in the left column, and 7 symbols will pseudo-stop in the right column. An effect to incite the establishment is performed (see FIG. 28(C)). While this reach establishment inciting performance is being performed, a premier character performance may be performed. In FIG. 28(C), a premiere character performance is performed in which a performance image showing a girl character is displayed on the LCD screen 5, and the voice of the girl character saying "Ganbare! Ganbare!" is output from the speaker 24. An example is shown. Note that here, a character different from the premier character (raccoon dog character) that appears in the premiere character performance performed in the normal gaming state is displayed, but a character that is common to the character displayed in the premier character performance in the normal gaming state is displayed. may be displayed. This also applies to the case where the premier character performance is executed at a timing other than the reach establishment promotion performance.

In this way, after the premier character performance is performed in conjunction with the reach establishment promotion performance, when the decorative pattern that is common to the left symbol comes to a pseudo-stop in the right row, a reach is established (see FIG. 28(D)). When a reach is established, a title display that displays the reach title related to the battle reach, such as "Decisive Battle 〇〇〇VSXX (See E). In addition, in FIG. 28 (E), the specific notation of the reach title is omitted, and the display position of the premier character is different from the time when the reach is established inciting production, but the display position of the premier character is It may be the same as at the time of establishment inciting performance.

At the final stage of the battle reach, an operation promotion performance is performed that prompts the player to operate the performance button 26 (see FIG. 28(F)). When the player operates the performance button 26 during the validity period related to the operation promotion performance, a victory suggestion performance is performed that suggests that the player's character has won by defeating the enemy character (see FIG. 28(G)). In this victory suggestion performance, the words "Defeated!!" indicating that the own character has defeated the enemy character are displayed and the sound thereof is output, and the performance accessory 7 moves while emitting light in rainbow colors. At this time, the three symbol rows displayed in a small size at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are pseudo-stopped in a manner that indicates a double number (see FIG. 28(G)). In addition, if the player does not perform any operation within the validity period, the victory suggestion performance will be automatically executed at the timing when the validity period ends, but the second special symbol determination result will be "8R normal". ”, a defeat suggesting performance is performed in response to the operation or automatically.

When the victory suggestion effect is performed as described above, the three decorative symbols that had been pseudo-stopped in the upper left corner of the LCD screen 5 are displayed in a large size in the center of the LCD screen 5 in a pseudo-stop state (see Figure 28 (H)). ), with the final stop of the second special symbol, these three decorative symbols come to a final stop (see FIG. 28(I)).

In this way, it is possible to execute the premier character performance a plurality of times during the variable display of the second special symbol not only in the normal game state but also in the variable probability game state. In addition, here, we have explained the case where the premier character performance is performed three times within the same fluctuation of the second special symbol, but there are cases where the premier character performance is performed twice within the same fluctuation, and the same There may be cases where the premiere character performance is performed only once within the fluctuation.

[About the characteristics of each jackpot notice]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of each jackpot notice will be explained with reference to FIG. 21. During the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, there are jackpot announcements that definitely foretell that a jackpot game will be executed, such as a hit effect, a capture success effect, a premier character effect, a rainbow color title display, and a rainbow. It is possible to perform color cut-in and rainbow color character display.

<Characteristics of the collision effect in normal gaming state>
The hit performance in the normal gaming state is a performance where the symbols suddenly line up without going through the reach (see FIG. 14). This hit performance is executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "probable jackpot" and variation pattern A with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. This is a jackpot prediction (see Figure 17(A)). Note that for variation pattern A, since there is no production pattern prepared in which a collision effect is not performed, the probability that a collision effect will be executed when variation pattern A is selected is 100 in this embodiment. % (see Figure 21). It should be noted that, unlike the premier character performance, etc., this impact performance has only one execution timing, and is characterized in that it appears only immediately after the first special symbol begins to fluctuate in the normal game state.

In addition, although the fluctuation pattern A selected when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "probable strange jackpot" is associated with a hit effect in the table stored in the sub ROM 132, normally Among the variation patterns defined in the jackpot variation pattern selection table, there is no one that is associated with a jackpot effect (see FIG. 17(B)). For this reason, if a hit notification performance is performed following a jackpot performance, the game will always be controlled in a variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game. That is, when the jackpot effect is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, an effect called "next notice" may be performed during normal reach (see FIG. 7(K)), but this "next notice" suggests the execution of SPSP reach. It is a performance that On the other hand, a hit effect is an effect in which the symbols suddenly line up without going through reach. Therefore, if the "next notice" is given during the variable display of the first special symbol, the hit effect will not be executed. This also applies to the case where an effect indicating that a reach is established is performed. In addition, the "next preview" will not be performed if it does not develop into SPSP reach, so it will not always be performed during normal reach, but there is a production route that will develop from normal reach to SPSP reach. , once the reach is established, the collision effect will not be executed after that, so if the "next notice" is executed, the collision effect will not be executed, and compared to the collision effect, the collision effect will not be executed. Therefore, it can be said that other reliability suggesting effects (for example, title display) are always executed, and other jackpot predictions (for example, rainbow color title display) are likely to be executed.

In addition, when variation pattern A is selected, the validity period is not set, and when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in variation pattern A, it is unrelated to the operation of the production button 26 or production key 27. A surprise performance will be held. For this reason, since the jackpot performance is executed at a timing that the player does not expect, it can be said that it is a jackpot preview that can provide an extremely high performance effect.

<Characteristics of successful capture performance in normal gaming state>
The capture success performance is a jackpot notice that is executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "probable strange jackpot" or "normal jackpot" and variable pattern C is selected (Fig. 17 (A) and (See (B)). Note that for variation pattern C, since there is no variation performance pattern in which no successful capture performance is prepared, the probability that a successful capture performance will be executed when variation pattern C is selected is as follows in this embodiment. It is 100% (see FIG. 21). Note that this capture success performance is a special performance for the character SP reach, so it has the characteristic that it can only be executed during the character SP reach. Furthermore, the successful capture performance has a feature in that a jackpot notification is performed immediately after the successful capture performance is executed (see FIGS. 13(A), (H), and (I)). In other words, when the capture success effect is performed, the jackpot notification is performed at the character SPSP reach without the reach effect developing from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach (see FIG. 7).

Note that the capture success effect is a special effect for variation pattern C. For this reason, when the variation pattern A is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is variably displayed in this variation pattern A, the capture success effect will not be performed together with the collision effect. do not have. This also applies to other jackpot notices that are not associated with the variation pattern A.

In addition, the variation pattern C can be selected both when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "probable variable jackpot" and a "normal jackpot" (see FIGS. 17(A) and (B)). . For this reason, if the winning notification performance is executed immediately after the winning success performance and a jackpot game is played, after the jackpot game ends, there are cases where the game is controlled in a variable probability game state, and cases where the game is controlled in a normal game state. There is.

Furthermore, since the character SP reach is a reach effect that is not executed in the variable probability gaming state, the capture success effect is similarly not executed in the variable probability gaming state.

<Characteristics of premier character performance in normal game mode>
In this embodiment, the premier character performance may appear in all reach performances such as normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach. On the other hand, if variation pattern A is selected, the jackpot notice other than the jackpot effect will not be executed, so the premier character effect will be the one of the variation patterns of the first special symbol for the jackpot. It can be said that this is a jackpot notice that can be executed when a variation pattern other than variation pattern A is selected.

In addition, the execution probability of the premier character performance differs depending on which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol for the jackpot, but in this embodiment, the execution probability of the premier character production is 5. It is set to a value within the range of ~40% (see Figure 29). For this reason, it can be said that this is a jackpot notice with a lower execution probability than the jackpot effect executed when variation pattern A is selected or the capture success effect executed when variation pattern C is selected.

In addition, as described above based on FIG. 22, the premier character performance may appear multiple times within the same variation, and in this embodiment, the premier character performance may appear once within the same variation of the first special symbol. There are cases where it is carried out once, cases where it is carried out twice, and cases where it is carried out three times.

In addition, the variation patterns B to E that can execute the premier character performance can be selected both when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "probable strange jackpot" and a "normal jackpot" (Fig. 17 (See (A) and (B)). For this reason, if a winning notification performance is executed after the premier character performance is performed and a jackpot game is played, after the jackpot game is over, the game may be controlled in a variable probability gaming state, or the game may be controlled in a normal gaming state. There are cases where it is done.

<Characteristics of rainbow color title display in normal gaming state>
Rainbow color title display is a jackpot notice that displays character SP reach and reach titles related to SPSP reach in rainbow colors, and is a jackpot notice that displays character SP reach and SPSP reach titles in rainbow colors. It is executable when either one is selected.

As is clear from the above, the execution timing of the rainbow title display is predetermined, and there is a possibility that it will appear at the start of the character SP reach or at the beginning of the SPSP reach, but from the character SP reach When the reach effect develops to SPSP reach, a rainbow color title display may be performed both at the start of character SP reach and at the start of SPSP reach.

Note that the execution probability of displaying a rainbow title differs depending on which variation pattern is selected from variation patterns C to E, but in this embodiment, the probability of displaying a rainbow title is 5 to 15%. It is set to a value that falls within the range. The specific execution probabilities of the above-described premier character presentation, rainbow color title display, rainbow color cut-in, and rainbow color character display will be described in detail later based on FIG. 29.

In addition, the variation patterns C to E in which the rainbow title display can be executed can be selected both when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "probable strange jackpot" and a "normal jackpot" (Fig. 17(A) and (B)). For this reason, if a jackpot game is played after the rainbow color title display is performed and the hit notification effect is executed, after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in the variable probability game state and the game will be controlled in the normal game state. There are cases where it is controlled.

<Characteristics of rainbow cut-in in normal game mode>
The rainbow cut-in is a jackpot preview that may appear at the end of the SPSP reach performance. Therefore, the rainbow color title display can be executed when the variation patterns D and E, which are associated with the variation production pattern that performs the SPSP reach effect, are selected as the variation production pattern, and the execution probability is determined by which variation. Even if a pattern is selected, it is set to be 5%.

Further, as described above, the rainbow color cut-in does not appear unless a predetermined operation (in this embodiment, the operation of the up key or the down key of the effect key 27) is performed. Further, the rainbow cut-in has a feature that it appears only when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation". These matters are as described above based on FIG. 26.

<Characteristics of rainbow colored text display in normal gaming state>
The rainbow colored text display is a dedicated effect for these two types of reach effects that are performed during character SP reach and SPSP reach, and the variable pattern C ~ to which the variable effect patterns in which these reach effects are performed are associated. This is executable when either one of E (see FIGS. 17(A) and 17(B)) is selected. Note that the execution probability of displaying rainbow-colored characters varies depending on the selected variation pattern, but in this embodiment, it is set to a value within the range of 5 to 20%.

In addition, the rainbow color text display may be performed during the character SP reach or during the SPSP reach, for example, a variable pattern that is associated with a variable effect pattern that develops from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach. is selected, there is a possibility that it appears multiple times (for example, twice) within the same variation.

In addition, the variation patterns C to E in which the rainbow-colored character display can be executed can be selected both when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "probable strange jackpot" and a "normal jackpot" (Fig. 17(A) and (B)). For this reason, if a jackpot game is played by executing the winning notification effect after the rainbow-colored characters are displayed, after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in the variable probability gaming state, and the game will be controlled in the normal gaming state. There are cases where it is controlled.

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable game state, the jackpot effect, one shot announcement, premier character effect, and 7 symbol reach are displayed as a jackpot notice that definitely predicts that a jackpot game will be executed. It is doable.

<Characteristics of the impact effect in certain variable gaming conditions>
The hit performance in the variable probability game state is a performance where the symbols suddenly line up without going through the reach (see FIG. 16). This hit performance is executed when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "probable jackpot" and the variation pattern L with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. This is a jackpot prediction (see FIG. 18(A)). In addition, since there is no production pattern prepared for variation pattern L in which a collision effect is not performed, the probability that a collision effect will be executed when variation pattern L is selected is 100 in this embodiment. % (see Figure 21). In addition, unlike the premier character performance etc. in the variable probability game state, this collision effect has only one execution timing, and it appears only immediately after the second special symbol starts changing in the variable probability game state. It has characteristics.

In addition, although the variation pattern L selected when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "probable variable jackpot" is associated with a hit effect, it is not specified in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table. Among the variation patterns, there is no one that is associated with a hit effect (see FIG. 18(B)). For this reason, if a hit notification performance is performed following a jackpot performance, the game will always be controlled in a variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game. That is, when the jackpot effect is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the variable pattern L is selected, the hit effect is always executed, but for example, in the variable probability game state, the second special symbol (or the first The hit effect can be executed until the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol) is displayed changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, 30 times), but after reaching the predetermined value, the hit effect is executed. You may choose not to do so. This control can be realized, for example, by preventing the variation pattern L from being selected after the number of variations reaches a predetermined value.

<Characteristics of one-shot notification in fixed-variable gaming conditions>
The one-shot announcement is a jackpot announcement in which the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit rainbow colors and a special effect sound is output from the speaker 24. This one-shot announcement is a jackpot notice that can be executed when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "16R probability change" and variation pattern M or variation pattern N is selected. It is also set to be 15% when the variation pattern of is selected. Since a one-shot announcement will not be made unless the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "16R definite variation", when a one-shot announcement is made, "16R definite variation" will be highly likely at that point. In this way, the one-shot announcement made in the probability-variable gaming state is a special effect of "16R probability-variable", so in this embodiment, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "8R probability-variable", If it is "4R definite change" or "8R normal", no one-shot announcement will be made.

<Characteristics of 7 symbol reach in certain variable gaming conditions>
The 7-symbol reach, which functions as a jackpot notice, is a special performance in a variable probability gaming state that can be executed when any of the variable patterns L to N is selected. That is, the 7-symbol reach in the normal gaming state does not function as a jackpot notice because its jackpot reliability is less than 100%. Since this 7 symbol reach is selected only when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", when the reach is established with 7 symbols, "16R probability variation" is highly likely.

[About jackpot notice type selection table]
FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table. The sub ROM 132 contains jackpot notices other than jackpot notices linked to variable patterns such as a hit effect in the normal gaming state, a winning success effect in the normal gaming state, a winning effect in the variable probability gaming state, and a 7 symbol reach in the variable probability gaming state. A jackpot preview type selection table is stored that is referred to when deciding whether to execute or not.

This jackpot notice type selection table includes the first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(A)), the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)), and the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)). (C)), and a fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(D)).

(First jackpot notice type selection table)
The first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(A)) shows that when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "jackpot" and variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, , is referred to when deciding whether to execute the jackpot notice.

When variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 obtains a jackpot notice random number for determining whether to execute a jackpot notice, and executes a jackpot notice corresponding to the jackpot notice random number. By reading the notice type from the first jackpot notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice. In this embodiment, the possible range of the jackpot prediction random number is set to "0" to "99".

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, the only jackpot preview that can be executed when variation pattern B is selected is the premium character performance. Therefore, in the first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(A)), the jackpot notice types are defined as "with premier character performance" and "without premier character performance", and "with premier character performance". 40 random numbers are assigned to "No Premier Character Production", and 60 random numbers are assigned to "No Premier Character Production".

Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot" and variable pattern B is selected, the probability that "Premier character performance" will be read and the premier character performance will be executed is: It is 40% (=40/100).

(Second jackpot notice type selection table)
The second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)) shows that when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "jackpot" and variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, , is referred to when deciding whether to execute the jackpot notice.

When variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 obtains a jackpot notice random number for determining whether to execute a jackpot notice, and executes a jackpot notice corresponding to the jackpot notice random number. By reading the notice type from the second jackpot notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 21, when variable pattern C is selected, there are three types of jackpot notices that can be executed other than the winning success effect: premier character effect, rainbow color title display, and rainbow color character display. be. Therefore, in the second jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29(B)), "with premier character effect", "without premier character effect", "with rainbow color title display", "without rainbow color title display", ``With rainbow color text display'' and ``no rainbow color text display'' are defined.

In the second jackpot notice type selection table (see Figure 29(B)), 10 random numbers are assigned to "with premier character performance", and 90 random numbers are assigned to "without premier character performance". A numerical value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "premier character presentation available" is read out and the premier character presentation is executed with the variation of variation pattern C is 10% (=10/100).

In addition, in the second jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29 (B)), 15 random values are assigned to "with rainbow title display", and 15 random values are assigned to "without rainbow title display". 85 random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "Rainbow color title display available" is read out and rainbow color title display is executed due to the variation of variation pattern C is 15% (=15/100).

In addition, in the second jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29(B)), 20 random numbers are assigned to "with rainbow text display", and 20 random values are assigned to "no rainbow text display". 80 random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "Rainbow colored characters are displayed" is read out and rainbow colored characters are displayed due to the variation of variation pattern C is 20% (=20/100).

In addition, in the second jackpot preview type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)), a common random number value is assigned to "with premier character presentation" and "with rainbow color title display." For this reason, if the acquired jackpot notice random number is "64", for example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in variation pattern C, both the premier character performance and the rainbow title display will be performed. It turns out. This is the same for the premiere character presentation and the rainbow-colored character display, and also for the rainbow-colored title display and the rainbow-colored character display.

(Third jackpot notice type selection table)
The third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)) shows that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "jackpot" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is variation pattern D (or variation pattern E). is selected, it is referred to when deciding whether to execute the jackpot notice.

When the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 obtains a jackpot notice random number for determining whether to execute the jackpot notice, and executes the jackpot notice. By reading out the jackpot notice type corresponding to the notice random number from the third jackpot notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, the jackpot notice that can be executed when variation pattern D or variation pattern E is selected includes premium character presentation, rainbow color title display, rainbow color cut-in, and rainbow color character display. There are four types. Therefore, in the third jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29(C)), "with premier character effect", "without premier character effect", "with rainbow color title display", "without rainbow color title display", "With rainbow color cut-in", "without rainbow color cut-in", "with rainbow color character display", and "without rainbow color character display" are defined.

In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see Figure 29(C)), 5 random numbers are assigned to "Premier character effect", and 95 random numbers are assigned to "No premier character effect". A numerical value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "premier character performance available" will be read and the premier character performance will be executed with the variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (=5/100).

In addition, in the third jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29 (C)), five random values are assigned to "with rainbow title display" and to "no rainbow title display". 95 random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "Rainbow color title display available" will be read and rainbow color title display will be executed due to the variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (=5/100).

In addition, in the third jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29 (C)), five random values are assigned to "with rainbow cut-in" and to "no rainbow cut-in". 95 random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow cut-in" will be read and rainbow cut-in will be executed due to the variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (=5/100).
However, the rainbow cut-in will not be executed unless the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", so even if it is decided to execute the rainbow cut-in, if it is not "16R probability variation", it will not be executed. Rainbow color cut-in is not performed even if the key or down key is operated.

In addition, in the third jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29(C)), five random values are assigned to "with rainbow text display" and "no rainbow text display" is assigned. 95 random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "Rainbow colored characters are displayed" is read out and rainbow colored characters are displayed due to the variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 20% (=20/100).

In addition, in the third jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29 (C)), the execution probability of premier character presentation, rainbow color title display, rainbow color cut-in, and rainbow color character display is all 5%. However, these execution probabilities may be different from each other, or only one or two of them may be different.

Also, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), similar to the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)), there are some common irregularities for multiple jackpot notices. A numerical value is assigned. Therefore, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E), a plurality of jackpot notices may be compounded.

(4th jackpot notice type selection table)
The fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(D)) indicates that the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "probable variable jackpot" and that the variation pattern of the second special symbol is variation pattern M (or variation pattern N). ) is selected, it is referred to when deciding whether to execute the jackpot notice.

When the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 131 obtains a jackpot notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot notice, and executes the jackpot notice. By reading out the jackpot notice type corresponding to the notice random number from the fourth jackpot notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, when variable pattern M or variable pattern N is selected, there are two types of jackpot notices that can be executed other than 7 symbol reach: one-shot notice and premier character performance. For this reason, the 4th jackpot announcement type selection table (see Figure 29 (D)) stipulates "with one-shot announcement," "without one-shot announcement," "with premier character performance," and "no premier character performance." has been done.

In the fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see Figure 29 (D)), 15 random numbers are assigned to "one shot announcement", and 85 random numbers are assigned to "no one shot announcement". A numerical value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "one-shot notification" will be read out and one-shot notification will be executed due to the variation of variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is 15% (=15/100).

In addition, since the one-shot announcement is a special performance for "16R sure change", even if the jackpot related to the second special symbol judgment is "sure change jackpot", if it is "8R hard change" or "4R hard change", does not execute one-shot notification even if "one-shot notification" is read.

In addition, in the fourth jackpot preview type selection table (see Figure 29 (D)), 15 random numbers are assigned to "with premier character performance", and 85 random numbers are assigned to "without premier character performance". A random value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "Premier character performance available" is read and the premier character performance is executed by variation of variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is 15% (=15/100).

In addition, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state becomes "8R normal", the variable probability gaming state ends and the game is controlled in the time saving gaming state. For this reason, the "8R normal" related to the second special symbol determination cannot be said to be a very desirable jackpot for the player, and if a jackpot notice is given for such a jackpot, it will cause the player to feel uncomfortable. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the performance effect will be reduced.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, there is no jackpot notice type selection table that is referred to when the second special symbol determination result is "8R normal".

[About the execution timing of each production in the normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the execution timing of each performance in the normal gaming state will be explained. Here, FIG. 30 is a time chart showing a specific example of performance in the normal gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 30(A), when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "probable variable jackpot" and variation pattern A is selected, approximately Until 2 seconds have elapsed, the liquid crystal screen 5 undergoes a high-speed fluctuation in which the three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom at high speed. It will be done. Then, following this blackout effect, the above-mentioned hit effect is executed for about 3 seconds, and as the jackpot symbol X1 or be exposed.

In this way, when variation pattern A (see FIG. 17(A)) with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, an effect that notifies reach establishment that can be executed when another variation pattern is selected. , normal reach, character SP reach, SPSP reach, etc. are not executed.

Furthermore, the hit effect in the normal game state is a special effect for the variation pattern A. Therefore, if another variation pattern such as variation pattern C is selected, the hit effect will not be executed. Conversely, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in variation pattern A, the jackpot notice that is executed when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in other variation patterns will not be executed. .

As illustrated in FIG. 30(B), when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "jackpot" and variation pattern C with a variation time of 40 seconds is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol A pre-reach performance is performed from the start of the reach until the reach is established. This pre-reach effect consists of a high-speed fluctuation that scrolls the three symbol rows from top to bottom at high speed, and a low-speed fluctuation that gradually reduces the scrolling speed of each symbol row and pseudo-stops the left and right symbols. The high-speed fluctuation that is the first half of the pre-reach performance is common to the high-speed fluctuation that is performed when fluctuation pattern A is selected.

As is clear from this, when variation pattern A is selected, a sudden collision effect occurs during the high-speed variation of the symbol row, which is the same as when other variation patterns are selected. do. For this reason, it is possible to give a great surprise to the player who had predicted that the scrolling speed would decrease and a reach effect would be achieved, thereby achieving a high performance effect.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30(B), as described above, the pre-reach effect is performed and reach is established, which progresses from normal reach to character SP reach, and following the contest effect during character SP reach, the capture success effect is performed. Immediately after that, a winning notification performance is performed along with the stop display of the first special symbol. Here, the winning success performance is a performance that functions as a jackpot notice as described above, but the winning performance is 5 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern A, after the fluctuating display of the first special symbol starts. It is different from the collision effect in that it is performed after a very long time of 31 seconds (5 seconds or more) has elapsed, whereas it is performed before the time has elapsed.

By the way, if the jackpot effect is not performed even after 5 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern L, has elapsed after the variable display of the second special symbol started, the player may feel a sense of anticipation for the appearance of the jackpot notice. It may gradually decrease. On the other hand, when variation pattern L is selected, 5 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and until 40 seconds, which is the variation time of variation pattern M, has elapsed. By performing a premium character performance as a jackpot preview, it is possible to make the player feel surprised and obtain a high performance effect.

In addition, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose" and variation pattern H (see Fig. 17(C)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, pre-reach performance, normal reach, character SP This differs from the case where variable pattern C is selected in that common effects such as a reach title display and a contest effect are executed, and a capture failure effect is performed instead of a capture success effect. That is, when comparing the case where variation pattern C is selected and the case where variation pattern H is selected, a common effect that is common to each other is executed, but when variation pattern C is selected, a common effect and The two are different in that both the jackpot notice (in this case, the winning success effect) are performed, whereas when variable pattern H is selected, the common effect is executed without the jackpot notice being executed. do.

Further, the hit performance in the normal game state is a performance that is configured to end within 5 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. For this reason, when variation pattern C with a variation time of 40 seconds is selected, even if it is a probability-variable jackpot, a jackpot effect will not be performed.

As illustrated in FIG. 30(C), when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot" and the variation pattern E is selected, the first special symbol is displayed in a variation manner in the variation pattern E. Along with this, a pre-reach performance (consisting of high-speed fluctuations and low-speed fluctuations), normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach are performed. Here, when compared with the performance executed when the variation pattern C is selected, they are common in that a pre-reach performance, a normal reach performance, a title display, and a contest performance are executed. On the other hand, performances that are not executed in the variation pattern C, such as a contest failure performance and SPSP reach, are performed.

In addition, FIG. 30(C) shows that a rainbow cut-in is executed in response to an operation for the operation promotion effect at the final stage of the SPSP reach, but when variation pattern A is selected, The time (2 seconds) from when the fluctuating display of the 1st special symbol starts until the jackpot notice (crash effect) is executed, and when the fluctuating display of the 1st special symbol starts when fluctuating pattern C is selected. The time (31 seconds) from when the jackpot notice is executed until the jackpot notice (capture success effect) is executed, and the time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol when variation pattern E is selected to the jackpot notice (rainbow cut-in) ) are different from each other in terms of the time required for execution (79 seconds (=40 seconds + 39 seconds)). Further, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the variation pattern E, a hit effect or a successful takeover effect is not performed.

Furthermore, as is clear from the comparison between the notation in FIG. 30(A) and the notation in FIG. 30(B), from the time when the hit effect is executed according to the selection of variation pattern A until the time when the hit notification effect is executed. The time (third time) is 3 seconds, whereas the time (fourth time) from when the capture success effect is executed until the winning notification effect is executed according to the selection of variation pattern C is 9 seconds. seconds, and the third time and fourth time are different from each other. Here, since the third time is shorter than the fourth time, it can be said that the hit performance is more effective in making the player feel that he has suddenly won a jackpot than the winning success performance.

Note that in this embodiment, a case will be described where the third time is shorter than the fourth time, but in other embodiments, the third time may be longer than the fourth time.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern A is selected, the hit effect is executed at the first execution timing immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the premier character production that can be executed when a variation pattern other than variation pattern A is selected is executed during the contest production for the character SP reach (see FIG. 22(A): an example of the second timing). This is different from the hit effect in that there are times when the effect is executed during the SPSP reach (see FIG. 22(B): an example of the third timing).

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform a jackpot effect in which the execution timing and number of executions are fixed, and a premium character effect in which the execution number and execution timing are variable, so that the jackpot notice becomes monotonous. can be suppressed to obtain high performance effects.

[About the execution timing of each production in the variable gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the execution timing of each performance in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. Here, FIG. 31 is a time chart showing a specific example of performance in a variable probability gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 31(A), when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "probable variable jackpot" and variation pattern L is selected, approximately Until one second has passed, the liquid crystal screen 5 undergoes a high-speed fluctuation in which the three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom at high speed, and along with this, a darkening effect (see FIG. 16(C)) is performed. It will be done. Then, following this blackout effect, the above-mentioned hit effect is executed for about 4 seconds, and as the second special symbol, one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3, comes to a final stop, a hit notification is issued to notify a probability-variable jackpot. A performance will be held.

In this way, when the variation pattern L with a variation time of 5 seconds (see FIG. 18(A)) is selected, an effect that notifies reach establishment that can be executed when another variation pattern is selected. , Battle Reach, etc. are not executed.

In addition, the hit effect in the variable probability game state is a special effect for the variable pattern L. Therefore, if another variation pattern such as variation pattern M is selected, the hit effect will not be executed. Conversely, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in variation pattern L, the jackpot notice that is executed when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in other variation patterns will not be executed. .

In addition, when the variation pattern L is selected, the collision effect may be started almost simultaneously with the start of the high-speed variation of the decorative symbols, without executing the blackout effect. In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the variation time is common between the variation pattern A selected in the normal gaming state and the variation pattern L selected in the variable probability gaming state. In embodiments, these variation times may be different. That is, the variation time of variation pattern A may be shorter than the variation time of variation pattern L, or the variation time of variation pattern A may be longer than the variation time of variation pattern L.

As illustrated in FIG. 31(B), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern M with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is selected, the fluctuation of the second special symbol A pre-reach performance is performed from the start of display until the reach is achieved. This pre-reach effect consists of a high-speed fluctuation that scrolls the three symbol rows from top to bottom at high speed, and a low-speed fluctuation that gradually reduces the scrolling speed of each symbol row and pseudo-stops the left and right symbols. The high-speed fluctuation that is the first half of the pre-reach performance is common to the high-speed fluctuation that is performed when fluctuation pattern L is selected.

As is clear from this, when variation pattern L is selected, a sudden collision effect occurs during the high-speed variation of the symbol row, which is the same as when other variation patterns are selected. do. For this reason, it is possible to give a great surprise to the player who had predicted that the scrolling speed would decrease and a reach effect would be achieved, thereby achieving a high performance effect.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 31(B), the pre-reach effect is performed as described above, the reach is established, the battle reach is started, and at the end of this battle reach, the operation promotion effect is performed, and the effect button 2 is pressed. A victory suggestion effect is executed in response to the operation (see FIG. 15). Here, as illustrated in FIG. 31(B), when the operation promotion performance is performed, a premium character performance may be performed as a jackpot notice, but the hit performance performed for the variable pattern L is , after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is performed before the 5 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern L, has elapsed. It differs from a surprise performance in that it takes place after a very long period of time has passed.

In addition, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "Probable Variable Jackpot" and variation pattern N (see Figure 18 (A)) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the pre-reach performance changes to the battle reach. This develops, and after the operation promotion performance is performed during this battle reach, a defeat hinting performance is performed, and after making it look like a loss, a revival performance is performed, and a victory hinting performance is performed. When the performance performed for this fluctuation pattern N is compared with the performance performed for the fluctuation pattern L, they are common in that high-speed fluctuations of three symbol rows are performed. On the other hand, the two differ in that in the variation of variation pattern N, battle reach, operation promotion production, defeat suggestion production, revival production, victory suggestion production, etc. are performed, which are not performed for variation pattern L. There is.

Further, the hit performance in the variable probability game state is a performance that is configured to end within 5 seconds from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the variation pattern N in which the variation time is 50 seconds is selected, although it is a probability variable jackpot, no jackpot effect is performed.

In addition, FIG. 31(C) shows that a one-shot announcement is made immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, but when fluctuation pattern L is selected, the fluctuation of the second special symbol The time (1 second) from when the display starts until the jackpot notice (hit effect) is executed, and the time (1 second) from when the variable display of the second special symbol starts to when the variable pattern M is selected. The time (30 seconds) from when the variable display of the second special symbol starts until the jackpot notice (one-shot notice) is executed when variation pattern N is selected (premier character performance) is executed. (here, approximately 0 seconds) are different from each other. Further, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the variable pattern N, no hit effect is performed.

[About the reliability of advance production]
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the pending icon. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a preliminary performance may be performed as a performance in which a special icon is displayed as a pending icon to suggest jackpot reliability. In the gaming machine 1, when the first special symbol determination is suspended, a preliminary determination process of whether or not to execute a jackpot game may be executed. Specifically, if the first special symbol determination is performed based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 11, it will be determined as a "jackpot". It is determined in advance whether or not. Also, based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the above-mentioned jackpot random number, which fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol that is variably displayed according to the execution of the first special symbol determination, etc. are also determined in advance. Then, based on these preliminary judgment results, it is decided whether or not to execute the preliminary effect, and if the preliminary effect is executed, what color to display the pending icon, etc. Preliminary performance is performed accordingly.

As illustrated in FIG. 32, a performance in which a normal icon is displayed as a pending icon without any preliminary performance is a performance that suggests that the jackpot reliability is 1%. On the other hand, when performing a preliminary effect, the pending icon may be displayed in blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow colors, but the jackpot reliability of the preliminary effect that displays the blue pending icon is approximately 5%. It is. Further, the reliability of a jackpot for the advance presentation that displays a green pending icon is about 10%, and the reliability of a jackpot for the preliminary presentation that displays a red pending icon is about 50%. Further, the reliability of a jackpot for the preliminary performance that displays a golden pending icon is about 75%, and the reliability of a jackpot for the preliminary performance that displays a rainbow-colored pending icon is 100%.

From these facts, first, it can be said that the preliminary effect of displaying the rainbow-colored pending icon has a function as a jackpot notice that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed. In other words, if the pending icon is displayed in a display color other than rainbow color, the advance effect will not function as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot game will be executed, but if the pending icon is displayed in a rainbow color, When displayed in color, the advance performance functions as a jackpot preview.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is executed, the prior determination result indicates that at least the variation pattern of the first special symbol that will result in the normal reach effect is selected. If it is not obtained, the preliminary effect of displaying a blue pending icon is not executed. That is, when a preliminary determination result indicating that a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to a no-reach performance is selected is obtained, the preliminary performance of displaying a blue pending icon is not performed.

The same applies to the preliminary effects that display Green Hold, Red Hold, Gold Hold, and Rainbow Hold, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol that will result in at least one of Character SP Reach and SPSP Reach being executed. A configuration is adopted in which a preliminary effect of displaying a green or higher pending icon is not performed unless a preliminary determination result indicating that the item is selected is obtained.

In addition, the jackpot notice that is given during the normal gaming state can be executed if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", but it cannot be executed if it is a "loss". do not have. For this reason, it can be said that the jackpot notice is more likely to be executed when this preliminary effect is performed than when the preliminary effect of displaying the pending icon in a color of blue or higher is not performed (it may always be performed). Therefore, by executing the advance production, the player is notified of the appearance of a jackpot notice in the relevant variation (variation display of the first special symbol performed in response to the execution of the pending first special symbol determination). You can effectively create expectations. In addition, when a preliminary performance is performed, other reliability-suggesting performances are likely to be executed in a performance mode with high reliability (expectation level of jackpot and expectation level of shifting to a definite variable gaming state in the case of a jackpot) (always reliable) ).

By the way, the hit performance performed during the normal gaming state will not be performed unless the variation pattern A in which the variation time during which the ready-to-win performance is not performed is 5 seconds is selected. For this reason, at least if a preliminary performance that is performed only when a normal reach performance is to be performed is performed, a hit performance will not be performed due to the fluctuation. Therefore, it can be said that the preliminary performance is a performance that negates the appearance of a sudden performance.

In other words, when a preliminary effect that displays a blue or higher pending icon is executed, the probability that another jackpot notice will be executed is higher than the probability that a jackpot effect will be executed (0% in this embodiment). I can say that.

Incidentally, if the white pending icon is displayed without any preliminary performance being performed, the player basically has little hope of winning the jackpot. However, in this embodiment, while there is a possibility that the collision effect will be executed if the preliminary effect is not performed, there is no possibility that the collision effect will be executed if the preliminary effect is performed, and other You can expect the appearance of a jackpot notice. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of a jackpot notice both in the case where the preliminary performance is not executed and when the preliminary performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the preliminary effect based on the preliminary judgment result is an icon change effect that displays the pending icon in a display mode different from the normal display mode, but the preliminary effect is based on the preliminary judgment result. Any other performance may be used as long as it is based on this. For example, the preliminary performance may be a chance performance that stops and displays a specific combination of decorative symbols called a so-called chance performance during a loss notification performance before the start of the variation. Further, the preliminary performance may be a mode transition performance that changes the performance mode from a normal performance mode to a specific performance mode (such as a zone) based on the preliminary determination result.

[About various screens displayed when waiting for customers]
FIG. 33 is a screen diagram illustrating a customer waiting menu screen. The gaming machine 1 shifts to a so-called customer waiting state when the variable display of symbols is no longer performed in a state where the right for special symbol determination is not reserved. Then, when a set time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after transitioning to the customer waiting state, a customer waiting menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 33(A)). As illustrated in FIG. 33(A), in this embodiment, this customer waiting menu screen includes an image suggesting that the occurrence rate of the jackpot notice can be selected by operating (pressing) the production button 26, and the production key 27. includes an image suggesting that the volume can be set by operating (pressing) the left or right key of the display key 27, and an image suggesting that the light intensity can be set by operating (pressing) the upper or lower key of the production key 27. It is configured as follows.

When the player operates the left key or right key of the production key 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, a volume setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33(B) is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33(B), the volume setting screen includes an image showing the current volume, an image showing that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left or right key of the production key 27, and the production button 26. The screen also includes an image indicating that the display of the volume setting screen will end when the volume setting screen is operated.

On the other hand, when the player operates the left key of the production key 27 while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume can be lowered, and conversely, when the player operates the right key, it is possible to increase the volume. . Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can switch the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24 in five levels, and FIG. The state set to is shown.

On the other hand, when the player operates the up key or down key of the production key 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, a light amount setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33(D) is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33(D), the light amount setting screen includes an image showing the current light amount, an image showing that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the up key or the down key of the effect key 27, and the effect button 26. The screen is configured with an image indicating that the display of the light amount setting screen will end when the button is operated.

On the other hand, when the player operates the upper key of the production key 27 with the light intensity setting screen displayed, it is possible to increase the light intensity, and conversely, when the player operates the lower key, it is possible to decrease the volume. . Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can switch the light intensity of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in three stages, and FIG. 33(D) shows one of the three light intensity levels. The state set to the second (minimum) is shown.

When the player operates the performance button 26 while the customer waiting menu screen (see FIG. 33(A)) is displayed, a jackpot notice occurrence rate setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33(C) is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33(C), the jackpot notice occurrence rate setting screen has two selection items (“Normal” and “Significant UP”) regarding the appearance rate of jackpot notices, and the left or right key of the performance key 27. It is composed of an image showing that the cursor can be moved to two selection items by operating the key, and an image showing that the selection regarding the occurrence rate of jackpot notice can be determined by operating the performance button 26.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be set to either a "normal mode" in which the occurrence rate of jackpot notices is relatively low, or a "jackpot notice up mode" in which the appearance rate of jackpot notices is relatively high.
FIG. 33(C) illustrates a state in which the cursor is positioned on "Normal" of the two selection items "Significant UP" and "Normal" and "Normal" is highlighted. . On the other hand, if the player operates the performance button 26 in this state, it will be determined that "normal" has been selected, and the "normal mode" will be set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in the sub-RAM 133 is updated to information indicating "normal mode."
On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 33(C), when the player operates the left key of the production key 27 with the cursor positioned at "Normal", the cursor moves to "Significant UP" and ""SignificantUP" will be highlighted. When the player operates the performance button 26 in this state, it is determined that "Significant UP" has been selected, and the "Jackpot Notice Up Mode" is set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in the sub-RAM 133 is updated to information indicating the "jackpot advance notice up mode."

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily change the appearance rate of the jackpot notice, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24, and the light intensity of the effect image displayed on the LCD screen 5. Is possible.

[About the appearance rate of jackpot notices]
Next, the appearance rate of jackpot notices will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. Here, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table used when the jackpot notice up mode is set.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can be set to the "normal mode" or the "jackpot notice up mode" regarding the appearance rate of the jackpot notice. When the "normal mode" is set, it is determined whether or not to execute each jackpot notice by referring to the above-mentioned jackpot notice type selection table based on FIGS. 29(A) to (D). On the other hand, when the "jackpot notice up mode" is set, each jackpot notice is executed by referring to the jackpot notice type selection table for the jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIGS. 34 (A) to (D). It is decided whether or not to do so.

The process of determining whether or not to execute each jackpot notice using each jackpot notice type selection table illustrated in FIG. 34 is performed by selecting each jackpot notice with reference to FIGS. Since this is the same as the process of determining whether or not to execute, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, when comparing the jackpot notice type selection table illustrated in FIG. 29 with the jackpot notice type selection table for the jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIG. The number of random numbers attached is different. Specifically, in the jackpot notice type selection table for each jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIG. 34, with respect to the jackpot notice type selection table illustrated in FIG. The number of random values that are associated with each other has doubled. Therefore, by setting the "jackpot notice up mode", the appearance rate of jackpot notices is approximately twice as high as when the "normal mode" is set.

In addition, here we have explained an example in which the appearance rate of jackpot predictions is doubled, but the degree to which the appearance rate of jackpot predictions is increased can be changed as appropriate. For example, the appearance rate of jackpot predictions can be increased by 10 times. It is also possible to prepare a table for a jackpot advance notice mode. In addition, here, the case where the appearance rate of each jackpot preview is uniformly doubled is explained as an example, but in other embodiments, for example, while the appearance rate of the premier character performance is increased by 5 times, The rate at which the appearance rate increases may be varied depending on the type of preview performance, such as increasing the appearance rate of the announcement by ten times.

By the way, as is clear from the above explanation based on FIGS. 17 and 18, the winning performance and winning success performance performed during the normal gaming state, and the winning performance performed during the variable probability gaming state, are based on the jackpot notice type. Whether or not to execute is determined without using a selection table. The variable effect pattern table (which associates the variable patterns of special symbols with the variable effect patterns) stored in the sub ROM 132, which is used to determine whether or not to execute these jackpot notices, is as follows: Even if it is set to ``Jackpot Notification Up Mode'', you will not be able to switch to another table. For this reason, even if the "jackpot notification up mode" is set for the jackpot effect and the winning success effect that are performed during the normal gaming state, and the jackpot performance that is performed during the variable probability gaming state, other jackpot effects will be affected. The appearance rate will not change as predicted.

[Example of configuration of main RAM 103]
FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 35(A), the main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for storing acquired information etc. acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. storage area 1030, first reserved storage area 1031, second reserved storage area 1032, third reserved storage area 1033, fourth reserved storage area 1034, first reserved storage area 1035, second reserved storage area 1036, third reserved storage area A storage area 1037 and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area in which various information used for special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas in which various information related to the first special symbol determination are stored, and the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are This is a storage area where various information related to special symbol determination is stored. Further, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. For this reason, when the special symbol determination is executed, various information stored in the first pending storage area 1035 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the second special symbol determination is suspended, and the first When only the special symbol determination is pending, various information stored in the first pending storage area 1031 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 35(B), the pending storage areas 1031 to 1038 are an area for storing jackpot random numbers, an area for storing symbol random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, and an area for storing random numbers obtained by the main CPU 101, respectively. It includes an area for storing fluctuating pattern random numbers, an area for storing preliminary determination information that is information indicating a preliminary determination result, and the like. That is, the reservation storage areas 1031 to 1038 are areas for storing information for reserving the right to judge special symbols.

The jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that it is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a reach effect or a reach-less effect when it is determined that the game is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The preliminary determination information is information obtained by a preliminary determination process (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number. Specifically, the preliminary judgment information includes winning starting opening information, information indicating whether the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, information indicating what type of jackpot it is, It includes information indicating a variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning starting opening information is acquired when the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number stored in the same reserved storage area are triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 11. This is information indicating whether the game ball was acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting slot 12. The preliminary determination information including these pieces of information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number used in the preliminary determination process.

The five pieces of information explained based on FIG. 35(B) are stored in the first reservation storage area 1031 to the fourth reservation storage area 1034 in order from the first reservation storage area 1031 every time a game ball enters the first starting port 11. Each time a game ball enters the second starting port 12, it is stored in any one of the first reservation storage area 1035 to the fourth reservation storage area 1038 in order from the first reservation storage area 1035.

For example, if five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired with no information stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, these five pieces of information are It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031. Further, for example, if five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired with five pieces of information stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, these five pieces of information is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

Further, when the information stored in the first reservation storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is executed, the information stored in the reservation storage area after the second reservation storage area 1032 is stored in the reservation storage area after the second reservation storage area 1032. The information is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 side. For example, when information stored in the first pending storage area 1031 to third pending storage area 1033 is shifted to the judgment storage area 1030, the second The information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the first reservation storage area 1035 to the fourth reservation storage area 1038 where information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, that is, the information is stored in both the first suspension storage area 1031 and the first suspension storage area 1035. If stored, the shift processing in the first pending storage area 1035 to the fourth pending storage area 1038 is performed with priority before the shift processing in the first pending storage area 1031 to the fourth pending storage area 1034.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 and various random numbers are obtained when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or during a jackpot game, the special symbol determination and the special symbol Fluctuation display cannot be performed immediately.

Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired various random numbers, etc. in the reservation storage area 1031 as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols, as described above. It is assumed that the data will be stored in one of the areas from 1038 to 1038. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not pending, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 generates various random numbers etc. obtained in response to the start-up winning. It is assumed that the information is directly stored in the determination storage area 1030.

In this manner, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can withhold the right to make a special symbol determination when the special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100 will be described. Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 36 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. . In addition, the processing of the game control board 100 explained based on the flowchart after FIG. 36 is performed according to the command issued by the main CPU 101 based on the program stored in the main ROM 102.

First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number update process to update various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a fluctuation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1).

The jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are as described above, and the normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 12. The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for processing step S1, and after each random number reaches a preset maximum value, it is returned to "0" and updated.

Following the processing in step S1, the main CPU 101 executes switch processing including processing to obtain various random numbers in response to input of detection signals from each switch (step S2). This switch processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 37.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying a special symbol indicating , etc. is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 41.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 executes normal symbol determination, including processing to cause the normal symbol display 45 to fluctuately display the normal symbol, and then stop and display the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs an electric tulip process in which the electric tulip 17 is operated via the electric tulip control unit 113 when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened as a result of normal symbol determination. (Step S5).

Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 101 executes a big winning opening control process that controls the big winning opening control unit 117 to open the big winning opening 13 when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the process of step S3. Execute (step S6).

Following the process of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process to control the payout of prize balls according to winning of game balls (step S7).

Following the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 the various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the processing steps before step S7 and information necessary for determining the effect contents. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the switch processing in step S2 of FIG. 36. Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the first starting port switch 111, as illustrated in FIG. For random numbers (jacket random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers), first starting port switch processing including processing to obtain the value at the time when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input is executed. (Step S21). This first starting port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 38.

Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the second starting port switch 112, and determines whether the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is detected with respect to various random numbers updated as appropriate through the process of step S1. Second starting port switch processing including processing to obtain the value at the time of input is executed (step S22). This second starting port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 39.

Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first gate switch 114 (or the second gate switch 115), and determines whether the first gate switch 114 (or the second gate switch 115) is executed (step S23).

[First starting port switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the first starting port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 37. As illustrated in FIG. 38, following the random number update process in step S1, the main CPU 101 receives a detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 (specifically, when the first starting port switch 111 is turned "ON"). It is determined whether the first starting port switch 111 has been turned "ON" based on whether or not the ON signal (indicating that the engine has turned on) has been input (step S210). Here, if it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 is turned "ON" (step S210: YES), the pending number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is less than Umax1 ("4" in this embodiment) (step S211).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1 (step S211: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S212), and displays the first special symbol. As acquired information used for determination, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S213 to S216).

In this way, various types of acquisition information such as a jackpot random number are acquired in accordance with the establishment of the acquisition condition that the first starting port switch 111 is turned "ON" when the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1.
In addition, if various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the first special symbol fluctuation display can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030, and in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the first special symbol fluctuation display cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained, these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

Following the process in step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current state is a high base state (step S217). A time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 103. This time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when controlling the electric tulip 17 to a state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12, and conversely, it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12. This is a flag that is set to "ON" when controlling the electric tulip 17 in the state. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current state is a high base state based on whether the time-saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON".

If the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not a high base state (step S217: NO), that is, if the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF", it executes a preliminary determination process (step S218). Specifically, prior to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 42) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 43), which will be described later, it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the acquired information obtained through the processes of steps S213 to S216. At the same time, a preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is executed. This preliminary determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 40.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S218, or when it is determined that the base state is high (the time saving game flag is set to "ON") (step S217: YES), the main CPU 101 performs the first special symbol determination. The pending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This suspension command is a command to notify that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S218, and is sent to the production control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. sent to.

[Second starting port switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the second starting port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 39, following the first starting port switch processing in step S21, the main CPU 101 receives a detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 (specifically, the second starting port switch 112 is turned ON). It is determined whether the second starting port switch 112 has been turned on (step S220).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting port switch 112 is turned "ON" (step S220: YES), the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is less than Umax2 (“4” in this embodiment) (step S221).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U2 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax2 (step S221: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S222), and displays the second special symbol. As acquired information used for determination, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S223 to S226).

In addition, if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030, and in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained, these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038.

Following the process in step S226, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current state is the high base state (step S227), similarly to the process in step S217. Here, if it is determined that the current state is a high base state (step S227: YES), that is, if the time saving game flag is set to "ON", a preliminary determination process is executed (step S228). This preliminary determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 40.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S228, or when it is determined that the high base state is not (the time saving game flag is set to "OFF") (step S227: NO), the main CPU 101 performs the second special symbol determination. The pending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S229). This suspension command is a command to notify that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S228, and is sent to the production control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. sent to.

[Pre-determination processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the preliminary determination process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS. 38 and 39.

If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in a high base state in the process of step S217 in FIG. 38, or if it determines that it is in a high base state in the process of step S227 in FIG. ). Specifically, when the probability state is low (in this embodiment, the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state), the low probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6(A)) is read from the main ROM 102 and stored in the main RAM 103. Set to . On the other hand, when the game is in a high probability state (in this embodiment, a variable probability gaming state), a high probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6(A)) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot random number obtained in the process of step S213 in FIG. 38 (or the process in step S223 in FIG. 39) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 103. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined that there is a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of step S2181 (step S2182). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot at the start of the variation (step S2182: YES), the jackpot variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183). In addition, when executing the preliminary determination process related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state, tables illustrated in FIGS. 17(A) and 17(B) are set. Further, when executing the preliminary determination process related to the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state, the tables illustrated in FIGS. 18(A) and 18(B) are set.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no jackpot at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a reach effect is performed during the fluctuation (step S2184). Specifically, based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether a reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the ready-to-win effect will be performed (step S2184: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the ready-to-reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2185). For example, when performing preliminary determination regarding the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state, a table illustrated in FIG. 17(C) is set.

By the way, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose" and the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, the first special symbol will be changed based on the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination at the start of the fluctuation. The variation pattern of is determined. The number of pending first special symbol determinations may be different before and after the suspended first special symbol determinations are completed. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is completed may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually resolved. be. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, it may not be possible to obtain an accurate special symbol fluctuation pattern prior to the first special symbol determination.

Therefore, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the process proceeds to step S2187 without performing the fluctuation pattern random number determination process of step S2186, which will be described later.

After setting the jackpot variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern random number determination process (step S2186). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern random number obtained at the time of winning the starting opening together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2181 is one of the random numbers specified in the fluctuation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. Based on which random number value matches, a variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected in the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2186 or determines that the ready-to-win effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the main CPU 101 generates preliminary determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187). The area where this preliminary determination information is stored is as described above based on FIG. 35.

In this way, the main CPU 101 determines the jackpot based on the obtained information, such as the jackpot random number, which is obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 (or the second starting hole 12). Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, variation time) of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is acquired.

In addition, here, we have explained the preliminary judgment process that is carried out when the right to judge the first special symbol is reserved, but the same preliminary judgment process is also carried out when the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved. Determination processing is performed. Further, if the right to judge a special symbol is immediately executed without being reserved, the preliminary judgment process is not performed.

In this manner, the main CPU 101 can perform a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game before special symbol determination is performed on the reserved rights.

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 36.

As illustrated in FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played based on whether the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game, and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

When determining that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations U2 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S303: YES), the number of reservations U2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U2 is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S303: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is equal to or greater than "1". (Step S305). Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations U1 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of reservations U1 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

Following the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). When executing the shift process in step S308 following the process in step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the first pending storage area 1035 for second special symbol determination. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030. In addition, when performing the shift process following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 for the first special symbol determination is transferred to the determination storage area 1030. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

Following the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 42.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 41, when the starting conditions such as not being in a jackpot game or changing symbols are established, the main CPU 101, in this step S309, based on the jackpot random number etc. acquired at the time of winning the starting opening, It is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process to select a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S310). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 43.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S309, this special symbol setting information, is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command is set in the main RAM 103, including information indicating whether the game is related to the above, setting information of the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S310, information regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, etc. (step S311).

This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns on the liquid crystal display device 5 is started.

Following the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the process of step S311 (step S312). At that time, if the processing from step S309 to step S311 is performed with the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 1030, the first special symbol display 41 The variable display of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, if the processing from step S309 to step S311 is performed in a state where the acquired information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the second special symbol display 42 displays a variable display of the second special symbol. Start.

Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 selects a symbol selected by the process of step S310 from the start of measuring the variation time in step S313. It is determined whether the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the variable time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. A symbol confirmation command is set in the main RAM 103 to notify that this is the case (step S316). This symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a process is performed in which the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the determination result of the special symbol determination.

Following the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbols started in the process of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) set in the process of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device that has been variably displaying the special symbol. Note that this stop display of the special symbol continues until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 101 causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process on the first special symbol display 41. Or the second special symbol display 42 is made to stop display.

Following the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the fluctuation time that was started to be measured in the process of step S313 (step S318), and executes the stopping process including the process of starting the jackpot game if it is a jackpot. Execute (step S319). This stopping process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 44.

[Jackpot determination processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 41. The main CPU 101 executes jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S3091). Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether the jackpot random number stored in the judgment storage area 1030 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6(A)). judge.

The winning value here is the jackpot winning value defined in the jackpot random number table for high probability times or the jackpot random number table for low probability times. When a jackpot determination is executed in a high probability state (in this embodiment, a variable probability gaming state), the winning value stored in the high probability jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when a jackpot determination is executed in a low probability state (in this embodiment, a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state), the winning value stored in the low probability jackpot random number table is used.

In this way, the main CPU 101 performs a startup process in which acquired information such as a jackpot random number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 is stored in the determination storage area 1030. When the conditions are met, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the process of step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step S3092). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3092: YES), the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIGS. 6(B) and (C)) stored in the main ROM 102. Determine (step S3093).

Specifically, if the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3091 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , the type of jackpot is determined based on which random number matches the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(B)). On the other hand, if it is related to the second special symbol determination, the random number of the symbol matches any random number specified in the second starting opening winning symbol determination table (see Figure 6(C)). Determine the type of jackpot based on.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets setting information of jackpot symbols corresponding to the determined type of jackpot in the main RAM 103 (step S3094). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here during the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and a jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol is played. You will be killed.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3092: NO), it sets the setting information of the losing symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3095). As a result, the losing symbol set here during the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, no jackpot game is played.

[Variation pattern selection processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether the determination result in step S3091 is a jackpot (step S3101). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3101: YES), the jackpot variation pattern table (see FIGS. 17 and 18) is read out from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3101: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a jackpot (step S3103). Here, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach effect is to be performed (step S3103: YES), the ready-to-reach variation pattern table (see FIG. 17(C)) is read out from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). Conversely, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect is not to be performed (step S3103: NO), the losing variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the processing of step S3102, step S3104, or step S3105, and executes a variation pattern random number determination process (step S3106). Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is changed to the set variation pattern. A variation pattern is selected by reading from the pattern table.

In addition, when the losing variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the number of pending special symbol determinations is specified based on the number of pending storage areas in which various information was stored immediately before the shift process in step S308 was performed. , the fluctuation pattern is selected by reading out the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of reservations and the presence or absence of the current time saving from the fluctuation pattern table for loss.

By selecting the special symbol variation pattern in this way, the special symbol variation time is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 101 selects a variation pattern, the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 103 (step S3107). This fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the production control board 130 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process in step S309 described above.

[Stopped processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the stopping process in step S319 of FIG. 41. After resetting the fluctuation time through the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, as illustrated in FIG. S3191). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3191: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3192).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game flag and the variable probability game flag stored in the main RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S3193). Here, the time-saving game flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is a time-saving state where the electric chew support function is given, and the probability-changing game flag is a flag that indicates the relative probability of being judged as a jackpot in special symbol judgment. This is a flag indicating whether or not the state is in a high probability state.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the time-saving game flag and the variable probability game flag. That is, when controlling the gaming state to a variable probability gaming state, both the variable probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are set to "ON", and when controlling the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state, the variable probability game flag is set to "OFF". is set, and the time-saving game flag is set to "ON", and when controlling the gaming state to the normal gaming state, both the probability variable game flag and the time-saving game flag are set to "OFF".

Following the process of step S3193, the main CPU 101 sets an opening command in the main RAM 103 to notify that the jackpot game is started (step S3194). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the jackpot 13 during the jackpot game, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3191: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3196). Here, if it is determined that the time-saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3196: YES), the remaining number of time-saving games J stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3197). This time-saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3197, the main CPU 101 determines whether the remaining number of time saving games J is "0" (step S3198). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of time saving games J is "0" (step S3198: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3199). As a result, the electric chew support function will no longer be provided.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3199, when it determines that the time-saving game flag is not "ON" (step S3196: NO), or when it determines that the remaining time-saving game number J is not "0" ( Step S3198: NO), it is determined whether the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3201).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3201: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the remaining number of high probability games K stored in the main RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting "1". (Step S3202). This high probability game remaining number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high probability state.

Following the process of step S3202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3203). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3203: YES), the variable probability game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3204). As a result, special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

When the process of step S3204 is performed, if it is determined that the variable probability game flag is not "ON" (step S3201: NO), or if it is determined that the remaining number of high probability games K is not "0" ( Step S3203: NO) or when the process of step S3194 is performed, the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

[Game state setting processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of a game state setting process executed in the game control board 100 at the end of the jackpot game. In the gaming machine 1, a jackpot game is executed by the jackpot opening control process in step S6, but when the ending of this jackpot game ends, a gaming state setting process is performed to set the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the jackpot game ends. is executed.

When the ending of the jackpot game ends, the main CPU 101 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the current jackpot game is a probability-variable jackpot based on the symbol setting information stored in the main RAM 103 (step S6261). Here, if it is determined that it is not a probability variable jackpot (step S6261: NO), the process proceeds to step S6266, which will be described later.

If the main CPU 101 determines that it is a variable probability jackpot (step S6261: YES), it sets the variable probability game flag to "ON" (step S6262), and sets the remaining number of high probability games K to, for example, "10000" (step S6261: YES). S6263). By performing the process of step S6263, the high probability state will essentially continue until the next jackpot.

Following the process of step S6263, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game flag to "ON" (step S6264), and sets the remaining time-saving game number J to "10000" (step S6265). By performing a series of processes from step S6262 to step S6265 in this manner, the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot.

If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a probability-variable jackpot (step S6261: NO), it sets the time-saving game flag to "ON" (step S6266), and sets the remaining time-saving game number J to "50" (step S6267). .

By performing a series of processes in steps S6266 and S6267 in this manner, if a jackpot does not occur during the jackpot game, the game will continue in the time-saving gaming state until 50 special symbol determinations are made. It will be controlled.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 131 of the production control board 130 sets a CTC cycle which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, the sub CPU 131 repeats a random number update process for updating performance random numbers and the like used to determine the content of the performance at a predetermined cycle shorter than the CTC cycle. That is, while the gaming machine 1 is activated, the sub CPU 131 repeats the random number update process at a predetermined cycle and repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 46, the timer interrupt process executed in the production control board 130 will be described. Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the production control board 130. Similar to the timer interrupt process performed by the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 46 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In addition, the process performed by the effect control board 130 explained based on the flowchart after FIG. 46 is performed according to the command issued by the sub CPU131 based on the program memorize|stored in the sub ROM132.

The sub CPU 131 first executes a command reception process including a process of performing a process according to the command when the command is received from the game control board 100 (step S10). This command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 47.

Following the process in step S10, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S30). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the process in step S10 is transmitted to the image-acoustic control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). By executing this command transmission process, the image and sound control board 140 is instructed to perform effects such as image display and audio output, and the lamp control board 150 is instructed to perform effects such as lighting various lamps. be instructed.

Then, the sub CPU 131 executes data transfer processing (step S50). Specifically, since data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the lamp control board 150 controls the performance by the performance media such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the performance accessory 7, and the performance button 26 so as to be synchronized with the performance being performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. be done.

[Command reception processing by production control board 130]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 47, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11). Here, if it is determined that no command has been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that a command from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11: YES), the sub CPU 131 controls the game according to the process in step S219 (see FIG. 38) or step S229 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether it is a pending command transmitted from the board 100 (step S12). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S14, which will be described later.

If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), it executes pending command reception processing (step S13). This pending command receiving process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 48.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is a fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S311 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether there is one (step S14). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S18, which will be described later.

If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes fluctuation start command reception processing (step S15). This fluctuation start command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 49.

If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S14: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S316 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether or not (step S18). If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a symbol confirmation command (step S18: YES), it ends the display of the decorative symbol fluctuation and stops displaying the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol fluctuation. A variable effect end command that instructs execution of the process is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S19).

By transmitting this variation production end command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 through the process of step S30, the special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is Along with being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), a decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It will stop being displayed.

If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a symbol confirmation command (step S18: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether the command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S21). This operation command is a command sent from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the production button 26 or the production key 27. This information includes information indicating whether it is the production button 26 or the production key 27, and information indicating which key was operated when the production key 27 was operated. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the operation command has been received (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an operation notification command in the sub RAM 133M (step S22). By transmitting this operation command to the image-acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, processing for realizing a production according to the operation of the production button 26 or the production key 27, settings based on these operations, etc. is executed. It will be done.

If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not an operation command (step S21: NO), it executes other processing (step S23).

[Pending command reception processing by production control board 130]
FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the pending command reception process in step 13 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 48, the sub CPU 131 adds "1" to the number of pending special symbol determinations stored in the sub RAM 133. The value is updated to the value (step S130). Specifically, when a suspension command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and a suspension command related to the second special symbol determination is received. In this case, the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received hold command includes advance determination information (step S131), and if it is determined that the advance determination information is not included (step S131: NO). , sets an icon display command (step S132).

This icon display command is a command for instructing the display of a pending icon indicating that the special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process in step S30. This icon display command includes winning start opening information, and the supervising CPU 141 of the image and sound control board 140 determines which special symbol determination, the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, has been suspended, for example. It is specified based on the winning start opening information, and a pending icon is displayed in the corresponding display area (first pending icon display area 51 if the first special symbol determination is pending).

Note that if the received hold command does not include advance determination information, it is not possible to perform advance performance based on the above-described preliminary determination result. Therefore, when the process in step S132 is performed following the process in step S131, an icon display command that does not include advance determination information is set, and a normal icon is displayed as a pending icon accordingly. become.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received pending command includes the preliminary determination information (step S131: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the preliminary determination information in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 133 (step S133).

Next, the sub CPU 131 executes a preliminary effect lottery (step S134). Specifically, first, a pre-effect random number is obtained and stored in the sub-RAM 133. This pre-effect random number is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the pre-effect random number, and the pre-effect random number is It is determined whether or not to execute the preliminary effect based on whether or not it matches any of the random numbers related to the preliminary effect random numbers stored in the ROM 132.

Although not shown in the figure, the random value related to the suspension of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub ROM 132 has the following characteristics. In other words, more random numbers are associated with a combination for which the first special symbol determination result is a "jackpot" than for a combination for which the first special symbol determination result is a "loss". There is. In addition, more random values are associated with a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the first special symbol has a relatively long fluctuation time than a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the first special symbol has a relatively short fluctuation time. It is being Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the preliminary performance, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the preliminary performance.

Based on the lottery result in step S134, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to perform a preliminary performance (step S135), and when determining to perform a preliminary performance (step S135: YES), performs a performance using random numbers, for example. A lottery is carried out to select one of the plurality of pre-performance presentation patterns, and the selected preliminary presentation pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S136).

In addition, here, we have explained the case where the lottery to decide whether to execute the pre-production and the lottery to select the production pattern for the pre-production are separate lottery, , in the case of execution, the performance pattern to be used for the preliminary performance may be determined in a single lottery.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S136, it sets an icon display command in the sub RAM 133 (step S132). In this way, by executing the process of step S132 subsequent to the process of step S136, an icon display command including information indicating a preliminary effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133. Then, by transmitting this icon display command to the image-acoustic control board 140, the preliminary effect is realized.

[Variation start command reception process by production control board 130]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. 47. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is a fluctuation start command (step S14: YES), it executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 49.

That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires the value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command from the game control board 100 regarding the performance random number that is updated as appropriate by the random number update process described above, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S150). Then, the received variation start command is analyzed (step S151).

As mentioned above, the fluctuation start command includes symbol setting information indicating the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process, and whether this symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol judgment or whether it is related to the second special symbol judgment. It includes winning start opening information indicating whether the game is a game, setting information on a variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is. In addition, by identifying whether the fluctuation pattern is a losing fluctuation pattern based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform a reach performance or a no-reach performance. . Also, based on the setting information of the variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

After analyzing the variation start command, the sub CPU 131 determines whether the received variation start command is a variation start command related to a "jackpot" based on the analysis result (step S152). Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation start command is not related to a "jackpot", the process proceeds to step S154, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received variation start command is a variation start command related to a "jackpot" (step S152: YES), it executes a jackpot notice performance pattern setting process (step S153). This jackpot notice effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 50.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153, or when it is determined that the received fluctuation start command is not a fluctuation start command related to a "jackpot" (step S152: NO), the sub CPU 131 displays the liquid crystal display along with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. A variable effect pattern setting process for setting a variable effect effect pattern to be performed on screen 5 is executed (step S154). By executing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of decorative symbols, presence or absence of reach effect, types of decorative symbols that make up the reach effect, types and contents of reach effect, types of decorative symbols to be displayed in a stopped manner, etc. is determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 51.

Following the process of step S154, the sub CPU 131 executes a reliability-suggesting performance pattern setting process that sets a performance pattern of a reliability-suggesting performance that suggests jackpot reliability, such as a step-up performance and a dialogue preview (step S155). This reliability suggestion performance pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 52.

Next, the sub CPU 131 starts a variable effect that instructs to start a variable effect using the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S154, and to execute a reliability suggestion effect using the reliability suggestive effect pattern set in the process of step S155. The command is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S157).

This variable effect start command includes at least information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the process of step S154 and information indicating the reliability suggestion effect pattern set by the process of step S155, and includes information indicating the reliability suggestive effect pattern set by the process of step S155. The command is sent to the image-acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 through the command sending process. Thereby, the variable performance and the reliability suggestion performance for which the performance pattern is determined by the performance control board 130 are realized by the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

In addition, when the setting information related to the jackpot notice is set in the sub-RAM 133 by the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process described later, a variable effect start command including this setting information is sent to the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. Sent. As a result, the jackpot notice set by the sub CPU 131 is realized.

Following the process in step S157, the sub CPU 131 subtracts "1" from the number of reservations stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S158). Specifically, when the variation start command received from the game control board 100 is a command related to the first special symbol determination, the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1". On the other hand, when the received variation start command is a command related to the second special symbol determination, the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1".

[Jackpot preview performance pattern setting process by performance control board 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot preview performance pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. 49. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received variation start command is a variation start command related to a "jackpot" (step S152: YES), the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot notice random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133, as illustrated in FIG. The information is stored (step S1530). The jackpot notice random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot notice, and is incremented by "1" every time the random number update process described above is performed. The sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when it is determined that the fluctuation start command related to the jackpot has been received as a jackpot notice random number, and stores it in the sub RAM 133.

Next, the sub CPU 131 reads out the jackpot notice type selection table corresponding to the gaming state and variation pattern from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1531). As mentioned above, the received fluctuation start command includes symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, and whether this symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. It includes winning start opening information indicating whether the game is a special symbol, setting information for a variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The sub CPU 131 executes the following processing based on this information included in the variation start command.

That is, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is variation pattern B, the sub CPU 131 selects the first jackpot notice type from the sub ROM 132. The table (see FIG. 29(A)) is read and set in the sub-RAM 133.

Further, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is variation pattern C, the sub CPU 131 selects a second jackpot notice type from the sub ROM 132. The table (see FIG. 29(B)) is read and set in the sub-RAM 133.

In addition, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" and that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is variation pattern D (or variation pattern E), The third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)) is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133.

Further, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is variation pattern M (or variation pattern N), The fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(D)) is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133.

The above is the process when the normal mode is set, and when the jackpot notice up mode is set, one of the four selection tables for the jackpot notice up mode described above based on FIG. One selection table is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133.

Following the process of step S1531, the sub CPU 131 executes a jackpot preview effect type selection process (step S1532). This jackpot notice production type selection process reads the jackpot notice type corresponding to the jackpot notice random number obtained in step S1530 from the selection table set in step S1531, and determines whether to execute each jackpot notice. This is a process of determining which jackpot notice is to be executed when a jackpot notice is to be executed. Since this jackpot preview presentation type selection process is as described above based on FIG. 29 and the like, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

Next, based on the processing result of step S1532, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute a jackpot notice (step S1533). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot notice will not be executed (step S1533: NO), that is, if the jackpot notice types read from the set selection table are all equivalent to no jackpot notice, a series of jackpot notices will be executed. After the advance notice effect pattern setting process is completed, the process proceeds to the variable effect pattern setting process of step S154.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines to execute a jackpot notice (step S1533), it determines whether the jackpot notice can be executed multiple times within the same variation (step S1534). Specifically, information indicating the maximum number of times that each jackpot notice can be executed within the same variation is stored in the sub ROM 132, and the sub CPU 131 refers to the above information regarding the jackpot notice decided to be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not it can be executed multiple times within the same variation. Note that if it is determined that multiple types of jackpot notices are to be executed, the determination process of step S1534 is performed for each of these jackpot notices.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot notice decided to be executed can be executed multiple times within the same fluctuation (step S1534: YES), the sub CPU 131 selects the number of execution times and execution timing (step S1535). Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot prediction that can be executed at the first execution timing and the second execution timing within the same fluctuation, there is a first pattern in which the jackpot prediction is executed only at the first execution timing, and a second pattern in which the jackpot prediction is executed only at the first execution timing. A random number value is previously associated with each of a second pattern in which a jackpot notice is executed only at the timing and a third pattern in which a jackpot notice is executed at both the first execution timing and the second execution timing. Then, a random number for selecting one of the first to third patterns is obtained, and the number of execution times and execution timing of the jackpot prediction are selected based on which pattern the obtained random number corresponds to. . For example, when a random number corresponding to the first pattern is acquired, the number of executions is one and the first execution timing is selected. Further, for example, when a random number corresponding to the third pattern is acquired, the number of executions is two, and both the first execution timing and the second timing are selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot notice that can be executed three or more times within the same variation is also prepared, but the number of execution times and execution timing are selected in the same manner for this jackpot notice as well.

If the sub CPU 131 executes the process in step S1535, or if it determines that the jackpot notice decided to be executed cannot be executed multiple times within the same fluctuation (step S1534: NO), the sub CPU 131 selects the jackpot notice type in step S1532. Information indicating the result of the processing is set in the sub-RAM 133 as setting information for the jackpot preview performance (step S1536). In addition, when the process of step S1535 is executed prior to the process of step S1536, setting information of the jackpot preview performance that further includes information indicating the selection result of the number of executions and the execution timing is set.

This jackpot notice setting information is included in the variable performance start command and is transmitted to the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process in step S30. Thereby, a jackpot notice corresponding to the jackpot notice setting information is realized by the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Variable performance pattern setting process by performance control board 130]
FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. 49. When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153 or determines that the received fluctuation start command is not a fluctuation start command related to a "jackpot" (step S152: NO), the sub CPU 131 finally displays a stop display on the liquid crystal screen 5. A decorative pattern to cause (main stop) is set (step S1540).

Specifically, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, it is determined whether a special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed at the end of symbol variation, or whether a special symbol indicating a loss is displayed. Specify whether the symbol is statically displayed, and if a special symbol indicating a jackpot is statically displayed, determine whether the special symbol is a jackpot symbol related to a guaranteed variable jackpot or a jackpot symbol related to a normal jackpot. Identify. Then, when it is specified that a jackpot symbol indicating a probability-variable jackpot is to be displayed in a stopped state, a decorative symbol for notifying a probability-variable jackpot is set. In addition, in this embodiment, a 16R probability variable jackpot and a 6R probability variable jackpot are prepared as probability variable jackpots related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6(B)). Therefore, when the jackpot symbol X1 corresponding to the 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol "777" is set, and when the jackpot symbol X2 corresponding to the 6R probability variation is stopped and displayed, "777" is set. Set a decorative pattern other than In addition, when the jackpot symbol X3 corresponding to 6R normal is displayed in a stopped state, a decorative symbol indicating a double of an odd number symbol is set. The same applies to the case where a jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is notified. On the other hand, if it is specified that a special symbol indicating a loss is to be displayed in a stopped state, a decorative symbol for notifying the loss is set. The decorative pattern for notifying this loss is a winning number or a winning number.

Following the process of step S1540, the sub CPU 131 reads out a variable effect pattern selection table from the sub ROM 132 for selecting a variable effect pattern of a variable effect including a variable display of decorative symbols, and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1541). . In addition, the sub ROM 132 stores a variable effect pattern selection table for jackpots and a variable effect pattern for losses, and when a variable start command related to a jackpot is received, the variable effect pattern selection table for jackpots is stored. is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133, and when a variation start command related to a loss is received, a variation effect pattern selection table for a loss is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets a variable effect pattern (step S1542). Specifically, a variable effect pattern selection table is prepared for each variable pattern of special symbols. When a fluctuation start command including setting information indicating a fluctuation pattern A related to a probability variable jackpot as illustrated in FIG. Set the production pattern selection table. In the variable effect pattern selection table for variable effect patterns A, four types of variable effect patterns A are defined, and different effect random numbers are associated with each variable effect pattern A.

Here, the first variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern A in which a collision performance is performed after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in each row in the order of left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The second variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern A in which a collision performance is performed after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in each row in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol. The third variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern A in which a collision performance is performed after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in each row in the order of right symbol, middle symbol, and left symbol. The fourth variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern A in which variable display of three rows of decorative symbols is started at the same time and then a collision performance is performed.

The sub CPU 131 reads the variation effect pattern of 1 corresponding to the effect random number obtained in the process of step S150 from the variation effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 133, and sets the information in the sub RAM 133. Set the performance pattern.

It should be noted that a plurality of variable effect patterns are prepared for each of the variable effect patterns corresponding to the variable patterns other than the variable effect pattern A, and one variable effect pattern is set in the same manner as the above-mentioned variable effect pattern A. .

In addition, in the process of setting a variable effect pattern in step S1542, when performing a reach effect, which symbol is used to establish a reach, which decorative symbol is used as a reach symbol during a normal reach, during a character SP reach, or during a SPSP reach, a pseudo stop is determined. Whether or not to do so is also decided at the same time. According to this process, when a 7-symbol reach is established in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively high, although the jackpot reliability is not 100%. On the other hand, if the 7 symbol reach is achieved in the variable probability gaming state, the 16R probability variation becomes strong at that point, and the 7 symbol reach functions as a jackpot notice.

[Reliability suggestion performance pattern setting process by performance control board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the reliability suggestion performance pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. 49. Following the process of step S154 in FIG. 49, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not there is a setting for a jackpot preview using reliability suggestion performance, as illustrated in FIG. 52 (step S1550). Specifically, when the setting information of the jackpot preview is set in the sub-RAM 133 according to the process of step S1536 (see FIG. 50), the setting information related to the jackpot preview using the reliability suggestion effect is added to the setting information. Determine whether it is included. For example, reliability suggesting effects such as a title display, a text display, and a cut-in may function as a jackpot notice by being executed as a rainbow-colored title display, a rainbow-colored character display, and a rainbow-colored cut-in, respectively. Therefore, if the setting information of the jackpot preview includes setting information such as rainbow color title display, rainbow color character display, rainbow color cut-in, etc., it is determined as "YES" in the process of step S1550.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that there is a setting for a jackpot notice using reliability suggestion performance (step S1550: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the setting information for the jackpot notice includes a setting for displaying a rainbow color title ( Step S1551). Here, if it is determined that the rainbow color title display setting is included (step S1551: YES), the display color of the title display is set to rainbow color, and the setting information is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1552 ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rainbow color title display setting is not included (step S1551: NO), the process proceeds to step S1553, which will be described later. The display color is set to blue or red.

As is clear from this, when the title display is displayed in blue or red, it usually functions as a reliability indication that indicates the high or low jackpot reliability, but by displaying it in rainbow colors, , functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 23).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1552 or determines that there is no setting for rainbow color title display (step S1551: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether the setting information for the jackpot preview includes the setting for rainbow color cut-in. It is determined whether or not (step S1553). Here, if it is determined that the rainbow color cut-in setting is included (step S1553: YES), the cut-in display color is set to rainbow color (see FIG. 26(D)), and the setting information is It is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1554). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rainbow color cut-in setting is not included (step S1553: NO), the process proceeds to step S1555, which will be described later. , the display color is set to blue or red (see FIGS. 26(B) and (C)).

As is clear from this, when the cut-in is displayed in blue or red, it usually functions as a reliability indication that indicates the high or low reliability of the jackpot, but when it is displayed in rainbow colors, , functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 26).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1554 or determines that there is no setting for rainbow color cut-in (step S1553: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether the setting information for the jackpot notice includes the setting for displaying rainbow color characters. It is determined whether or not (step S1555). Here, if it is determined that the setting for rainbow color character display is included (step S1555: YES), the display color of the character display is set to rainbow color, and the setting information is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1556). ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting for displaying rainbow-colored characters is not included (step S1555: NO), the process proceeds to step S1557, but when displaying characters as reliability suggestion effect, the display color is set to blue or red.

As is clear from this, when the text is displayed in blue or red, it usually functions as a reliability indication that indicates the high or low reliability of the jackpot, but when it is displayed in rainbow colors, , functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 25).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1556, when it is determined that there is no setting for a jackpot notice that uses a reliability suggestion effect (step S1550: NO), or when the setting information for the jackpot notice is set to display rainbow colored characters. If it is determined that it is not included (step S1555: NO), another performance pattern for reliability suggesting performance is set (step S1557). Specifically, as other reliability suggesting performances, it is decided whether or not to execute various reliability suggesting performances that suggest the reliability of the jackpot, such as dialogue previews and step-up notices, and the reliability suggesting performances are executed. If so, a process is performed to determine in what manner it will be executed.

If the reliability-suggesting performance has multiple performance modes with different reliability levels (the expected level of jackpot and the level of expectation of transitioning to a variable gaming state in the case of a jackpot), the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is either a likely-variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. In some cases, there is a tendency that a highly reliable presentation mode is more likely to be selected, and a less reliable presentation mode is less likely to be selected (although the highly reliable presentation mode may always be executed). In addition, if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a loss, it is difficult to select a production mode with high reliability, and a production mode with low reliability is likely to be selected, or a reliability suggestion production is likely not to be executed. There is a tendency (it may always be executed in a direction with low reliability). From these facts, for example, when a variation pattern in which SPSP reach is executed is selected, a certain reliability-suggesting performance (for example, title display) is a highly reliable performance mode (in this case, a red title display: Figure 24 (B)), it can be said that other reliability suggesting effects (for example, cut-in) are also likely to be executed in a highly reliable effect mode (in this case, red cut-in: FIG. 26(C)). Furthermore, for example, if a variation pattern in which only normal reach performances are executed is selected, and a certain reliability suggestion performance is executed in a performance mode with low reliability, other reliability suggestion performances will also be performed in a performance mode with low reliability. It can be said that it is easy to implement. In this way, the longer the variation time of the special symbol, the more reliable the performance is likely to be executed, and conversely, the shorter the variation time of the special symbol, the less reliable the performance is. It is easy to be carried out or not carried out.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control board 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the timer interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control board 140 will be described. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the audiovisual control board 140. The image-acoustic control board 140 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 53 at fixed time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. do.

First, the overall CPU 141 executes an image output control process to control the image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the command received from the production control board 130 (step S41). This image output control process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 54.

Following the process of step S41, the overall CPU 141 executes a production sound output control process for outputting various production sounds from the speaker 24 in synchronization with or asynchronously with the production display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 ( Step S42). When a variable production start command including information regarding the setting of a one-shot announcement as a jackpot notice is transmitted from the production control board 130, by executing the process of step S42, the special production sound used for the one-shot announcement is It will be output from the speaker 24.

Following the process of step S42, the central CPU 141 executes data transmission control process (step S44). Specifically, data regarding the image and sound control performed on the image and sound control board 140 is transmitted to the production control board 130. In response, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image and sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. Thereby, the frame lamp 25, the performance button 26, the performance accessory 7, etc. are controlled in synchronization with the performance performed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. That is, for example, during the victory suggestion performance illustrated in FIGS. 11(A) and 15(G), a process is performed in which the performance accessory 7 is rotated while emitting rainbow-colored light.

[Image output control processing by image and sound control board 140]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S41 of FIG. The overall CPU 141 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the production control board 130 has been received (step S411). If it is determined that no command has been received (step S411: NO), the process proceeds to step S42.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the command from the production control board 130 has been received (step S411: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 143 (step S412). Next, the supervising CPU 141 determines how various effect images should be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, creates a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 144, and controls the drawing process. The display list is stored in the RAM 143 (step S413), and the display list is set in the display list storage area (step S414).

Here, the display list consists of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing in frame units, including the type of image to draw, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list storage area is provided in a VRAM having an SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and the VDP 144 stores information on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the display list set in the display list storage area. Executes the drawing process for the displayed image.

[Operations and effects of this embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, for example, the probability of executing a jackpot notice is different depending on whether variation pattern A is selected or variation pattern B is selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the special symbols will be displayed in a variable manner according to the variation pattern with a higher probability of executing the jackpot notice.
Also, for example, since the jackpot notices executed when variation pattern A is selected and when variation pattern B is selected are different from each other, the jackpot notice that is common to these variation patterns is executed, and the jackpot notice is executed. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the appearance rate of the jackpot becomes higher than necessary and the interest of the jackpot notice decreases as a result.
Further, for example, if variation pattern B is selected, normal reach is executed, while if variation pattern A is selected, normal reach is not executed, so the player has to decide whether or not normal reach will be executed. Based on this, it is possible to identify potential jackpot predictions.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when variation pattern A is selected, the jackpot notice (in this embodiment, "premier character performance") that could be executed when variation pattern B is selected is not executed, so the jackpot notice is not executed. It is possible to more effectively suppress the problem that the probability of execution of is becoming higher than necessary.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, when variation pattern B is selected, the winning effect that could be executed when variation pattern A is selected is not executed, so the probability of executing the jackpot notice becomes higher than necessary. Problems such as storage can be more effectively suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot effect is executed, the probability that the game will be controlled in the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is higher than the probability that the game will be controlled in the normal gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively make the player expect that the variation pattern A will be selected and the hit effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a common effect, such as high-speed variation of decorative symbols, is executed both when variation pattern A is selected and when variation pattern B is selected, for example. For this reason, it becomes difficult to know which variation pattern has been selected and which of the hit performance and the premium character performance is likely to be executed, and as a result, it is possible to improve the level of interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the third time period is from when the jackpot notice is executed until the winning notification effect is executed, and the fourth time period is from when the premier character presentation is executed until the winning notification effect is executed. are different from each other. For this reason, for example, if the third time is shorter than the fourth time, it is possible to give the player the impression that the execution of the jackpot game was announced relatively soon after the jackpot effect was performed, and as a result, the You can get a dramatic effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of times a jackpot effect is executed within the same variation for variation pattern A and the number of times other jackpot notices are executed for other variation patterns are different from each other. The preview becomes more diverse, and as a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot effect that has only one execution timing, it is possible to execute a jackpot preview that has multiple execution timings. Therefore, by executing the jackpot notice at the second execution timing without executing the jackpot notice at the first execution timing, the jackpot notice will not be executed based on the fact that the jackpot notice was not executed at the first execution timing. It is possible to make the player who was thinking that he/she feel surprised and happy, and as a result, a high performance effect can be obtained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern C is selected, a capture success effect or a capture failure effect is performed as a result effect of the contest effect. Here, the winning success performance functions as a jackpot notice that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed, so the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the winning success performance will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reach effect or the reach effect is executed, the hit effect is not executed and other jackpot notices are likely to be executed (even if the reach effect is always executed in the case of a jackpot). good). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the appearance of another jackpot notice different from the jackpot effect after the reach is achieved or the reach effect is started.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one mode of cut-in that can take a plurality of presentation modes functions as a jackpot preview. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that a rainbow cut-in will occur instead of a blue cut-in or a red cut-in.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot notice is more likely to be executed when the advance effect is executed than when the advance effect is not executed (it may always be executed in the case of a jackpot). Therefore, by executing the preliminary performance, it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of the jackpot notice even before the fluctuation starts.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the jackpot performance, in addition to the jackpot game being executed, it is suggested that the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's joy, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high production effect, compared to the case where it is only suggested that a jackpot game will be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a different jackpot notice than when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state. Therefore, compared to the case where common jackpot notices are executed in these gaming states, it is possible to improve the variety of jackpot notices, and by executing common jackpot notices, the jackpot notices themselves become monotonous. This can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the jackpot notice up mode is set, the execution probability of the hit performance and the winning success performance does not change, but the execution probability of other jackpot notices increases. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to enjoy other jackpot predictions. On the other hand, since the execution probabilities of the hit performance and the winning success performance do not change, it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in the scarcity value of these jackpot predictions.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a rainbow cut-in, which is one of the jackpot predictions, is executed in response to an operation by the player. Therefore, the player can be motivated to perform the operation, and the player can feel as if he or she has won the jackpot by performing the operation himself, and as a result, the player can receive a high You can get a dramatic effect.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, a common jackpot notice (displaying a rainbow-colored title, a rainbow-colored cut-in, and a rainbow-white character display) can be executed in the variation pattern D and the variation pattern E. Therefore, there is an advantage that the appearance rate of these jackpot notices increases as a result, making it easier for players to enjoy jackpot notices.

[First modification regarding jackpot notice]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a first modification of the jackpot notice will be described. Here, FIG. 55 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the first mission performance.

For example, during a first specific period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until a predetermined time period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, a predetermined character displays the message "Reach with a 4!" ” (see Figure 55 (A)), and if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment performed at the start of symbol variation is “Jackpot”, during this first specific period A mission success effect may be performed in which a reach is established with four symbols, and this mission success effect may function as a jackpot notice (see FIGS. 55(C) and (D)).

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "lose", the mission failure effect representing failure in the presented mission is executed without executing the mission success effect (see FIG. 55(B)). ). Note that FIG. 55(B) shows an example in which a reach is not established with four symbols and a predetermined character utters a line such as "Too bad...".

During the presentation of the first mission, during the mission success presentation, and during the mission failure presentation, the decorative pattern of the first mode or the second mode may be displayed.

In this way, the effect executed during the specific period (here, the mission success effect) may be executed as a jackpot notice. In addition, when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", when the first variation pattern whose variation time is the first time is selected, and when the variation time is the second time which is longer than the first time. In a situation where a certain second variation pattern is sometimes selected, when a special symbol is displayed in a variation manner in the second variation pattern, the first mission performance illustrated in FIG. 55 and the subsequent mission are performed. It is possible to perform a success performance. In addition, in other embodiments, the first mission effect and the mission success effect may be executed when the first special symbol is being variably displayed in the first variation pattern.

[Second variant regarding jackpot notice]
Next, a second modification of the jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. 56. Here, FIG. 56 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second mission performance.

For example, during a second specific period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, a second message such as "Eradicate the enemy with consecutive hits!!" (See FIG. 56(A)). When this second mission is presented, the LCD screen 5 displays a performance display informing the remaining number of enemies, a button image imitating the performance button 26, and a message "Consecutive Hits!" urging the player to repeatedly hit the enemy. Characters are displayed, and a gauge image is displayed indicating the remaining time of the validity period. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment performed at the start of symbol variation is "Jackpot", during this second specific period, the number of remaining enemies becomes "0" in response to consecutive hits. A mission success effect may be performed in which the player succeeds in annihilating the enemy, and this mission success effect may function as a jackpot notice (see FIGS. 56(C) and (D)).

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "lose", the mission success effect is not executed, but the mission failure effect representing the failure of the presented mission is executed (see FIG. 56(B)). ). In addition, in FIG. 56(B), there is an effect display indicating that the second specific period has ended, ``0 seconds remaining'', and that there are ``50'' enemies remaining at the end of the second specific period. An example is shown in which an effect display indicating that the validity period has expired and a gauge image indicating that the validity period has expired are displayed.

Note that this second mission performance and the mission success performance that is the resulting performance may be performed when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the second variation pattern, or may be performed in the first variation pattern. This may be done when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, during the presentation of the second mission, during the mission success presentation, and during the mission failure presentation, the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed, or the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed. good.

[Other variations]
Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may take the following forms, for example. That is, in the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other game machines such as a type 1 type and 2 types mixed type pachinko game machine. It's okay.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the jackpot reliability of various jackpot predictions is 100%, but the jackpot reliability of jackpot predictions does not necessarily have to be 100% as long as it is a relatively high value. , for example, a value other than 100% such as 99.9999%.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Furthermore, the order of processing, set values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values as long as they do not depart from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen diagrams and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other embodiments may be used.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case will be described in which a plurality of types of reliability suggesting performances and jackpot notices are executed before the reach is established. In the following description, the same names, reference numerals, and step numbers will be given to configurations and processes that are common to those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted, and the points that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

[Production mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the performance is performed in any one of the three types of performance modes corresponding to the current gaming state, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the normal mode is used, when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state, the variable probability mode is used, and when the game is controlled in the time saving gaming state, the mode is set in the variable probability mode. Each performance will be performed. In this embodiment, there are multiple types of performance modes other than the time saving mode, the normal mode includes normal mode A and normal mode B, and the variable mode includes variable variable mode A and variable variable mode B. .

The production mode itself has no reliability for jackpots, and each production illustrated in FIG. Even in the probability variable mode, each effect illustrated in FIG. 8 can be executed.

However, each production mode differs from each other in, for example, the type of reliability suggestion production that can be executed, the type of background image that can be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the type of production sound (for example, music) that can be output. By making such a difference, although the variation time of the special symbols is the same when the gaming state is the same, the time required to notify the jackpot (that is, the type of reliability suggesting performance) can be made different. , it is possible to realize different gameplay. Further, the player can recognize the current production mode (ie, the current gaming state) based on the type of background image, for example.

Specifically, for example, in normal mode A, a background image representing a landscape with clouds floating in a blue sky is displayed, and a production mode such as "normal mode A" is displayed except during character SP reach and SPSP reach. A letter indicating the type is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, in normal mode B, a background image representing a scenery of lightning falling from a cloudy sky is displayed, and text indicating the type of production mode such as "normal mode B" is displayed on the screen, except during character SP reach and SPSP reach. Displayed in the upper left corner.

Normal mode A and normal mode B are mutually switched in response to satisfaction of a predetermined condition that does not involve a shift in gaming state. For example, if the judgment result of special symbol judgment is a loss for a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) in a row during one production mode (for example, during normal mode A), then when the next special symbol variation starts ( or immediately before the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of times), the mode is switched to the other production mode (in this case, normal mode B). Furthermore, on the condition that a loss is reported in a highly reliable variation performance (for example, a variation performance corresponding to the variation pattern J), the mode is switched to the other performance mode at the start of the next special symbol variation.

In variable probability mode A, a background image representing the scenery of a ruined city is displayed, and in variable probability mode B, a background image representing the scenery of a built-up area is displayed. The variable probability mode A and the variable probability mode B are production modes that can be shifted to on the condition that the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state. In the present embodiment, the variable probability mode A and the variable probability mode B are configured as performance modes that do not switch to each other. You can choose which of the following modes to perform the performance. In addition, for example, on the condition that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a loss for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in one production mode (for example, during the probability variation mode A), the next special symbol variation will start. At times, the mode may be switched to the other production mode (in this case, variable probability mode B).

The time saving mode is a production mode in which a background image representing a landscape by a lake is displayed. In this embodiment, since only one production mode and time-saving mode is prepared corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, there is no switching to another production mode during the time-saving gaming state. In addition, in response to the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the time-saving mode is immediately switched to normal mode A or normal mode B.

In other embodiments, the reliability of a jackpot may be different for each production mode (the production mode functions as a so-called zone), and even if the reliability of the jackpot is higher in normal mode A than in normal mode B. It can be good or low.

Note that the number of production modes corresponding to the normal gaming state and the number of production modes corresponding to the variable probability gaming state may be two or more (for example, four), and the number of production modes corresponding to the time-saving gaming state may be one or more ( For example, it may be two. Further, the performance may be performed in the same performance mode even if the game state is different. For example, when in the normal gaming state, the performance is performed in either the normal mode or the variable probability mode, while in the variable probability gaming state, the production is performed in a mode other than the normal mode (for example, variable probability modes A and B). may be performed. In addition, an effect may be performed in the time-saving mode when the game is in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

[Variation pattern selection table used in normal gaming state in second embodiment]
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting a variation pattern of special symbols during the normal gaming state in the second embodiment.

As illustrated in FIG. 57, the second embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the types of variable effect patterns associated with the variable patterns D, E, I, and J are different from the first embodiment. It is. Hereinafter, effects executed when variation patterns B to E, G to J are selected will be explained.

When fluctuation patterns B and G are selected by the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 of the performance control board 130 executes the pre-reach performance for 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and then performs the normal reach. Run for 15 seconds. Similarly, when variation patterns C and H are selected, the pre-reach effect is executed for 10 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, then the normal reach effect is executed for 10 seconds, and then the character SP reach effect is executed for 20 seconds. do.

Further, when the variation patterns D and I are selected, the pre-reach performance is executed for 20 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and then the SPSP reach performance is executed for 20 seconds. In this embodiment, when variation patterns D and I are selected, SPSP reach is possible, but normal reach is not possible (normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

When variation patterns E and J are selected, after the pre-reach performance is executed for 20 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the character SP reach performance is executed for 20 seconds, and then the SPSP reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, when variation patterns E and J are selected, character SP reach and SPSP reach are possible, but normal reach is not possible (normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

As illustrated in FIG. 57, for the variation pattern selection tables of FIGS. 57(A) to 57(C), the variation time of the first special symbol and the selection ratio of each variation pattern are different from the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 17. Since they are the same, the following can be said. That is, the longer the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol until the start of the ready-to-reach presentation (that is, the execution time of the pre-ready-to-reach presentation), the more likely it is to be selected in the case of a jackpot, and the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Furthermore, when comparing the variable effect patterns associated with the variable patterns D, E, I, and J, they have in common that SPSP reach is executed as a reach effect. It is more reliable to hit the jackpot if you develop from a pre-reach performance to character SP reach and then to SPSP reach, than from a pre-reach performance to SPSP reach. Therefore, the longer the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol until the start of SPSP reach, the more likely it is to be selected in the event of a jackpot, and it can be said that the reliability of the jackpot is higher. Note that the variation pattern that evolves from SP reach to SPSP reach may be selected only in the case of a jackpot, and may not be selected in the case of a loss (that is, the selection rate of variation pattern J is 0%).

<Hold icon change effect>
Next, in normal mode A or normal mode B, a "pending icon change effect" that can be executed when a preliminary determination result indicating that variation patterns B to E, G to J are selected is obtained will be described. Note that the pending icon change performance is not executed when the variation pattern A or the variation pattern for no reach loss is selected. "Pending icon change effect" is one of the reliability suggestion effects that suggests in advance what color the pending icon will change to, and it is a type of reliability suggestion effect that indicates in advance what color the pending icon will change to. This is a performance that suggests the level of confidence in winning the jackpot. Specifically, in the hold icon change production, for example, immediately before the hold icon related to the prefetch target changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), a hold change suggestion image of the same color as the color after the change is displayed. , is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) near the changing hold icon.

The hold change suggestion image is, for example, an image similar to an enlarged display of the changed hold icon. The color of the pending change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five types are prepared in advance: "blue," "green," "red," "gold," and "rainbow." The reliability of each color of the pending change suggestion image is the same as the reliability of the color of the special icon, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, the color of the hold icon always changes immediately after the hold icon change effect is executed. Therefore, it can be said that the pending icon change performance is a performance that changes the performance mode of the preliminary performance.

When the sub-CPU 131 of the production control board 130 receives a hold command from the game control board 100 in response to the game ball entering the first starting slot 11, it performs a process of setting a preliminary production pattern (step S136 in FIG. 48). Next, the scenario for the pending icon change effect (the color and execution timing of the pending change suggestion image) is set. The scenario of the pending icon change performance is determined based on, for example, a preliminary performance pattern. For this reason, for example, in the case of a preliminary effect pattern in which the color of the pending icon changes multiple times, a scenario is set in which the pending icon change effect is executed immediately before each change. Therefore, in the same way as the advance performance, the hold icon change performance is easier to execute in a jackpot than in a loss, and when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol is selected, a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected. It is easier to execute than when it is selected. Therefore, when displaying a pending change suggestion image in a color with high reliability (for example, gold), compared to displaying a pending change suggestion image in a color with low reliability (for example, blue), the change display of the prefetched target is In this case, a highly reliable effect (for example, an icon change effect that changes the icon to a rainbow color, SPSP reach) is likely to be executed (and may always be executed).

By the way, the pending icon change effect is a presentation that draws attention to the pending icon. If such an effect is performed while the pending icon is not displayed (for example, during SPSP reach), the color of the pending icon will change before you know it. This may give a rough impression as a whole and may not be able to effectively enhance the production effect.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a period in which the pending icon change performance cannot be executed is determined in advance in relation to other performances, and during this period, the above scenario is not referred to (or the above scenario is discarded), and the suspended icon change performance is not executed. A configuration is adopted in which the icon change performance is controlled to be impossible to execute. In addition, during the period when the pending icon change effect cannot be executed, the display of the special icons that have already been displayed will continue, but by not referring to the preliminary effect pattern, new preliminary effects will not be possible for the pending icon. Control.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which the pending icon change effect (and new preliminary effect) is not executed when a variable effect that notifies a jackpot is executed, or when there is a pending effect that results in a jackpot (i.e. appearance rate 0%). In addition, when the variation effect in which a loss is reported is being executed, the execution of the pending icon change effect is controlled as illustrated in FIG. 58.

FIG. 58 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the pending icon change effect is executable and a period in which it is not executable. Note that here, the relationship with the reach effect will be mainly explained, and the relationship with other reliability suggestion effects will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

As illustrated in FIG. 58(A), when the pre-reach effect, normal reach, and effect of stopping the decorative symbols in a loss mode are executed due to the selection of the variation pattern G, the pending icon change effect is the pre-reach effect. It can be executed during production and normal reach. That is, during the performance in which the decorative symbols are actually stopped in a losing mode, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) is controlled to be impossible to execute.

In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 58(B), when the pre-reach effect, SPSP reach, and effect of stopping the decorative pattern in a loss mode are executed due to the selection of the variation pattern I, the hold icon change effect is executed. can only be executed during the pre-reach performance. That is, during the SPSP reach and during the performance in which the decorative symbols are actually stopped in a loss mode, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) is controlled to be impossible to execute.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 58(C), when the variation pattern J is selected, a pre-reach effect, a character SP reach, a SPSP reach, and an effect that stops the decorative pattern in a loss mode are executed, The pending icon change performance can only be executed during the pre-reach performance. That is, during the character SP reach, SPSP reach, and during the performance in which the decorative symbols are actually stopped in a loss mode, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) is controlled to be impossible.

Although the illustration of the variable pattern H is omitted, if the pre-reach effect, normal reach, character SP reach, and effect that stops the decorative pattern in a loss mode are executed due to the selection of the variable pattern H, the hold The icon change performance can be executed during the pre-reach performance and during normal reach. That is, during the character SP reach and during the performance in which the decorative symbols are actually stopped in a loss mode, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) is controlled to be impossible to execute.

In addition, although the illustration is omitted for the fluctuation pattern for no-reach loss, if such a fluctuation pattern is selected and the pre-reach effect and the effect of stopping the decorative symbols in a loss mode are executed, the hold icon will be displayed. The change performance can be executed during the pre-reach performance. That is, during the performance in which the decorative symbols are actually stopped in a losing mode, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) is controlled to be impossible to execute.

As illustrated in FIG. 58, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) in this embodiment can be executed before the start of character SP reach and before the start of SPSP reach during the variable display of the first special symbol, After these ready-to-reach effects start, they are not executed (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). In other words, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) can be performed while the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed, but cannot be performed while the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the pending icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect in which a jackpot is announced. For this reason, for example, if a pending icon change performance is executed during a normal reach and the normal reach develops into a SP reach, the pending icon change performance will be executed to notify that a loss will be announced in the fluctuating performance that is being executed. This may lead to predictions. However, since the special icon changed by executing the pending icon change performance gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game. In other embodiments, the pending icon change effect (and the new preliminary effect) is executed during the variable effect in which a jackpot is announced (that is, during the effect that is executed when the variable patterns A to E are selected). Alternatively, it may be executed while the first special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, a variation pattern that allows the pending icon change effect (and a new preliminary effect) to be executed and a variation pattern that does not allow it to be executed may be set in advance. For example, the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) may be executable when variation pattern G is selected, and may not be executable when variation patterns H to I are selected, or whether it is a jackpot or not. Regardless of whether a predetermined effect (for example, SPSP reach) is selected, it may not be possible to perform the variation pattern.

In other embodiments, the pending icon change effect (and new preliminary effect) may be controlled to be impossible to execute during normal reach, may be executed during character SP reach, or may be executed during SPSP reach. May be executed. Furthermore, the appearance rate of the pending icon change performance (and new preliminary performance) may be lower during performances with higher confidence in a jackpot. For example, the appearance rate may be in a relationship such as during pre-reach performance > = during normal reach > during character SPSP reach > during SPSP reach > 0%, or during pre-reach performance = during normal reach = during character SPSP reach > during SPSP reach > 0 It may be a percentage relationship.

Note that the pending icon change performance may also be executed in the probability variable mode A and the probability variable mode B (that is, the probability variable gaming state). For example, while the pending icon change effect (and pre-effect) is controlled to be executable during the variable display of the second special symbol and during the non-reach effect and before the start of the battle reach (i.e. during the pre-reach effect), after the start of the battle reach may be controlled to be infeasible. For example, when the pending icon change effect is executed in the variable probability mode than in the normal mode, the expectation level of jackpot and the expectation level of shifting to the variable probability gaming state in the case of a jackpot may be higher or lower. It may be the same or it may be the same.

In addition, the pending icon change effect may be performed, for example, under a predetermined situation (for example, in the case of normal mode A, in the case of definite variable mode, a predetermined reliability suggestion in the variable display of the pre-read target or the variable display before the pre-read target). When a performance (for example, a background performance or a symbol change performance described later) is performed, it may be performed only in the case of a jackpot, and may not be performed in the case of a loss. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the pending icon change performance but also in other performances (including the performance mode itself).

Note that in other embodiments, the pending icon change effect and the preliminary effect may be configured as one effect. In addition, there may be cases where the preliminary effect is executed after the pending icon change effect and cases where the preliminary effect is not executed (so-called fake), and the false effect is also controlled to be impossible during the period when the pending icon change effect cannot be performed. You may.

<The icon change effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, "the icon change effect" that can be executed when variation patterns B to E, G to J are selected in normal mode A or normal mode B will be described. Note that the icon change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A or the variation pattern for no reach loss is selected.

"The icon change performance" is one of the reliability suggesting performances that suggests in advance what color the icon will change to, and is a performance that suggests the reliability of the jackpot of the variable performance that is being executed. In this embodiment, in response to the execution of "the icon change effect," the color of the icon always changes immediately after that (that is, the effect mode of the preliminary effect changes). Specifically, in the icon change production, for example, immediately before the icon changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), an icon change suggestion image of the same color as the color after the change is displayed. Displayed near the icon for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

The icon change suggestion image is, for example, an image similar to an enlarged display of the icon after the change, and is an image in the same manner as the image used as the pending change suggestion image. The color of the icon change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five types are prepared in advance: "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow". In this embodiment, the reliability of each color of the icon change suggestion image and the icon is 3% for "blue", 16% for "green", 45% for "red", and 45% for "gold". is 65%, and "Rainbow" is 100%. When displaying an icon change suggestion image in a color with high reliability (for example, gold), compared to the case where an icon change suggestion image in a color with low reliability (for example, blue) is displayed, it is difficult to display an icon change suggestion image in a color with high reliability (for example, blue). night background, SPSP reach) is likely to be executed (may be always executed).

The icon change performance is a performance that changes the performance mode of the preliminary performance similarly to the pending icon change performance. However, the icon change production is a production that changes the icon instead of the pending icon, and the production is performed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination rather than the preliminary determination information. Different from change performance.

For example, the sub CPU 131 of the performance control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the icon change performance when starting the variable performance (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to the icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and selects a random number as to whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on information on whether or not it is a jackpot. It will be decided by lottery.

The icon change effect execution lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect is determined in advance. In the case of a jackpot, a judgment value of ``0 to 39'' is assigned to the judgment result of ``executing'' the icon change effect among the judgment values of ``0 to 99'' (the execution rate is 40%). ), a determination value of “40 to 99” is assigned to the determination result that the icon change effect is “not executed” (proportion of not executed is 60%). On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a judgment value of ``0 to 29'' is assigned to the judgment result of ``execute'' among the judgment values of ``0 to 99'' (30% execution rate), and A determination value of ``30 to 99'' is assigned to the determination result of ``not executed'' (70% rate of not executed).

In this way, since the icon change effect is more likely to be executed when there is a jackpot than when it is a loss, the reliability of the icon change effect is higher when the icon change effect is executed than when it is not executed. It is possible for people to recognize this.

In addition, the icon change effect may be executed under a predetermined situation (for example, in the case of normal mode A, in the case of definite change mode, or in the case of a predetermined reliability suggestion effect (for example, background effect or pattern change effect described later). ), it may be executed only in the case of a jackpot, and may not be executed in the case of a loss. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the icon change performance but also in other performances (including the performance mode itself).

In addition, if the pending icon (the presentation mode of the pre-production) is a "rainbow" in response to the execution of the pending icon change presentation, the presentation mode of the preliminary presentation cannot be changed any further, so the icon change presentation is This is not possible (see Figure 59). Therefore, the icon change performance is a reliability suggesting performance that may be executed when the pending icon is not a rainbow.

When it is determined to execute the icon change effect, the sub CPU 131, for example, refers to the icon display mode determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and obtains information on whether or not it is a jackpot and the variation pattern. The change pattern of the icon is determined by random number lottery based on the type.

The icon display mode determination table includes, for example, a judgment value that is compared with a random number for determining the change pattern of the icon, and the color of the pending icon immediately before being displayed as the icon (hereinafter referred to as the "final color at the time of pending"). ) is associated in advance with the color change pattern of the icon until it is deleted.

Here, the change pattern of the icon will be explained. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon in the case of a jackpot, and FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon in the case of a loss. Note that the "first changing color" in FIGS. 59 and 60 is the first color that changes after the pending icon is displayed as the icon, and the "final color at the time" is the color that changes immediately before the icon is deleted. It's a color. Further, “no change” indicates that the icon change effect is not executed (that is, the color of the icon does not change or cannot change any more). In addition, the "Ratio" column in FIGS. 59 and 60 shows how many judgment values are assigned among the judgment values "0 to 99" that are compared with the random number for determining the change pattern of the icon. It shows.

In this embodiment, the change pattern of the icon includes a pattern in which the first change color directly changes to the final color at the time (the number of times the icon change effect is executed twice), and a pattern in which the first change color changes directly to the final color at the time. (the number of executions of the icon change effect is once), and a pattern that changes to the final color at the time through a change from the first change color to another color (the number of executions of the icon change effect is three or more times). There is.

As illustrated in FIG. 59, when it is a jackpot and fluctuation patterns B to E are selected, if the final color at the time of reservation is "white", the final color at that time is "blue", "green", "red". ”, “gold”, and “rainbow” are 2%, 5%, 39%, 53%, and 1%, respectively. Therefore, among the judgment values from 0 to 99, a judgment value of 0 or 1 is assigned to the judgment result that the final color at that time is ``blue'', and the judgment result is ``green''. A judgment value of “2 to 6” is assigned to the judgment result, a judgment value of “7 to 45” is assigned to the judgment result of “red”, and a judgment value of “7 to 45” is assigned to the judgment result of “gold”. A determination value of "46 to 98" is assigned to the result, and a determination value of "99" is assigned to the determination result of "rainbow".

In addition, if it is a jackpot and fluctuation patterns B to E are selected, if the final color at the time of reservation is "blue" or "green", the final color at that time is "red", "gold", or "rainbow". The percentages are 40%, 58%, and 2%, respectively. For this reason, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", a judgment value of "0 to 39" is assigned to the judgment result that the final color at that time is "red", and the judgment result of "gold" is assigned. A determination value of "40 to 97" is assigned to the result, and a determination value of "98, 99" is assigned to the determination result of "rainbow".

As illustrated in FIG. 60, in the case of a loss, the ratio for each change pattern depends on which of the pending numbers of the first special symbol judgment is from 0 to 3 at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. are different. Specifically, for example, if it is a loss and the variation patterns G to J are selected, and the final color at the time of reservation is "white", the number of reservations in the first special symbol determination is 0. and when it is 1 will be explained.

In this case, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 0, the percentage of the final color being "blue", "green", "red", "gold", or "rainbow" at that time is 60% for each. , 27%, 10%, 3%, and 0%. Therefore, among the judgment values of ``0 to 99'', a judgment value of 0 to 59 is assigned to the judgment result that the final color at that time is ``blue'', and the judgment result of ``green'' is assigned. A judgment value of "60 to 86" is assigned to the judgment result, a judgment value of "87 to 96" is assigned to the judgment result of "red", and a judgment value of "87 to 96" is assigned to the judgment result of "gold". A determination value of "97 to 99" is assigned to the result, and no determination value is assigned to the determination result of "rainbow" (when the result is a failure, the appearance rate of rainbow is 0%).

In addition, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 1, the percentage that the final color is "blue", "green", "red", "gold", or "rainbow" at that time is 65%, respectively. 26%, 7%, 2%, and 0%. Therefore, among the judgment values of ``0 to 99'', a judgment value of ``0 to 64'' is assigned to the judgment result that the final color is ``blue'' at that time, and the judgment result of ``green'' is assigned. A judgment value of "65 to 90" is assigned to the judgment result, a judgment value of "91 to 97" is assigned to the judgment result of "red", and a judgment value of "91 to 97" is assigned to the judgment result of "gold". A determination value of "98, 99" is assigned to the result, and no determination value is assigned to the determination result of "rainbow" (when the result is a failure, the appearance rate of rainbow is 0%).

As illustrated in FIGS. 59 and 60, in this embodiment, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of reservation, the more likely the final color at that time becomes a color with high reliability. Specifically, at the time of a jackpot, the final color on hold is white, and then, in response to the execution of the icon change performance, the color of the icon (pre-production mode) changes to blue, and then it changes to gold. The probability of this happening is 21% (=0.4×0.53×100). In addition, if the color of the pending icon (preliminary effect presentation mode) changes to blue in response to the pending icon change effect being executed at the time of a jackpot, then the corresponding icon change effect is The probability that the icon turns into gold is 23% (=0.4×0.58×100).

In addition, if the final color on hold is white when you lose, and the icon change effect is subsequently executed, the probability that the icon changes to blue and becomes gold is 0.9% (=0 .3×0.03×100). In addition, if the color of the pending icon changes to blue in response to the pending icon change performance being executed at the time of a loss, the probability that the icon becomes gold in response to the subsequent execution of the icon change performance is It is 3.9% (=0.3×0.13×100).

Furthermore, the probability that the final color at that time becomes rainbow in response to the execution of the icon change effect for each pending final color is higher in the order of white < blue (or green) < red < gold. Thereby, it is possible to make the user expect that the more reliable the color of the pending icon, the more the icon will become a rainbow.

As a result, the more reliable the hold icon is, the more likely the icon is to be in a highly reliable manner. Moreover, even if the color of the pending icon is the same, the icon is more likely to have a color with higher reliability in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Thereby, the player can continue to have a feeling of expectation for a big hit from the moment the pending icon is displayed in a highly reliable manner. Note that when the hold icon is in the first predetermined form (for example, green) or more, the icon corresponding to this hold icon may always be in the second predetermined form (for example, rainbow color or gold).

As illustrated in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, in the case of a loss, the smaller the number of reservations, the more likely the final color will be a color with high reliability. Note that when the predetermined number of reservations (for example, 0) is reached, the final color may always be a predetermined color (for example, blue).

In other embodiments, the higher the reliability of the final color on hold, the more difficult it is for the final color at the time to become a color with higher reliability (the final color at the time is always higher than the final color on hold). ). Furthermore, the lower the reliability of the final color at the time of hold, the more likely the final color at the time becomes a color with high reliability (for example, when the final color at the time of hold is a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is necessary to (The final color may be a rainbow color.) In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of reservation, the more reliable the final color at the time is likely to be, while in the case of a loss, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of reservation, the more reliable the final color at the time is. It may be difficult to obtain a highly reliable color.

In other embodiments, the icon change performance may be changed between a variation pattern in which a performance with high reliability for a jackpot (for example, SPSP reach) can be executed, and a variation pattern in which only a performance with low reliability (for example, normal reach) can be executed. Patterns may be determined in different proportions. For example, the final color may be more likely to be a highly reliable color in the variation pattern E than in the variation pattern B (or it may be that the final color is always a predetermined color with high reliability in response to the variation pattern E). ). Furthermore, the final color may be more likely to be a highly reliable color in the variation pattern J than in the variation pattern G (even if the final color is always a predetermined color with high reliability in response to the variation pattern J). good.). Furthermore, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the more likely or difficult the final color will be to become a reliable color.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a period in which the icon change effect can be performed and a period in which it cannot be performed will be described. FIG. 61 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the icon change effect is executable and a period in which it is not executable. Note that here, the relationship with the reach effect will be mainly explained, and the relationship with other reliability suggestion effects will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon is displayed until immediately before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by changing the icon at various timings during the variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that a jackpot will be announced in the variable performance that is being executed. However, by drawing attention to the icon by executing the icon change effect, the player's attention may be diverted from other effects being executed, and there is a risk that the player's interest may not be enhanced.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a period in which the icon change performance cannot be performed is determined in advance in relation to other performances, and the icon change performance is controlled to be executable outside of this period. . Note that the present embodiment also employs a configuration in which the color of the icon (that is, the presentation mode of the preliminary presentation regarding the icon) does not change unless the icon change presentation is performed. Therefore, during the period in which the icon change performance cannot be performed, the performance mode of the preliminary performance related to the icon does not change.

As illustrated in FIG. 61(A), when variation pattern A is selected, the icon change effect cannot be executed from the start of variation of the first special symbol to the stop display.

As illustrated in FIG. 61(B), when the pre-reach effect, normal reach, and effect that permanently stops the decorative symbols are executed due to the selection of variation pattern B or G, the icon change effect is the pre-reach effect. It can only be executed during That is, during the normal reach and during the performance in which the decorative pattern is permanently stopped, the icon change performance is controlled to be impossible to execute. In variation patterns B and G, wins and losses are announced immediately (for example, 10 seconds later) after the start of normal reach, so if the icon changes during normal reach, there is a risk of giving the impression of being in a hurry. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the icon does not change during normal reach when variation patterns B and G are selected, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from giving the impression of being in a hurry. There is.

As illustrated in FIG. 61(C), when the pre-reach effect, SPSP reach, and effect that stops the decorative pattern are executed due to the selection of variation pattern D or I, the icon change effect is the pre-reach effect. It can be executed during the performance and during a part of the period during SPSP reach. Specifically, during SPSP reach, it cannot be performed while the title is displayed and during the performance after the operation promotion performance, but it is possible to perform it during the battle performance.

As illustrated in FIG. 23 and FIGS. 24(C) and (D), since the title display itself functions as a reliability suggesting effect, the icon change effect having the same function is not executed while the title is being displayed. It is configured as follows. In other embodiments, the icon change effect may be controlled to be executable while the title is being displayed. In such a configuration, even if a blue title is displayed, which has relatively low confidence in winning a jackpot, the icon changes while this title is displayed, changing the icon to a color with high confidence (for example, gold or rainbow). color) may change. This allows the player to continue playing the game without losing his or her expectations for the subsequent development.

As illustrated in FIG. 26, the operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 26, and focuses the player's consciousness on the button image, the gauge image, and the performance button 26 (and the up key and down key). It is a performance that makes you look towards the audience. If the icon changes during such a presentation, there is a risk that the player will be surprised and unable to perform appropriate operations. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the icon does not change during the operation promotion performance, the player can concentrate on the operation promotion performance and perform appropriate operations.

As illustrated in FIGS. 26(B) to 26(D), the cut-in itself functions as a reliability suggesting effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during cut-in for the same reason as during title display.

After the cut-in, in the case of a jackpot, a victory notification effect and a pseudo-stop effect are performed when the decorative symbols of the second mode are aligned, and then a pseudo-stop is performed when the decorative symbols of the first mode are aligned. By stopping the game, you will be notified of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of a loss, the loss is notified by pseudo-stopping the decorative pattern of the second aspect at the winning position, and then pseudo-stopping the decorative pattern of the first aspect at the reaching position, and then making a real stop. Even if the icon changes now while the winning/losing notification is being presented, the presentation effect may not be effectively enhanced. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon change effect is not performed after cut-in.

As illustrated in FIG. 61(D), when a pre-reach effect, a character SP reach, a SPSP reach, and an effect that permanently stops the decorative symbols are executed due to the selection of variation pattern E or J, the icon changes. The performance can be executed during the pre-reach performance, during the character SP reach, and during a part of the period during the SPSP reach. Specifically, during the character SP reach, it cannot be executed while the title is displayed and during the capture failure presentation (and during the development suggestion presentation), but it is possible to execute during the contest presentation. Note that during SPSP reach, control is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 61(C), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

As illustrated in FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B), the title display related to the character SP reach itself functions as a reliability suggesting effect. For this reason, in this embodiment, for the same reason as during the display of the title related to SPSP reach, the icon change effect is not executed while the title related to character SP reach is displayed.

During the capture failure performance, the player may watch the progress of the performance with a sense of expectation that he may lose, but that a development suggestion performance may be executed. If the icon changes during such a presentation (for example, changes to a rainbow color that foretells a jackpot), there is a risk that the sense of crisis that the player may lose may not be effectively heightened. Therefore, in this embodiment, the icon change performance is not executed during the capture failure performance.

Furthermore, during the development suggestion performance that is executed when character SP reach develops to SPSP reach, the player may be happy that the fluctuating performance continues and increase his expectations for SPSP reach. If the icon changes during such a presentation, expectations may become too high and the user may be disappointed if a blue title display is displayed at the start of SPSP reach. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon does not change during the development suggestion presentation.

In addition, although the illustrations of the fluctuation patterns C and H are omitted, when the pre-reach performance, normal reach, character SP reach, and the performance of stopping the decorative symbols are executed due to the selection of the fluctuation pattern C or H, The icon change performance can be performed during the pre-reach performance, during the normal reach, and during the contest performance in the character SP reach. On the other hand, the icon change performance is controlled to be impossible to execute during title display, capture failure performance, capture success performance, and performance of stopping the decorative symbols in the character SP reach.

Furthermore, although the illustration of the variation pattern for no-reach loss is omitted, if the icon change performance is executed when the variation pattern for no-reach loss is selected, it will cause discomfort to the player and may even cause discomfort. There is a risk that the performance effect will be reduced. Therefore, when the variation pattern for no-reach loss is selected, the icon change performance is controlled to be impossible to execute.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a short variation pattern (for example, variation pattern for no-reach loss of 13.5 seconds or less and variation pattern A) is selected, the icon change effect is not executed, and the relative When a long variation pattern B to E or G to J is selected, the icon change effect can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect (and the preliminary effect related to the icon) can be executed while displaying either the first aspect of the decorative pattern or the second aspect of the decorative pattern.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, when the icon change effect is executed during the pre-reach effect or during the normal reach, the icon change effect is better than when it is executed during the character SP reach or SPSP reach. It is configured so that jackpots are easily notified. In other words, when the icon change effect is executed while the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed, it is easier to be notified of a jackpot than when it is executed while the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed. It could be a jackpot). It should be noted that the jackpot may be reported more easily when the icon change effect is executed during the character SP reach or SPSP reach than when it is executed during the pre-reach effect or during the normal reach. (may be a jackpot), the jackpot expectation level does not need to be different.

Incidentally, in the case where a revival effect is executed in which the three decorative symbols in the same pattern are pseudo-stopped after pretending to be a loss at the final stage of the SPSP reach, the icon may be executed. For example, after the decorative pattern of the first mode is pseudo-stopped when the reach is missed, it is made to appear as a loss, but before the start of the revival effect where the decorative pattern of the first mode is pseudo-stopped with the patterns aligned (or (at the start), the color of the icon may be changed to a rainbow color in accordance with the execution of the icon change effect. Note that during the icon change production, the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed, or the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed.

Further, in SPSP reach, the icon change performance may be controlled to be executable after the operation promotion performance. In the case of such a configuration, for example, if the icon change performance is executed after the operation promotion performance, the jackpot is more likely to be notified than when the icon change performance is not performed after the operation promotion performance. (it may always be a jackpot), or the jackpot expectation level does not need to be different.

In addition, if a development suggestion performance is performed following a capture failure performance, the icon change performance can be performed during the capture failure performance, and if a non-development suggestion performance is performed following a capture failure performance, a capture failure occurs. The icon change performance may be controlled to be impossible to execute during the performance. In such a configuration, by executing the icon change performance during the capture failure performance, it is possible to suggest that the SPSP will develop into a reach and that the expectation level of jackpot is high.

Further, the icon change performance may be controlled to be executable during the development suggestion performance. With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively increase expectations for a jackpot due to the synergistic effect of the development suggestion performance and the icon change performance.

Incidentally, the icon change effect may be executed also in the probability variable mode A and the probability variable mode B (that is, the probability variable gaming state). For example, while the icon change performance (and the preliminary performance related to the icon) is controlled to be executable during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, during the no-reach performance and before the start of the battle reach (i.e., during the pre-reach performance), It may be controlled so that it cannot be executed (that is, the appearance rate is 0%) after the start of the battle reach. Alternatively, the relationship between the appearance rates of the icon change performance may be controlled such that during the non-reach performance and before the start of the battle reach (that is, during the pre-reach performance) > after the start of the battle reach > 0%. For example, when the icon change effect is executed in the variable probability mode than in the normal mode, the expectation level of jackpot and the expectation level of shifting to the variable probability gaming state in the case of a jackpot may be higher or lower. It may be the same or it may be the same.

<Pseudo continuous performance>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, in normal mode A or normal mode B, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or a variation pattern for no reach loss with a variation time of 13.5 seconds are selected. We will explain the "pseudo-continuous performance" that can be executed in this case. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern for no-reach loss or the fluctuation pattern A whose fluctuation time is shorter than 13.5 seconds is selected, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of performances in the pseudo-continuous performance, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous performance and the reliability. In addition, in FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the notation of characters indicating the type of production mode is omitted.

The pseudo continuous effect (see Fig. 62) is a effect executed based on the judgment result of the first special pattern judgment, in which all the pseudo-stopped decorative patterns of the first mode are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll again at high speed. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a "restart.") This is one type of performance that suggests reliability. For example, when the decorative pattern is restarted once by the pseudo-continuous performance, it appears as if the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner twice during one variable display of the special pattern. For example, if a "pseudo consecutive pattern" (Fig. 62 (A) (c) and (B) (c)) is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) as a medium symbol on the active line, all The decorative pattern is restarted (see, for example, FIGS. 16(A), (c), and (d)). The pseudo-continuous pattern is a special pattern (decorative pattern that is not used during normal variable display) that suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect.

The pseudo-continuous performance can be executed 0 to 3 times, and is a performance that indicates the reliability of a jackpot depending on how many times it is executed. The number of executions is likely to be greater in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss, and only in the case of a jackpot it can be executed three times. Further, if the variation time of the first special symbol is long, the number of executions is likely to be large (eg, 2 times), and if the variation time is short, the number of executions is likely to be small (eg, 0 or 1 time). Note that the number of executions may be one or more in the case of a jackpot, and may be zero in the case of a loss.

Pseudo-continuous performances include "normal pseudo-continuous performances" and "story pseudo-continuous performances," and either one type is displayed during a no-reach performance or a pre-reach performance (that is, while displaying the decorative pattern of the first mode). It is possible to perform a pseudo-coupled performance. The "normal pseudo-continuous performance" is a performance that does not involve changing the background image, and the "story pseudo-continuous performance" is a performance that involves changing the background image.

In the present embodiment, the type of pseudo-continuous performance and the number of times it is executed are determined from 0 to 3 times based on the fluctuation pattern determined when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. . Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern for no-reach loss with a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds or the fluctuation patterns B, C, G, and H are selected, it can be executed 0 times or once, and the fluctuation patterns D, I , J is selected, it can be executed 0 to 2 times (it may always be executed twice). Furthermore, if variation pattern E is selected, it can be executed 0 to 3 times (it may always be executed two or more times). Note that the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance may be uniquely determined based on the variation pattern.

Since the pseudo-continuous performance is executed during the non-reach performance or the pre-reach performance, there are cases where the reach is established after the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance, and cases where the reach is not established. In addition, when the variation patterns B to E, G to J are selected, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed so that a reach is always established after the pseudo continuous effect is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 62(A), when the "normal pseudo continuous performance" is performed once, the following performance is performed, for example. Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, a pseudo first series of variable display is started in which the decorative symbols of the first mode are scrolled at high speed for a time shorter than the variation time of the special symbol. (See FIG. 62(A)(a)).

For example, at the end of the fluctuating display of the first pseudo series, the left and right symbols (both decorative symbols of the first mode), which are made of different decorative symbols, are pseudo-stopped at the center of the screen, and then the pseudo series is displayed as the middle symbol. A symbol (for example, a special symbol representing the Chinese character "ren") is pseudo-stopped on the active line (see FIGS. 62(A), (b) and (c)). When the pseudo continuous pattern is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle pattern, the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern are restarted by performing the first pseudo continuous performance. From this, the pseudo second consecutive variable display starts (for example, see FIGS. 62(A) and 62(d)).

In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first aspect) is restarted, the performance accessory 7 is operated in an operation pattern that notifies the execution of the pseudo continuous performance toward the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIG. 62(A)(d)). Along with this, an effect image is displayed as the background of the performance accessory 7 to notify the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance.

When the action of the performance accessory 7 is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(e), the characters indicating the pseudo consecutive number such as "x2" (characters indicating that it is the pseudo second consecutive series) are displayed in the upper left of the screen. displayed in the corner. Further, along the inner side of the screen periphery, a pseudo continuous effect image of a predetermined color indicating the pseudo continuous number (for example, green indicating the second pseudo continuous) is displayed. The decorative pattern being restarted is the decorative pattern of the first aspect.

As illustrated in FIG. 62(B), when the "story pseudo-continuous effect" is performed once, for example, the following effect is performed. Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, a pseudo first series of variable display is started in which the decorative symbols of the first mode are scrolled at high speed for a time shorter than the variation time of the special symbol. (See FIG. 62(B)(a)).

In this embodiment, as the variable display of the first pseudo series is started, the performance accessory 7 is moved to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a movement pattern that suggests that a story pseudo series performance may be executed. (See FIG. 62(B)(a)). Along with this, an effect image similar to the effect image that notifies the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous performance is displayed as the background of the performance accessory 7.

When the action of the performance accessory 7 is completed, a story image representing the past of the ally character is displayed on the entire screen, as illustrated in FIG. 62(B)(b). Along with this, a sound effect related to the content of this image (for example, a narration introducing the past of an ally character) is output from the speaker 24. Thereby, the player can learn about the background of the ally character and also recognize that there is a possibility that a story pseudo-continuation effect will be executed.

For example, at the end of the variable display of the first pseudo sequence, while the story image is displayed on the entire screen, the left and right symbols (both decorative patterns of the first mode) consisting of different decorative patterns are displayed in the center of the screen. After being stopped, a pseudo continuous symbol (for example, a special symbol representing the katakana "su") is pseudo-stopped on the active line as a middle symbol (see FIGS. 62(B) and 62(c)). In this embodiment, the pseudo-continuous symbols related to the story pseudo-continuous presentation are not normally used when performing the pseudo-continuous presentation. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player which pseudo-continuous performance will be executed depending on the type of pseudo-continuous symbol. Note that the same pseudo-continuous pattern may be used in the normal pseudo-continuous presentation and the story pseudo-continuous presentation.

When the pseudo continuous pattern is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle pattern, the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern are restarted by performing the first story pseudo continuous performance. From this, the pseudo second consecutive variable display starts (for example, see FIGS. 62(A) and 62(d)).

In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first aspect) is restarted by executing the story pseudo continuous effect, the performance accessory 7 is operated in the same movement pattern as when the normal pseudo continuous effect is executed. (See FIG. 62(B)(d)). Along with this, an effect image similar to the effect image that notifies the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous performance is displayed as the background of the performance accessory 7.

When the action of the performance accessory 7 is completed, the story image related to the second pseudo series, which is a continuation of the story image related to the first pseudo series, is displayed on the entire screen, as illustrated in FIGS. 62(B) and (e). be done. Along with this, a sound effect related to the content of this image (for example, a narration introducing the past of an ally character) is output from the speaker 24. The decorative pattern being restarted is the decorative pattern of the first aspect. Note that, unlike when the normal pseudo-continuation effect is executed, the pseudo-continuation effect image is not displayed.

In this embodiment, when the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed twice. When the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice, the second pseudo continuous effect is performed after the first pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the second pseudo continuous effect is performed, refer to FIG. 62, except that the pseudo continuous effect is performed not during the variable display of the pseudo first continuous sequence but during the variable display of the pseudo second continuous sequence. The performance is similar to the one described above. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, for example, after the left and right symbols (both decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the fluctuating display of the pseudo second series, the pseudo continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol. It is stopped (see FIG. 63(c)). When the pseudo-continuous pattern is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle pattern, all the decorative patterns are restarted by performing the second pseudo-continuous performance. From this, the pseudo third series of variable display starts. For example, when a normal pseudo-sequence effect is executed, during the variable display of the pseudo-third sequence, characters indicating the pseudo-sequence, such as "x3", are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, or when the pseudo-third sequence is displayed. A pseudo continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, red) indicating this is displayed along the inner side of the screen periphery (see, for example, FIG. 72(F)). If a reach is achieved during the variable display of the pseudo third series, for example, all images related to the pseudo series effect are deleted, the reach effect develops, and the SPSP reach is always executed (see FIG. 63(d)). .

In this embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed three times. When the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times, the third pseudo continuous effect is performed after the second pseudo continuous effect is performed. This third pseudo-continuous performance functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that it will be a jackpot. When the third pseudo continuous effect is performed, refer to FIG. 62, except that the pseudo continuous effect is performed not during the variable display of the first pseudo continuous sequence but during the variable display of the pseudo third continuous sequence. The performance is similar to the one described above. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the third pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the left symbol and the right symbol (both decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the pseudo third fluctuating display. , the pseudo continuous pattern is pseudo-stopped as the middle pattern (see FIG. 63(e)). When the pseudo continuous pattern is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle pattern, all the decorative patterns are restarted by performing the third pseudo continuous performance. From this, the pseudo fourth consecutive variable display starts. For example, when a normal pseudo-sequence effect is executed, characters indicating the pseudo-sequence, such as "x4", may be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen while the pseudo-fourth sequence is displayed in a variable manner, or A pseudo continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color) indicating this is displayed along the inside of the screen periphery (not shown). Further, while these images are displayed, the frame lamp 37 emits light in rainbow colors. If a reach is achieved during the variable display of the 4th pseudo series, for example, all images related to the pseudo series effect are deleted, and the reach effect develops into a reach effect, and a jackpot is always announced at the end of the SPSP reach (Figure 63 ( f)).

In this embodiment, the reliability for each number of times the pseudo-continuous performance is performed is predetermined so that it increases in the order of 0 times < 1 time < 2 times < 3 times. When the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or the variation pattern for no reach loss with a variation time of 13.5 seconds are selected, it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous performance a small number of times (for example, once). For this reason, when the number of pseudo consecutive effects is small (for example, 0 times or 1 time), normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach can be performed, and the decorative pattern changes to the first mode following the pre-reach effect. In some cases, it becomes the second mode.

In addition, when the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance a large number of times (for example, twice), and when the variation patterns D and E are selected, the pseudo-continuous performance can be executed a larger number of times. It is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance (for example, three times). For this reason, when the number of pseudo-continuous performances is large (for example, twice), SPSP reach can be executed, and the decorative pattern is likely to become the second mode following the pre-reach performance. Note that if the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous performance is two or more, the SPSP reach may be executed without fail.

Note that only when a ready-to-reach effect is achieved after the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times, a "full-rotation reach effect" may be executed in which the decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed while remaining in the same pattern. "Full rotation reach effect" synchronizes the same left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, for example, if the combination "111" is displayed, the next combination "222" will be displayed. This is a reach effect that slowly scrolls while the symbols are aligned. The full rotation reach effect is a reach effect that is executed only in the case of a jackpot, and is not executed in the case of a loss (100% reliability). Therefore, the full rotation reach effect can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot game will be executed. For example, if variation pattern E is selected, there is a small probability (for example, 1%) that it will develop into a full rotation reach via (or without) a normal reach, and the remaining probability (99% in this case) will lead to SPSP. It may develop into reach.

In addition, the full rotation reach may be executed using only the decorative pattern of the first aspect, only the decorative pattern of the second aspect, or the decorative pattern of the first aspect and the second aspect. It may be carried out using a decorative pattern of the aspect. For example, in a full rotation reach, the first mode of decorative symbols may be displayed at the start, the second mode of decorative symbols may be displayed in the middle, and the first mode of decorative symbols may be displayed at the end. Further, for example, in a full rotation reach, the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed at the start, and the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed from the middle.

In addition, the normal pseudo-continuous presentation is a pseudo-continuous presentation that suggests that the possibility of a "jackpot" is relatively low in the fluctuating display that is being executed, and the story pseudo-continuous presentation is a pseudo-continuous presentation that suggests that the possibility of a "jackpot" is relatively low in the fluctuating display that is being executed. It may be a pseudo-continuous performance that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that "" will occur. In other words, the normal pseudo-continuous performance may be more difficult to execute in the case of a jackpot and the story pseudo-continuous effect may be more likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. For example, if a normal pseudo continuous effect is executed, it is a jackpot or a loss, and if a story pseudo continuous effect is executed, it may be a jackpot. Also, for example, when a story pseudo-sequence effect is executed, a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) may be more likely to be executed (always executed) than when a normal pseudo-sequence effect is executed. ).

Further, the possibility of a "big hit" in the variable display being executed may be higher in the normal pseudo-continuous presentation than in the story pseudo-continuous presentation. In other words, the normal pseudo-continuous effect may be more likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot than the loss, and the story pseudo-continuous effect may be less likely to be executed. For example, if a normal pseudo continuous effect is executed, it is a jackpot, and if a story pseudo continuous effect is executed, it may be a loss or a jackpot. Also, for example, a highly reliable performance (for example, SPSP reach) may be more likely to be executed after a normal pseudo-continuous performance (for example, SPSP reach) when a normal pseudo-continuous performance is executed (it is not always executed). ).

In addition, regarding the reliability suggestion performance that can be executed in multiple performance modes, there may be a performance in which the expected level of jackpot and the expected level of transition to a probability variable gaming state in the case of a jackpot are different depending on the performance mode. There may be no performance. For example, when the normal pseudo continuous effect and the background effect are executed in normal mode A, the above two expectations are higher than when executed in normal mode B, and the pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are both normal. The above two expectations do not have to change even in the mode.

<Background production>
Next, referring to FIG. 64, in the normal mode A, the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all the variation patterns for no reach loss (for example, the variation time is 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5 seconds). The "background effect" that can be executed when any one of the seconds) is selected will be explained. Note that the background effect is not executed when variation pattern A is selected. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects when background effects are executed.

The background effect (see FIGS. 64(D) and (E)) is an effect executed based on the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment, and is a effect that is prepared in advance from the state where the default background image of normal mode A is displayed. This is an effect that transitions to a state where a plurality of types (two types in this embodiment) of background images are displayed. There are two types of background images after transition that are displayed by background effects: a bird background in which birds are displayed, and a night background in which the moon and stars are displayed. The bird background is a background effect that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility of a "jackpot" in the variable display being executed. The night background is a background effect that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of a "jackpot" in the fluctuating display being executed, and it is a more reliable effect (e.g. SPSP Reach) is an effect that is likely to be executed later (it may always be executed). It is easier to hit the jackpot with the night background than with the bird background, and the respective confidence levels are 10% and 25%. Both are images that have a wide display area relative to the entire screen (specifically, images that are displayed on the entire screen).

The background performance is one of the reliability suggestion performances executed during the no-reach performance or the pre-reach performance (that is, when the decorative pattern of the first aspect is scrolled at low speed or high speed). The background effect is executed at any one of the following timings: when starting the variable effect, when starting the restart of the second pseudo continuous effect, and when starting the restart of the third pseudo continuous effect related to the normal pseudo continuous effect. . The expectation level for a jackpot and the expectation level for shifting to a probability variable gaming state in the case of a jackpot may be different depending on the execution timing of the background effect, or may be the same. For example, it may be set in advance such that the longer the time from the start of the variable effect until the background effect is executed, the higher (or lower) the above two expectations become. Furthermore, for example, the above two expectations may be higher if the process is executed at the start of the pseudo-third restart than if it is executed at other timings. Note that when the normal pseudo continuous effect is executed, the night background may be executed more easily than when it is not executed (the night background may always be used).

During execution of the background effect, the background image related to the background effect is colored by displaying the decorative pattern of the first mode with high decorativeness instead of the decorative pattern of the second mode with low decorativeness, and when the variable effect starts. It is possible to give a gorgeous impression.

For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the background effect when starting the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52), and if it is to execute the bird background. The display timing and which of the images and the night background to display are determined by random number lottery.

For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a background effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and uses a random number lottery to determine whether or not to execute the background effect based on information on whether or not it is a jackpot. . The background effect execution lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not to execute a background effect is determined in advance. In the case of a jackpot, a judgment value of ``0 to 39'' is assigned to the judgment result of ``executing'' the background effect among the judgment values of ``0 to 99'' (40% execution rate), A determination value of ``40 to 99'' is assigned to the determination result that the background effect is ``not executed'' (the rate of not executed is 60%). On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a judgment value of ``0 to 29'' is assigned to the judgment result of ``execute'' among the judgment values of ``0 to 99'' (30% execution rate), and A determination value of ``30 to 99'' is assigned to the determination result of ``not executed'' (70% rate of not executed).

In this way, the background effect is more likely to be executed when there is a jackpot than when it is a loss, so players perceive that the reliability is higher when the background effect is executed than when it is not executed. Is possible. Note that the background effect may be executed in the case of a jackpot, and may not be executed in the case of a loss.

In FIG. 64(A), in normal mode A, two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51, and the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is shown. A state in which a decorative pattern indicating that the determination result is a loss (decorative pattern of the first mode) is displayed in a stopped state is illustrated. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as a white pending icon.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol started, the first pending icon corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 Special symbol determination is executed and variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, in normal mode A, variable display of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is started (see FIG. 64(C)). Note that in this example, it is predetermined that the background effect will be executed when the variable effect starts.

When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts, first, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed (the decorative pattern of the first mode) moves slightly upward and then starts scrolling downward at a low speed. , an effect display is performed in which the scrolling speed gradually increases.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. In this embodiment, when the background effect is executed, the operation promotion effect is always started immediately before the start of the background effect. FIG. 64(C) exemplifies a state in which the operation promotion effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first mode). The operation promotion effect executed while the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed can be executed in normal mode A, but cannot be executed in normal mode B. On the other hand, the operation promotion effect executed immediately before cut-in while displaying the decorative pattern in the second mode can be executed in normal modes A and B.

In the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance, a normal button image that imitates the performance button 26 in the normal state (see FIGS. 64(C) and 65(A)) and a simulated performance button 26 in the protruding state are used. Any one of the projected button images (see FIG. 65(B)) is displayed together with the gauge image. The operation promotion effect (weak mode) in which a normal button image is displayed is an operation promotion effect that suggests that the possibility of a "big hit" in the variable display being executed is relatively low (for example, reliability is 10%). The operation promotion effect (strong mode) that displays a protruding button image is an operation promotion effect that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of a "jackpot" in the variable display being executed (for example, 60% reliability), This is a mode in which a highly reliable performance (for example, SPSP reach) is more likely to be executed later than when executed in a weak mode (it may always be executed). Note that the operation promotion performance (strong mode) may be executed in the case of a jackpot, and may not be executed in the case of a loss.

As illustrated in FIG. 65(A), in the operation promotion effect (weak mode), the effect button 26 remains in its normal state and emits white light during a predetermined valid period (for example, 3 seconds from the start of the operation promotion effect). The button lamp, which is a light emitting element built into the effect button 26, is controlled so that the effect button 26 is displayed. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 65(B), in the operation promotion effect (strong mode), the effect button motor and button lamp are activated so that the effect button 26 is in a protruding state and emits red light during the effective period. controlled. Note that during the validity period, the frame lamp 37 is controlled to be turned off.

For example, the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 receives the data transmitted from the image and sound control board 140 by executing the process of step S44 in FIG. The height of the performance button 26 is changed from the normal state to the protruding state by operating the accessory motor. The production button 26 can be operated in either the normal state or the protruding state.

When the effect button 26 is operated (for example, pressed) during the valid period, the valid period ends according to the operation, the normal button image (or protruding button image) and the gauge image are deleted, and the background effect is started. . FIGS. 64(C) and (D) illustrate how the background image changes to a bird background or a night background when the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first aspect) is scrolled at low speed.

If the effect button 26 is not operated during the valid period, the operation promotion effect ends at the end timing of the predetermined valid period, and the background image changes to a bird background or a night background accordingly. When the background effect is executed without any operation, the bird background is more likely to be displayed than the night background.

Here, in this embodiment, the background image related to the background effect is displayed only during the variable effect that is being executed. The background image related to the background effect is no longer displayed when the character SP reach develops, when the SPSP reach develops, or at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a random position. For example, when a loss is announced in this variable performance, the default background image (Fig. 64 (A) or (B)) of normal mode A (or normal mode B) is displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol. will be done. The reach development timing and the stop display timing of the first special symbol are both uniquely determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern, and are timings that do not change regardless of whether or not there is an operation during the validity period. For this reason, for example, if the operation is performed during the validity period, the display time of the background image related to the background effect will be longer than if the operation is not performed during the validity period.

Note that while the background effect is an effect that can be executed in normal mode A, it is an effect that cannot be executed in normal mode B. Here, the mode is normal mode B while the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped, and the mode may shift to normal mode A at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol starts along with the variable display of the first special symbol. In such a case as well, the background effect can be executed, and the background effect is executed after the operation promotion effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (flow from FIG. 64(E) to (B)).

In addition, for example, when the decorative pattern of the first aspect is pseudo-stopped in a losing mode, the transition is made from normal mode B to normal mode A (or from normal mode A to normal mode B), and the decorative pattern of the first aspect may be stopped and displayed in conjunction with the stop display of the first special symbol without being changed as it is. In other words, the probability that the production mode will shift is 0% between the time when the decorative pattern of the first mode is stopped and displayed until the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first mode starts due to the variable display of the first special symbol. be. In this case, in the variable display in which the background effect is executed, control can be made so that the normal mode A is always set when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first mode is started. Thereby, the flow of the performance when the variable display of decorative symbols starts can be made smooth, and the performance can be effectively prevented from becoming complicated.

Note that the BGM for normal mode A may be switched to the BGM for background effect at the execution timing of the background effect. For example, BGM for the bird background may be output from the speaker 24 while the bird background is being displayed, and BGM for the night background may be output while the night background is being displayed.

<Relationship between the presence or absence of an operation during the operation promotion performance executed immediately before the start of the background performance and the production mode>
With reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, the relationship between the presence or absence of an operation during the operation promotion performance executed immediately before the start of the background performance and the performance mode of the performance after the operation promotion performance will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the performance after the operation promotion performance executed immediately before the start of the background performance at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the performance after the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance in the event of a loss.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern for no-reach loss, variation patterns B and G are selected, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before it) can be executed in normal mode A, but the title display ( 23 and 24) cannot be executed. On the other hand, when the variation patterns C to E, H to J are selected, in the normal mode A, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before it) and the title display can be executed. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a jackpot differs between when only the background effect is performed and when both the background effect and title display are performed.

The background effect can be executed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, and if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion effect, the bird background will be more beautiful than when it is operated. Although it is easy to transition to , it can transition to either background. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the operation promotion performance and background performance are used as chances to increase the reliability of the title display, thereby giving the player motivation to perform the operation. Note that title display is performed in character SP reach and SPSP reach, but for convenience of explanation, the title display of SPSP reach will be explained here, and the description of the title display of character SP reach will be omitted.

In the case of a jackpot, a strong mode operation promotion effect is more likely to appear as an operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect than a weak mode operation promotion effect. If the performance button 26 is operated during this operation promotion performance, the background performance of the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52) is executed. In the case of a jackpot, the night background is more likely to be displayed than the bird background (it is easier to proceed from (a) to (c) in FIG. 66(A) than from (b)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected and the production button 26 is operated during the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance, the bird background and the night background are No matter which one of them is displayed, the title display of the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance is displayed during SPSP reach. Therefore, during SPSP reach, any one of a blue title display, a red title display, and a rainbow title display can be displayed (Fig. 66 (A) (b) or (c) to (d) ) to (h) pattern).

On the other hand, if the performance button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance, even if it is determined that the night background will be displayed at the start of the variable performance, the effect will be changed according to the end of the valid period. A bird background may be displayed. For this reason, the night background is less likely to be displayed when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect than when there is an operation (occurrence rate in Figures 66(B) and (c) < Figure 66(A) ( c) occurrence rate). In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the bird background may always be displayed if there is no operation (the appearance rate of the night background is 0%), or the bird background may be displayed more easily than the night background (0%). %<appearance rate of night background<appearance rate of bird background), and the night background may be displayed more easily than the bird background (appearance rate of night background>appearance rate of bird background>0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected and there is no operation during the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance, a blue title or a red title is displayed during SPSP reach. While the display can be displayed, the rainbow color title display is not displayed (pattern that proceeds from FIG. 66(B) (b) or (c) to (d) to (g)). Furthermore, for example, even if it is determined to display a red title display at the start of the variable performance, a blue title display may actually be displayed.

In this way, if there was no operation during the operation promotion performance, a title display other than the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance may be displayed during SPSP reach, and there was no operation during the operation promotion performance. The red title display is less likely to be displayed when there is an operation than when there is an operation (total appearance rate in Figure 66 (B) (e) and (g) < Figure 66 (A) (e) and (g) total occurrence rate). In addition, in the case of a jackpot, if there is no operation, the blue title display may always be displayed (the appearance rate of the red title display is 0%), or even if the blue title display is easier to display than the red title display. Good (0%<appearance rate of red title display<appearance rate of blue title display). Further, the red title display may be displayed more easily than the blue title display (appearance rate of red title display>appearance rate of blue title display>0%).

In the case of a loss, a weak mode operation promotion effect is more likely to appear than a strong mode operation promotion effect as an operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. When the performance button 26 is operated during this operation promotion performance, a background performance of the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance is executed. In the case of a loss, the night background is more difficult to display than the bird background (it is more difficult to proceed from FIG. 67(a) to (c) than from (b)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected and the production button 26 is operated during the operation promotion production that is executed immediately before the start of the background production, the bird background and the night background are No matter which one of them is displayed, the title display of the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance is displayed during SPSP reach. Therefore, during SPSP reach, either a blue title display or a red title display can be displayed (pattern that proceeds from FIG. 66(b) or (c) to (d) to (g)).

On the other hand, if the performance button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance, even if it is determined that the night background will be displayed at the start of the variable performance, the effect will be changed according to the end of the valid period. A bird background may be displayed. Therefore, the night background is less likely to be displayed when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect than when there is an operation. In addition, in the case of a loss, if there is no operation, the bird background may always be displayed (the appearance rate of the night background is 0%), or the bird background may be displayed more easily than the night background (0%). %<appearance rate of night background<appearance rate of bird background), and the night background may be displayed more easily than the bird background (appearance rate of night background>appearance rate of bird background>0%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected and the production button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion production executed immediately before the start of the background production, or when the production button 26 is operated. It is more difficult for the red title display to be displayed. In addition, in the case of a loss, if there is no operation, the blue title display may always be displayed (the appearance rate of the red title display is 0%), or even if the blue title display is more likely to be displayed than the red title display. Good (0%<appearance rate of red title display<appearance rate of blue title display). Further, the red title display may be displayed more easily than the blue title display (appearance rate of red title display>appearance rate of blue title display>0%).

In this way, if there is an operation during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the red title display is likely to appear during the SPSP reach even if the bird background is displayed in response to the operation. Further, if there is no operation, the blue title display is likely to appear during SPSP reach even if the night background is displayed in response to the operation. In this way, the presence or absence of an operation at the time of starting the variable effect affects not only the effect mode of the background effect executed immediately after the operation but also the effect mode during SPSP reach. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player motivation to operate, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the player participation type performance.

Further, the rainbow color title display can be displayed when the title is operated, but it is not displayed when the title is not operated. Thereby, it is possible to motivate the player to actively operate from the start of the variable performance.

Here, if the background effect (or the operation promotion effect immediately before it) is executed in a manner that definitely foretells that there will be a jackpot, it will be known that there will be a jackpot from the moment the variable effect starts. In this case, even if a performance that increases interest by making players feel uneasy, such as a winning failure performance, is executed, the performance effect may not be effectively enhanced. On the other hand, for example, if a performance whose content is related to the subsequent performance is executed as a jackpot preview in the middle or final stage of a variable performance, it is possible to give players a special feeling and make them concentrate on the subsequent performance. It is possible. For example, the performance effect may be effectively enhanced by making the title display representing the content of the SPSP Reach battle performance a jackpot preview, or by using the cut-in representing the content of the victory performance as a jackpot preview.

Therefore, in this embodiment, while the mode that functions as a jackpot notice is not provided in the background effect executed at the start of the variable effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before it), it is provided in the title display and cut-in. ing.

In another embodiment, the performance aspect of the background performance may include, in addition to the bird background and the night background, a rainbow background that displays a rainbow-colored background image that functions as a jackpot preview. In addition, in addition to the weak mode and strong mode, the operation promotion mode that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect includes a rainbow mode in which a rainbow-colored protruding button image is displayed, which functions as a jackpot notice. Good too. For example, when jackpot variation patterns B to E are selected, a rainbow background effect and a rainbow-like operation promotion effect can be executed with separate random number drawings at a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). . For example, after the rainbow mode operation promotion effect is executed, the rainbow background effect may be difficult to execute or may be easy to execute. Further, after the operation promotion effect other than the rainbow mode is executed, the background effect of the rainbow background may be difficult to execute or may be easy to execute. Further, after the rainbow background effect and/or the rainbow mode operation promotion effect is executed, the rainbow color title display may be difficult to execute or may be easy to execute.

In addition, even if there is no operation during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the background effect and title display may be executed in the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect, or the rainbow color title may be displayed. An indication may be displayed.

Note that the reliability of a jackpot may vary depending on the combination of the operation promotion performance and the background performance. This makes it possible to arouse interest in these performances.

For example, the relationship between the levels of reliability related to the combination of performance modes of operation promotion performance and background performance may be any of the following (1) to (4).
(1) Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode).
In (1) above, the reliability is high when the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed regardless of the mode of the background effect, and the reliability is low when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed. The relationship between degrees is easy to understand.
(2) Night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode).
In (2) above, the relationship between the reliability of only the background effects may be reversed. As a result, the display of the bird background may raise expectations more than the display of the night background, and it is possible to effectively prevent the bird background from becoming less interesting. Moreover, even if the operation promotion performance (weak mode) is started, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game without losing his/her sense of anticipation.
(3) Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode).
In (3) above, the reliability is easy to understand because the reliability is high when the night background is displayed and the reliability is low when the bird background is displayed, regardless of the performance mode of the operation promotion performance.
(4) Bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode).
In (4) above, the reliability is the lowest for the downfall, the reliability is medium for the uptrend, and the reliability is the highest for the production modes with high reliability, so the relationship between the reliability is easy to understand.
Note that the relationship between the level of reliability regarding the combination of the operation promotion performance and the background performance is not limited to the relationships (1) to (4) above, and may be any relationship.

In addition, in other embodiments, the operation promotion effect may not be executed immediately before the start of the background effect (appearance rate 0%), or may not be executed (appearance rate 0% or more and less than 100%). . For example, the background effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first mode is started in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern (without executing the operation promotion effect).

Furthermore, the reliability of a jackpot may vary depending on the combination of presentation modes of background presentation and title display. Thereby, it is possible to make the background effect more interesting, and it is possible to effectively increase the interest when both the background effect and the title display are performed.

For example, the relationship between the level of reliability regarding the combination of presentation modes of background presentation and title display may be any of the following (1) to (4).
(1) Display a blue title after a bird background < Display a red title after a bird background < Display a blue title after a night background < Display a red title after a night background.
In (1) above, the relationship between the reliability regarding the combination of background effects and title display is that regardless of the presentation mode of the title display, the reliability is high when the night background is executed, and the reliability is high when the bird background is executed. Since the degree is low, it is easy to understand the relationship between reliability.
(2) Display a red title after a bird background <Display a blue title after a night background<Display a red title after a night background<Display a blue title after a bird background.
In (2) above, the reliability relationship for the combination of the background effect and title display may be opposite to the reliability relationship for only the title display. As a result, the feeling of anticipation may be raised when the blue title display is displayed than when the red title display is displayed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the blue title display from decreasing. be. Further, even when the bird background is displayed, it is possible to continue playing the game without losing anticipation.
(3) Display a blue title after a bird background <Display a blue title after a night background<Display a red title after a bird background<Display a red title after a night background.
In (3) above, the reliability is easy to understand because the reliability is high when the red title display is displayed and the reliability is low when the blue title display is displayed, regardless of the performance mode of the background performance.
(4) Display blue title after night background<Display blue title after bird background<Display red title after bird background<Display red title after night background.
In (4) above, the reliability is the lowest for the downfall, the reliability is medium for the uptrend, and the reliability is the highest for the production modes with high reliability, so the relationship between the reliability is easy to understand.
Note that the relationship between the level of reliability regarding the combination of the background effect and the title display is not limited to the relationships (1) to (4) above, and may be any relationship.

For example, if the variation patterns E and J that allow character SP reach and SPSP reach are selected, background effects are executed, and the variation patterns A to D, G that cannot perform both character SP reach and SPSP reach are selected. If I or the fluctuation pattern for no-reach loss is selected, there is no need to execute the background effect (appearance rate 0%). Furthermore, the appearance rate of the background effect may be lower or higher in the latter case than in the former case.

Furthermore, during the operation promotion performance that is executed immediately before the start of the background performance, the decorative pattern of the second aspect may be displayed. In such a case, since the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first aspect) is not superimposed on the back side of the normal button image (or protruding button image) and the gauge image, the screen configuration is easy to understand and the operation promotion effect is executed. It is easy for the player to notice that there is a player.

In addition, for example, the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed during the operation promotion presentation (weak mode), and the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed during the operation promotion presentation (strong mode).

In addition, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect is different from the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the cut-in during SPSP reach, and the operation promotion effect (weak mode) that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect is different from the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the cut-in during SPSP reach, and during the validity period, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is called "Press!" Messages are not displayed. Note that the performance mode of the operation promotion performance executed immediately before the start of the background performance may be the same as the performance mode of the operation promotion performance executed during SPSP reach.

Further, the background performance is a performance in which the performance accessory 7 is not operated, and is a performance performed when the performance accessory 7 is at the initial position. In other embodiments, the performance accessory 7 may be operated at the start timing of the background performance.

In this embodiment, the background effect is not executed after the start of the ready-to-reach effect (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). In other embodiments, the background effect may be executed during the SPSP reach, or may be executed during the promotion effect (first half). For example, in SPSP Reach, the expectation level for a jackpot may be higher when a night background is displayed than when a bird background is displayed (it may always be a jackpot). In addition, in the promotion effect (first half), when the night background is displayed than when the bird background is displayed, the promotion success effect is easier to execute, and the promotion failure effect is less likely to be executed (the promotion success effect is always may be executed).

<Chance production>
Next, referring to FIG. 68, in the normal mode A, the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all the variation patterns for no reach loss (for example, the variation time is 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5 seconds). A "chance effect" that can be executed when a preliminary determination result indicating that the second (one of the two) will be selected will be explained. Note that the chance effect is not executed when variation pattern A is selected. "Chance eye effect" is a stop display of decorative patterns (decorative patterns of the first mode) at a predetermined combination of specific numbers when notifying that the judgment result of the first special pattern judgment is a "loss". This is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that there is something that will be determined as a "jackpot" among the pending first special symbol determination. That is, the chance effect is one of the reliability suggestion effects that suggests in advance that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be played.

In addition, at the time of a loss, immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped with the same combination of numbers that are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the next first special pattern, the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed (the decorative pattern of the first mode) slightly moves. (For example, see FIG. 74(B)). For this reason, the chance number is from immediately before the first special symbol stops being displayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before) to a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display of the next first special symbol (for example, 1 second after the start of the variable display). ) is displayed.

In this way, while the chance effect is being performed, the decorative pattern of the first mode with large numbers is displayed instead of the second mode of decorative patterns with small numbers constituting the decorative pattern. This makes it easy to understand that the chance is displayed.

There are two types of chance pieces displayed by the chance piece effect: weak chance pieces and strong chance pieces. The weak chance is a chance that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility that there will be anything determined to be a "jackpot" in the pending first special symbol determination. In other words, it is a chance eye that gives the player the impression that the variable display of the look-ahead target may be a chance. The weak chance eye in this embodiment is a random eye made up of three even-numbered symbols (for example, a combination of "8", "4", and "4": see FIG. 74(A)). If only a weak chance is displayed before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts, a reach may be established in the variable display of the look-ahead target, but it is difficult to achieve a reach. Further, even if a reach is achieved with the variable display of the pre-read target, only a reach effect with low reliability (for example, a normal reach) is performed, and in most cases, a loss will be notified.

The strong chance is a chance that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that there is something that will be determined as a "jackpot" among the pending first special symbol determination. The strong chance eye in this embodiment is a random eye made up of three odd-numbered symbols (for example, a combination of "7", "3", and "3": see FIG. 75(D)). If a strong chance is displayed before the variable display of the pre-read target starts, a reach is always established during the variable display of the pre-read target, and a reach effect (for example, character SP reach) is performed. In other words, a strong chance is a chance that indicates that the variable display of the look-ahead target will develop into a reach performance that is greater than the normal reach, for example. Therefore, the strong chance can be said to be an effect having the same function as the blue pending icon described with reference to FIG. Note that when a strong chance is displayed, SPSP reach may be executed during the variable display of the pre-read target. Therefore, by displaying a strong chance before the start of the variable display of the look-ahead target, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, a chance roll may be displayed multiple times before the variable display of the prefetch target starts. For example, a weak chance item may be displayed in the variable display immediately before the pre-read target, and a weak chance item may also be displayed in the variable display immediately before the pre-read target. In addition, a weak chance may be displayed in the variable display immediately before the pre-read target, and a strong chance may be displayed in the variable display immediately before the pre-read target. In addition, a strong chance may be displayed in the variable display immediately before the pre-read target, and a strong chance may be displayed in the variable display immediately before the pre-read target.

In this way, if the chance item is displayed multiple times before the variable display for the look-ahead target starts, the type of chance item displayed in the previous variable display for the look-ahead target will be different from the jackpot of the variable display for the look-ahead target. It has the role of indicating reliability. Therefore, when a weak chance is displayed, the player can enjoy the chance effect while expecting that a strong chance will be displayed before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the chance number is displayed using two consecutive fluctuating displays of the first special symbol, but three or more fluctuating displays are used to display the pre-read target. Chances may be displayed three or more times before the variable display begins.

When the sub-CPU 131 of the production control board 130 receives a hold command from the game control board 100 in response to the game ball entering the first starting slot 11, it performs a process of setting a preliminary production pattern (step S136 in FIG. 48). Subsequently, it is determined by random number lottery whether or not to execute the chance effect. Then, when it is determined to execute the chance effect, the sub CPU 131 determines by random number lottery what effect pattern the chance effect is to be executed.

By the way, the derivation and display of the chance is performed using the fluctuation of no reach and loss. For this reason, if it is decided to execute a chance effect based on the pre-determination result of the pre-reading target, it is necessary to check whether all the variable effects related to the variable display executed before the variable display of the pre-reading target are no-reach effects. is determined, and if there is even one variable performance in which a reach effect is performed, control is performed such that the chance effect is not executed.

Note that whether or not to execute the chance effect may be determined by the following process. Specifically, when receiving a hold command, if a preliminary determination result that can be a target for execution of a chance effect (for example, a preliminary determination result indicating a variation pattern that allows execution of a reach effect) is obtained, the sub CPU 131 , It is determined whether or not a reach effect is performed in the variable effects related to the variable display executed before the variable display to be read ahead. Then, if it is determined that the sub CPU 131 is included, the sub CPU 131 determines not to perform the chance effect, and if it is determined that it is not included, the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the chance effect.

<Design change production>
The chance performance is a performance that has a function of indicating the reliability of the jackpot of the pre-read target. For this reason, it is preferable that even after the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the form of a chance number start to be displayed in a variable manner, the player can easily recognize which chance number was displayed in the previous variable display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing a part (or all) of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) displayed in the form of a chance, it is possible to suggest the possibility of a jackpot, and A "symbol change performance" indicating that the performance has been executed is executed. Note that the symbol change performance is a performance performed using the decorative symbols of the first mode, and therefore is a performance that displays an image with a wide display area for the entire screen.

In this embodiment, when the chance effect is executed, the symbol change effect is always executed. For this reason, the symbol change effect is the same as the chance effect, in normal mode A, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all variation patterns for no-reach misses (for example, the variation time is 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5 seconds) is selected. Note that the symbol change performance is not executed when variation pattern A is selected. Further, the symbol change performance is one of the reliability suggesting performances that suggests in advance that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be played.

FIG. 68 is a time chart for explaining the chance effect and the symbol change effect. As illustrated in FIG. 68(A), when the chance effect is not executed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner as the first special symbol changes, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner as the first special symbol stops displayed (loss notification). The stop display of the symbols (the stop display of the random pattern) is repeated.

On the other hand, when a chance effect is executed, a weak chance effect may be stopped and displayed in the two previous variable effects of the look-ahead target, and a strong chance effect may be displayed in the first variable effect before the look-ahead target ( (See FIG. 68(B)). In such a case, at the start of the variable performance immediately before the pre-read target, a symbol change performance that suggests that a weak chance eye has been displayed in the second variable performance before the pre-read target is executed. Specifically, among the three even-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) forming the weak chance, the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols are changed from a default color (for example, blue) to a predetermined color (green in this embodiment). A display that changes all at once is performed.

In addition, if a strong chance is displayed in the previous variable performance of the look-ahead target, it suggests that a strong chance was displayed in the previous variable performance of the look-ahead target at the start of the variable performance of the look-ahead target. A pattern change effect is executed. Specifically, among the three odd-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) forming a strong chance, the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols are changed from the default color (for example, green) to a color other than a predetermined color (this implementation An effect display is performed in which the color changes all at once.

It should be noted that during the pattern change performance, the decorative pattern forming the chance eye is slightly moving. The timing at which the decorative pattern changed by the pattern change effect is returned to the default state may be when scrolling is started, when it is no longer displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 due to scrolling, or during high-speed scrolling.

In this way, when starting the variable display, by executing a pattern change effect that changes the color-related elements of the decorative pattern that had been stopped and displayed using the decorative pattern, the possibility that the pre-read target will become a jackpot can be reduced. It is possible to suggest. There are two types of pattern change effects: a mode in which the elements related to the color of the decorative pattern are changed to red, and a mode in which they are changed to green. The mode of changing the color to red is a mode of symbol change performance that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility that there will be something determined to be a "jackpot" in the pending first special symbol determination. The mode of changing the color to green is a mode of symbol change performance that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that there is something determined to be a "jackpot" in the pending first special symbol determination. When the symbol change effect is executed in a manner in which the symbol changes to red, the reliability of the jackpot of the pre-read target is higher than in a case in which it is executed in a manner in which the symbol changes to green.

The pattern change performance is performed using the decorative pattern of the first mode in which the number size is large, instead of the decorative pattern in the second mode in which the size of the numbers constituting the decorative pattern is small. This makes it easy to understand in what presentation mode the symbol change presentation was executed.

Moreover, the pattern change performance is performed using the decorative pattern of the first mode, which is highly decorative, instead of the decorative pattern of the second mode, which has low decorativeness. Thereby, the decorativeness of the decorative pattern of the first aspect, which is originally high, can be further enhanced by the pattern change effect. Thereby, it is possible to create a gorgeous impression at the start of the variable performance.

In addition, in conjunction with the above-mentioned effect display of the pattern change effect (or in place of the effect display of the above-mentioned pattern change effect), a effect display that changes only the color of the clothes of the characters attached to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. may be performed. For example, in a pattern change effect that suggests a weak chance has been displayed, the characters' clothes change all at once to green; in a pattern change effect that suggests a strong chance has been displayed, the characters' clothes change all at once. It is also possible to change the color to red all at once.

The chance eye performance and the symbol change performance are performances whose execution timing is uniquely determined by being tied to the variation pattern of the first special symbol before the pre-read target. Therefore, the execution interval when the chance effect is executed two or more times is not constant, and the execution interval when the symbol change effect is executed two or more times is not constant. On the other hand, the execution interval between the chance effect and the immediately following symbol change effect is constant no matter how many times these effects are executed.

In addition, in other embodiments, the symbol change effect may be executed without executing the chance effect. In this case, by performing a symbol change effect using the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) that was stopped and displayed when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination was a "loss", It is possible to suggest that there is a possibility that there is something that will be determined as a "jackpot" in the pending first special symbol determination.

In other embodiments, the chance effect and the symbol change effect may be configured as one effect. Further, the chance eye effect may be configured as an effect accompanied by an effect display that causes the area around the decorative pattern to emit light in a luminous color corresponding to the intensity of the chance eye when the decorative pattern forming the chance eye is stopped and displayed. .

In other embodiments, the performance aspects of the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect may have an aspect that functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot will occur, and the jackpot variation pattern B ~ It may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%) when E is selected.

Further, the chance eye performance and the symbol change performance are performances in which the performance accessory 7 is not operated, and are performances performed when the performance accessory 7 is at the initial position. In another embodiment, the performance accessory 7 may not be operated in the chance production, but the performance accessory 7 may be operated at the start timing of the symbol change production.

In this embodiment, the chance effect and the pattern background effect are not executed after the start of the ready-to-reach effect (that is, the appearance rate of both is 0%). In other embodiments, the chance effect and the pattern background effect may be executed during the SPSP reach, or may be executed during the promotion effect (first half). For example, in SPSP reach, chance symbols may be displayed instead of reach symbols, and expectations for a jackpot may be higher when strong chance symbols are displayed than when weak chance symbols are displayed. Also, for example, in SPSP reach, you may perform a pattern change effect that changes the color of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern (reach pattern) from the default color to another color, or change the color of the even number pattern reach pattern from the default color to green. or the color of the odd-numbered reach symbol may be changed from the default color to red. The reach symbols can be displayed in the default color, green, and red, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher in this order. Also, for example, in the promotion performance (first half), a pattern change performance may be executed in which the color of the decorative pattern in the jackpot mode is changed from the default color to another color, and the color of the decorative pattern in the jackpot mode is different from the default color. The color (for example, red) has a higher probability of transitioning to the variable probability gaming state (for example, transition with a probability of 100%).

<Relationship between reliability-suggesting effects>
With reference to FIG. 69, the relationship between reliability suggestion effects that can be executed in normal mode A will be described. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between reliability suggestion effects. As mentioned above, the suspended icon change performance, the icon change performance, the normal pseudo-continuation performance, and the story pseudo-continuation performance are reliable performances that can be executed when the performance is executed in normal mode A or normal mode B. It is a highly suggestive performance. Furthermore, the background effect (and operation promotion effect), chance effect and symbol change effect are reliability suggesting effects that can be executed when the effect is executed in normal mode A.

When a certain reliability suggestion effect is executed in a manner with high reliability, when it is not executed in a manner with high reliability (specifically, when it is executed in a manner with low reliability, or when it is not even executed). In comparison, multiple reliability suggestion effects are more likely to be executed in a manner with high reliability, and there is a high possibility of a jackpot. For example, regarding background effects, the following can be said when a highly reliable night background is performed compared to when a lowly reliable bird background is performed.
・Before the start of the variable display when the night background is executed, the pending icon is likely to change to a color with high reliability (in other words, the pending icon change effect and pre-effect are likely to be executed in a manner with high reliability (even if they are always executed) good)).
・Before the start of the variable display when the night background is executed, and during the variable display when the night background is executed, chance eye effects and symbol change effects that use this variable display as a pre-reading target are likely to be executed (they may always be executed) ).
- In the variable display in which the night background is performed, other reliability suggesting effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) are likely to be executed (and may always be executed).
The same holds true when reliability-suggesting effects other than background effects are executed in a highly reliable presentation mode. Therefore, depending on the case, a situation may arise in which all of these executions are decided.

However, depending on the mode of each performance, there is a risk that executing them simultaneously may feel redundant or excessive. Furthermore, the amount of image data becomes large, and there is a risk that processing may be dropped or frames may be dropped due to double buffering.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, prohibition conditions are set in advance between reliability suggesting effects for the following reasons. In some cases, the content of changes when a prohibited condition is satisfied is specified.

The relationship between the pending icon change effect and other effects will be explained with reference to the row in FIG. 69(A).

First, the relationship between the pending icon change performance and the icon change performance will be explained. In this embodiment, the same effect image as the icon change suggestion image displayed in the icon change effect is used as the hold change suggestion image displayed in the hold icon change effect. Therefore, if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it may be difficult to understand what is happening, which may give a confusing impression. Also, for example, if the pending icon and the icon change at the same time and the icon changes to a more reliable appearance (for example, gold), the expectation of a jackpot for the fluctuating effect corresponding to the icon may be increased. likely to hold it. In such a case, if a loss is reported in the variable performance corresponding to the icon, there is a possibility that the user will not have high expectations for the pending icon, which has a less reliable appearance (for example, green color). Further, for example, if the hold icon changes to a highly reliable mode (for example, a rainbow color indicating a jackpot), there is a high possibility that the player will lose interest in the variable performance that is being executed.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "the icon change effect" in the row of FIG. If so, control is performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. "Control not to execute" means, for example, that when it has been decided to execute one effect, the random number lottery process itself for determining whether to execute the other effect is not executed. is possible.

In other embodiments, the icon change effect may be executable while the pending icon change effect is being executed, or the pending icon change effect may be executable while the icon change effect is being executed. Further, for example, the control may be performed so that the effect related to the aspect after the change is more reliable is executed, and the effect related to the aspect after the change is less reliable is not executed.

Next, the relationship between the pending icon change performance and the normal pseudo continuous performance, and the relationship between the pending icon change performance and the story pseudo continuous performance will be explained.

Regarding the relationship between the pending icon change performance and the normal pseudo-continuous performance, for example, if the pending icon changes to a highly reliable mode (for example, a rainbow color indicating a jackpot), it may be possible to express interest in the fluctuating performance that is being executed. There is a high possibility that it will disappear. In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal pseudo continuous effect is executed, a pseudo continuous effect image of a predetermined color indicating the pseudo continuous number (for example, green indicating the second pseudo continuous effect) is displayed along the inner side of the screen periphery. is displayed. Since the pseudo continuous effect image is displayed in a superimposed manner in front of the hold icon, the visibility of the hold icon is reduced. For this reason, even if the hold icon change effect is executed during display of the pseudo continuous effect image and the color of the hold icon changes, the effect may not be effectively improved.

Regarding the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuation effect, the story pseudo-continuation effect is a performance that draws attention to the story image displayed on the entire screen and the effect sound related to the content of this image. During such a performance, for example, if a pending change suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the story image, or if a production sound related to a pending icon change production (for example, a production sound such as "picon") is output, The player's attention is diverted to the hold icon. Moreover, the effect sound related to the story pseudo-continuation effect makes it difficult to hear the effect sound related to the pending icon change effect, and there is a risk that both effects may become less interesting.

Therefore, as shown in the columns of "normal pseudo continuous effect" and "story pseudo continuous effect" in the row of FIG. It is assumed that the production and the story pseudo-continuation production cannot be executed at the same time.

For example, if the execution timing of a pending icon change effect comes during the execution of a pseudo continuous effect (normal pseudo continuous effect and story pseudo continuous effect), the variable effect related to the pseudo continuous effect ends and the next variation The execution of the pending icon change performance is carried over until the performance is started. Also, for example, if it has been decided to execute a pending icon change effect, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect may be reduced, or the pseudo continuous effect may be executed at a timing that does not overlap with the execution timing of the pending icon change effect. controlled.

In other embodiments, it may be possible to execute the pseudo-continuous effect while the pending icon change effect is being executed, or it may be possible to execute the pending icon change effect while the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. In addition, the pending icon change effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are, for example, if the pending icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), they can be executed at the same time, and if the pending icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color, they can be executed at the same time. may be controlled so as not to execute the pending icon change effect. Also, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two or more times), the pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the pending icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the pending icon change effect is executed. May be executed.

Next, the relationship between the pending icon change performance and the background performance (and the operation promotion performance performed immediately before the background performance) will be explained. In this embodiment, the hold change suggestion image displayed in the hold icon change effect is an image that has a narrow display area with respect to the entire screen. On the other hand, the bird background and night background displayed as background effects are images with a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the screen as a whole.

Therefore, as shown in the "background effect (operation promotion effect)" column in the row of FIG. 69(A), the pending icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed while the pending icon change effect is being executed, and the pending icon change effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed.

Note that in other embodiments where the hold change suggestion image is an image with a wide display area relative to the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), the hold icon change effect and the background effect may not be executed at the same time. good. This is because if the background image becomes completely (or almost) invisible due to the pending change suggestion image and the background image changes before you know it, the performance may become complicated as a result. In such a case, for example, if execution of one effect is determined, control may be performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. For example, if the execution timing of a pending icon change effect comes while a background effect is being executed, the icon change effect is held until the time when the variable effect related to the background effect ends and the next variable effect is started. execution may be carried over.

In another embodiment, when the pending icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), the pending icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the hold icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color. If the icon changes, the background effect may be executed without executing the pending icon change effect. For example, if a night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the pending icon change effect, and if a bird background is displayed, the pending icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect. Good too.

Next, the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the chance effect (and symbol change effect) will be explained. The pending icon change performance is a performance that draws attention to the pending icon, and the chance effect (and pattern change performance) is a performance that draws attention to the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first aspect). If these two types of effects are executed at the same time, for example, the pending change image will be displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern, which may reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern and make the effect as a whole difficult to understand. be. Further, there is a possibility that the effect sound related to the pending icon change effect may be difficult to hear due to the effect sound (for example, a effect sound such as "zugo") output from the speaker 24 during the execution of the chance effect (and symbol change effect).

Therefore, as shown in the columns of "chance eye effect" and "symbol change effect" in the row of FIG. 69(A), it is assumed that the pending icon change effect and these effects cannot be performed at the same time.

In other embodiments, it may be possible to execute the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) while the held icon change effect is being executed, or it may be possible to perform the hold icon change effect while the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) is being executed. May be executable. Also, for example, if the pending icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), the pending icon change effect is executed without executing the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect), and the reliability becomes higher than the predetermined color. If the color changes to a lower color, the chance effect (and symbol change effect) may be executed without executing the pending icon change effect. Also, for example, when a strong chance is displayed, the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) is executed without executing the pending icon change effect, and when a weak chance eye is displayed, the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) is executed. The pending icon change effect may be executed without executing the change effect).

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and other effects will be explained with reference to the row in FIG. 69(B).

First, the relationship between the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect will be explained. Both the pseudo-continuous effect image displayed in the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the icon change suggestion image displayed in the icon change effect have a narrow display area relative to the entire screen. When these two types of performances are performed simultaneously, it is possible to increase expectations for the variable performance that is being executed due to the synergistic effect.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "normal pseudo continuous effect" in the row of FIG. 69(B), the icon change effect and the normal pseudo continuous effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the normal pseudo continuous effect can be executed while the icon change effect is being executed, and the icon change effect can be executed while the normal pseudo continuous effect is being executed. For example, if the icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (e.g., gold or higher), the number of times the pseudo-continuous display will normally be executed is greater (e.g., twice) than when the icon does not change to the predetermined color. It may be easy, or the normal pseudo-continuous performance may always be executed.

Note that in other embodiments, the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect may not be executed at the same time. For example, if execution of one effect is determined, control may be performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. Also, for example, if the icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), it can be executed simultaneously with the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-coupling effect, and if the icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color, A normal pseudo continuous effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. In addition, if the normal pseudo continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 or more times), the normal pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change You may also perform a performance.

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuation effect will be explained. As described above, the story pseudo-continuation effect is a effect that draws attention to the story image and the effect sound related to the content of this image. During such a production, for example, if an icon change suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the near side of the story image, or a production sound related to the icon change production (for example, a production sound such as "Schwar") is output, The player's attention is diverted to the icon. Moreover, the effect sound related to the story pseudo-continuation effect makes it difficult to hear the effect sound related to the icon change effect, and there is a risk that both effects may become less interesting.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "story pseudo continuous effect" in the row of FIG. 69(B), it is assumed that the icon change effect and the story pseudo continuous effect cannot be executed at the same time. For example, if the icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), the icon change effect is executed without executing the story pseudo-continuous effect, and if the icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color, A story pseudo-continuation effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. Also, if the story pseudo continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two or more times), the story pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change You may also perform a performance.

In other embodiments, the story pseudo continuous effect may be executable while the icon change effect is being executed, or the icon change effect may be executable while the story pseudo continuous effect is being executed. For example, if the icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), it can be executed at the same time, and if the icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color, the story pseudo-link is executed without executing the icon change effect. You may also perform a performance. In addition, if the story pseudo continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two or more times), the story pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, it can be executed at the same time. You can also use it as

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be explained. In this embodiment, the icon change suggestion image is an image with a narrow display area, and the bird background and night background displayed in the background effect are images with a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the screen as a whole.

Therefore, as shown in the "background effect (operation promotion effect)" column in the row of FIG. 69(B), the icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed while the icon change effect is being executed, and the icon change effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed.

Note that in other embodiments where the icon change suggestion image is an image with a wide display area relative to the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), the icon change effect and the background effect may not be executed at the same time. good. This is because the background image becomes completely (or almost) invisible due to the icon change suggestion image, and there is a risk that the background image will have changed without any explanation, giving a crude impression. In such a case, for example, if the icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), the icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color. In this case, the background effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. Also, if a background effect in which a night background is displayed is executed, the background effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if a background effect in which a bird background is displayed is executed, the background effect is executed. The icon change effect may be executed without any change.

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the chance effect (and symbol change effect) will be explained. In this embodiment, when the icon becomes blue or higher, the reach effect is always executed. On the other hand, the chance effect (and the symbol change effect) is executed using the variable effect related to the no-reach effect. Therefore, the icon change effect is not executed in the variable display before the prefetch target. In addition, if the pre-read target of the chance eye performance (and symbol change performance) corresponds to the icon change performance, the icon change performance and the chance eye performance (and symbol change performance) can be executed simultaneously.

In addition, in other embodiments, the icon change performance and the chance eye performance (and symbol change performance) may not be able to be performed at the same time in any case, or may be performed at the same time.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous effect and other effects will be explained with reference to the line in FIG. 69(C).

Regarding the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous performance and the story pseudo-continuous performance, any one type of pseudo-continuous performance can be executed in one variable performance. Therefore, a situation in which a normal pseudo continuous effect is executed for the first pseudo series and a story pseudo continuous effect is executed for the second pseudo series does not occur. Furthermore, these two types of pseudo-continuous effects are never executed at the same time.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo continuous effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be explained. The pseudo continuous effect image is an image whose display area is narrow relative to the entire screen, and the background image is an image whose display area is wide. Therefore, even if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the screen as a whole. In addition, the synergistic effect can increase expectations for the variable performance that is currently being executed.

Therefore, as shown in the column "background effect (operation promotion effect)" in the row of FIG. 69(C), the normal pseudo continuous effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed while the normal pseudo continuous effect is being executed, and the normal pseudo continuous effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed. For example, when executing a night background, compared to executing a bird background without executing a night background, it may be easier to execute the normal pseudo continuous effect more times (for example, twice), and it is always Continuous performances may be performed.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo continuous effect and the chance effect (and symbol change effect) will be explained. In this embodiment, these effects are not executed at the same time because their execution timings are different. This also applies to the relationship between the story pseudo-continuous effect and the chance effect (and the symbol change effect) (the "chance effect" and the "symbol change effect" in the rows of FIGS. 69(C) and (D)). column).

In addition, in other embodiments, it may be possible to execute the chance eye effect (and pattern change effect) during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (normal pseudo continuous effect and story pseudo continuous effect), or the chance effect effect (and the pattern change effect). ) may be able to execute a pseudo-continuous performance. Specifically, for example, by making the chance eye function as a pseudo-continuous pattern, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed in response to the false stop of the chance eye, and by using this pseudo-stopped chance eye, A pattern change effect may also be performed.

Next, the relationship between the story pseudo-continuation effect and other effects will be explained with reference to the line in FIG. 69(D).

The relationship between the story pseudo-continuation effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be explained. As described above, both the story image and the background image have a wide display area relative to the entire screen, and are images that are displayed on the entire screen. For example, even if the background image is changed behind the story image, it cannot be visually recognized, so there is a risk that the background image will have changed without any explanation, giving a crude impression.

Therefore, as shown in the "background effect (operation promotion effect)" column in the row of FIG. If so, control is performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. In other words, the background effect can be executed when the number of executions of the story pseudo-continuous effect is small (specifically, 0 times), and the background effect is not executed when the number of executions of the story pseudo-continuous effect is large (for example, 2 times). . Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern for no-reach loss whose variation time is shorter than 13.5 seconds is selected, a background effect can be executed, and when variation patterns D, I, and J are selected, When the story pseudo-sequence is executed twice, it is not necessary to execute the background effect.

In other embodiments, for example, if the story pseudo continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), the story pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the background effect, and if the story pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the predetermined number of times. If so, background effects may be performed. Also, for example, if a night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the story pseudo continuous effect, and when a bird background is displayed, the story pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the background effect. Good too.

In addition, pseudo-series effects (normal pseudo-sequence effects and story pseudo-series) may be executed during normal reach, character SP reach, or SPSP reach, and such pseudo-sequence effects and other The relationship with the performance may be the same as that described with reference to the rows in FIGS. 69(C) and (D). In the following explanation, a pseudo-continuation performance executed during a no-reach performance or a pre-reach performance will be referred to as a pre-reach pseudo-series, and a pseudo-series performance performed after a reach is established will be referred to as a post-reach pseudo-series.

Note that after a pseudo-run after a reach, a reach is always established, but before and after the pseudo-run after a reach, there are times when a reach is established with the same reach symbol, and times when a reach is established with different reach symbols. For example, after reaching a reach with an even-numbered symbol, there are cases where a reach is achieved with an even-numbered symbol again through a post-reach pseudo-connection, and a case where a reach is achieved with an odd-numbered symbol, and the latter is more likely than the former. However, the rate at which SPSP reach is executed may be high, or it may be easy to get a jackpot. For example, if a reach is established with 7 symbols through a pseudo-continuous effect after a reach, it may always be a jackpot.

For example, the rate at which SPSP reach is executed may vary depending on the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Specifically, during the variable display of the first special symbol, there are cases where only the pre-reach pseudo series is executed, cases where the pre-reach pseudo series and post-reach pseudo series are executed, and cases where only the post-reach pseudo series is executed. The rate of development into SPSP reach may be higher or lower in this order. Note that SPSP reach may be executed whenever the pseudo link is executed after reach.

The reliability of the post-reach pseudo-run for a jackpot may be higher than the reliability of the pre-reach pseudo-run, or may be approximately the same, or may be lower. For example, the reliability is relatively low when a pseudo continuous effect is performed only once during the variable display of the first special symbol, but if this pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo continuous effect after reach, the reliability is very high. The appearance rate of the post-reach pseudo-run and the pre-reach pseudo-run may be determined in advance so that (for example, the reliability is 70%). SPSP reach may be more easily executed if a highly reliable pseudo-continuous performance is executed (it may always be executed).

When a pseudo-continuation is performed after a reach during a normal reach, the flow is generally the same as that described with reference to FIG. 62, except that the pseudo-continuation is performed after the reach is established rather than before the reach is established. will be held. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, for example, a pseudo continuous pattern is pseudo-stopped as a middle pattern between the left pattern and the right pattern that constitute the reach pattern (decorative pattern of the first aspect). Then, all the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are restarted, and after that, the reach is always established again with the decorative symbols of the first mode.

Except for the difference in that when a pseudo-continuation is performed after reaching during character SP reach or SPSP reach, the pseudo-continuation effect is performed with the second mode decorative pattern displayed instead of the first mode decorative pattern. , an effect having a flow similar to that described with reference to FIG. 62 is performed. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, for example, when the left and right symbols that make up the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second mode) are pseudo-stopped at the upper left corner of the screen, a pseudo-connection occurs in the center of the screen as a middle symbol. The design is pseudo-stopped. Then, the state in which the ready-to-reach symbols are displayed changes to a state in which all the decorative symbols of the first aspect are restarted. After that, the reach is established again with the decorative pattern of the first mode, and for example, the second mode is changed from the state where the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed, similar to the effect display explained with reference to FIGS. The decorative pattern will be displayed. Note that there are times when a reach is established with the same reach symbol before and after the pseudo-run after the reach, but there are times when a reach is established with different reach symbols.

In addition, pseudo-links after reach can be executed during the contest performance during character SP reach, and do not need to be executed at other timings, and during SPSP reach, they can be executed during the battle performance, but cannot be executed at other timings. You don't have to.

Next, the relationship between the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) and the chance effect (and the symbol change effect) will be explained with reference to the line in FIG. 69(E).

The background effect is a effect that draws attention to how the background image changes. If a chance roll is displayed in front of the background image, it may be difficult to understand the change in the background image. Therefore, as shown in the columns of "chance effect" and "symbol change effect" in the row of FIG. 69(E), these effects cannot be performed at the same time. For example, if it is determined that the chance effect (and symbol change effect) is not to be executed, the background effect can be executed, and in the opposite case, the background image is controlled not to be executed.

Regarding the relationship between the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect, as mentioned above, the symbol change effect is an effect that uses the chance eye, so these effects can be executed at the same time. column). That is, the symbol change performance can be executed while the chance effect is being executed, and the chance effect can be executed while the pattern change effect is being executed.

[Specific example: Pattern in which background effects and normal pseudo continuous effects are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 70 is a screen diagram illustrating how a background effect and a normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. FIG. 70 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any one of the variation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected. It is assumed that, at the start of the variable performance, it has been determined that the operation promotion performance, the background performance that displays a bird background, and one normal pseudo-continuous performance will be executed during the pre-reach performance.

FIG. 70(A) shows a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 in normal mode A, and the determination of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53. A state in which a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern indicating that the result is a loss (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed is illustrated. Note that the earliest pending icon is blue pending in response to execution of the pending icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and decorative symbol started, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the blue hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first mode) starts (see FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B)). FIG. 70(B) shows how the default background image of normal mode A is displayed, and the blue hold is shifted to the corresponding area 53 and displayed as the blue icon without changing. Illustrated. In addition, the scrolling speed of the decorative pattern in the first mode that started scrolling downward is gradually increasing, and the normal button image and gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts. An example of how this is done is shown below.

If the player operates the performance button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion performance, the valid period ends and the operation promotion performance ends according to the operation. Then, by executing a background effect in accordance with the operation, the background image changes to a bird background (see FIG. 70(C)). FIG. 70(C) exemplifies a situation in which the left pattern (decorative pattern of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped in a state where the bird background is displayed by executing the background effect.

After that, when the right symbol (decorative symbol of the first mode) comes to a pseudo-stop while the bird background is displayed, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol as the middle symbol comes to a pseudo-stop, a normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (Fig. 70(D) reference). A specific example of the performance mode of the normal pseudo-continuous performance has been described above with reference to FIG. 62(A), so the description here will be omitted. In FIG. 70(D), the left pattern and the right pattern (both decorative patterns of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped while the bird background is displayed, and the pseudo-sequential pattern suggests the execution of a normal pseudo-sequential effect. is exemplified as a middle symbol that is pseudo-stopping. In FIG. 70(E), characters indicating a pseudo series such as "x2" and a pseudo series effect image are displayed with the bird background displayed, indicating that a reach was established in the second pseudo series. is exemplified.

When a reach is achieved with 4 symbols in the second pseudo series, for example, it is notified that a reach is achieved along with the reach. The establishment of reach means that a white reach line is superimposed on the near side of the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the first mode) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) (see FIG. 70(E)), or "Reach!" The character's voice (hereinafter referred to as "reach established sound") is outputted from the speaker 24 to notify the user. These are performances that suggest that a reach performance is to be started, and are performances that suggest that the reliability of a jackpot is higher than when the reach performance is not executed.

If a normal reach is started with the bird background displayed after a reach is established, a loss may be reported at the end of the normal reach with the bird background still displayed (pattern that progresses from (F) to (G) in Figure 70). . Further, at the end of the normal reach, the bird background is erased and the character SP reach develops, and at the end of this character SP reach, a win or loss is announced (pattern progressing from (F) to (H) in FIG. 70).

In addition, there are cases where a jackpot is announced at the end of normal reach (pattern progressing from (F) to (I) in FIG. 70). In FIG. 70(I), while the bird background continues to be displayed, the effect image related to the pseudo continuous effect is erased, and the decorative pattern of the jackpot mode (the decorative pattern of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped. An example of how this is done is shown below. Following the example shown in FIG. 70(I), the bird background is erased, and the first reflection effect, promotion effect, and second reflection effect are performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12(A). It will be executed.

In addition, if the bird background is deleted after a reach is established, it may develop into an SPSP reach via (or without) the character SP reach, and a win or loss may be announced at the end of this SPSP reach (Figure 70 (E) , (J), (K)).

[Specific example: Pattern in which the icon change effect (jackpot notice), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 71 is a screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect (jackpot notice), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. FIG. 71 shows a specific example of the performance that is executed when any one of the jackpot variation patterns B to E of the first special symbol is selected. In addition, when the variable effect starts, one icon change effect (jackpot notice) that changes the icon into a rainbow, an operation promotion effect, a background effect that displays a night background, and one normal pseudo continuous effect will reach the reach. It is assumed that it has been decided to be executed during the pre-performance.

Similar to FIG. 70(A), FIG. 71(A) shows that two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 in normal mode A, and the icon displayed in the area 53 is A situation is illustrated in which a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) in a manner indicating that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is a loss is stopped and displayed. Note that the earliest pending icon is blue pending in response to execution of the pending icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed, the first special pattern determination corresponding to the blue hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special pattern is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first aspect) starts (see FIGS. 71(A) and (B)). In FIG. 71(B), the decorative pattern of the first mode is scrolled while the default background image of normal mode A is displayed, and the blue reservation remains unchanged in the area 53. The icon is shifted and displayed as a blue icon, and an example of how the icon change effect is being executed is illustrated. This icon change effect is executed in such a manner as to display an icon change suggestion image that suggests that the icon changes into a rainbow, and functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that a jackpot will occur. In response to the execution of this icon change effect, the blue icon changes to a rainbow-colored icon that functions as a jackpot notice that definitely foretells that there will be a jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 71(B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

If the player operates the performance button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion performance, the valid period ends and the operation promotion performance ends according to the operation. Then, by executing a background effect in response to the operation, the background image changes to a night background (see FIG. 71(C)). In FIG. 71(C), the rainbow-colored icon (jackpot notice) is displayed with the night background displayed by executing the background effect, and the left pattern (decorative pattern of the first aspect) An example of a pseudo-stop is shown.

Thereafter, with the night background being displayed, when the pseudo-continuous pattern that suggests the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as a medium pattern, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 71(D)). In FIG. 71(D), the left pattern, the right pattern (both decorative patterns of the first aspect), and the pseudo continuous pattern are pseudo-stopped while the night background and the rainbow-colored icon are displayed. The situation is illustrated. In FIG. 71(E), characters indicating a pseudo series such as "x2" and a pseudo series effect image are displayed with the night background displayed, indicating that a reach was achieved in the second pseudo series. is exemplified.

When a reach is achieved with 3 symbols in the second pseudo series, for example, a white reach line is displayed superimposed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) as the reach is achieved (see Figure 71(E)), or a reach is achieved sound is emitted from the speaker. It is output from 24. If a normal reach is started with the night background displayed after the reach is established, the night background will be erased at the end of this normal reach and it will develop into a character SP reach, and a jackpot may be announced at the end of this character SP reach ( pattern proceeding from FIG. 71(F) to (G)).

Also, there are cases where a jackpot is announced at the end of the normal reach (pattern progressing from (F) to (H) in FIG. 71). In FIG. 71(H), while the night background continues to be displayed, the effect image related to the pseudo continuous effect is erased, and the decorative pattern of the jackpot mode (the decorative pattern of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped. An example of how this is done is shown below.

In addition, when the night background is deleted after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach via (or without) character SP reach, and a jackpot is announced at the end of this SPSP reach (Fig. 71 (E), (I ), (J) pattern).

In addition, in this specific example, in the same way as the flow explained with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. The first reflective performance, the promotion performance, and the second reflective performance will be executed (see FIGS. 11 and 12(A)).

In FIG. 71, the icon change performance as a jackpot notice is executed during the operation promotion performance, and the preliminary performance (display of the rainbow-colored icon) as a jackpot notice is performed during the background performance, during the pseudo continuous performance, and during the reach It is being executed during the performance to notify the establishment. For this reason, compared to the flow in Figure 70 in which no jackpot notice is executed during these productions (that is, there is a possibility of a loss), in the flow in Figure 71, for example, the reach symbols are relatively reliable. It is easy to get 3 symbols (or 7 symbols), the percentage of highly reliable SPSP reach is high, and the percentage of jackpot is high (100% probability of jackpot).

[Specific example: Pattern in which the icon change effect, background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 72 is a screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect, background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. FIG. 72 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any one of the first special symbol variation patterns D, E, I, and J is selected. In addition, at the start of the variable performance, one icon change performance that changes the icon to blue, an operation promotion performance, a background performance that displays the night background, and two normal pseudo continuous performances during the pre-reach performance. It is assumed that it has been decided that it will be executed.

FIG. 72(A) shows a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 in normal mode A, and the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is shown. A state in which a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern indicating that the result is a loss (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed is illustrated. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as a white pending icon.

After the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest white reservation is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbols is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first mode) starts (see FIGS. 72(A) and 72(B)). In FIG. 72(B), the decorative pattern of the first mode is scrolled while the default background image of normal mode A is displayed, and the white reservation remains unchanged in the corresponding area 53. The icon is shifted and displayed as a white icon, and an example of how the icon change effect is being executed is illustrated. This icon change effect is executed in such a manner that an icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to blue is displayed. In response to the execution of this icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 72(B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

When the player operates the performance button 26 during the validity period related to the operation promotion performance, the operation promotion performance ends in accordance with the operation, and the background image changes to a night background by executing the background performance (FIG. 72) See C). In FIG. 72(C), the icon that has changed to blue is displayed with the night background being displayed due to the execution of the background effect, and the left pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is shown at a pseudo stop. An example of how this is done is shown.

Thereafter, with the night background being displayed, when the pseudo-continuous pattern that suggests the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as a medium pattern, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 72(D)). FIG. 72(D) shows a state in which the left pattern, the right pattern (both decorative patterns of the first mode) and the pseudo continuous pattern are pseudo-stopped while the night background and the blue icon are displayed. is exemplified.

In the second pseudo series, when the pseudo continuous symbol that suggests the execution of the normal pseudo continuous production pseudo-stops as a medium symbol, the second pseudo continuous production is executed and the variable display of the pseudo third series starts ( (See FIG. 72(E)). In addition, in FIG. 72(E), the left pattern and the right pattern (both decorative patterns of the first aspect) and the pseudo sequence are shown in a state where the night background, the characters indicating the pseudo sequence number, and the pseudo sequence effect image are displayed. An example of a pseudo-stopping of the symbol is shown.

When a reach is achieved with 4 symbols in the third pseudo series, for example, a white reach line is displayed superimposed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) as the reach is established (see Figure 72(F)), or a reach is achieved sound is emitted from the speaker. It is output from 24. In FIG. 72(F), a red pseudo-sequence effect image is displayed along the inside edge of the screen while a night background and characters indicating pseudo-sequences such as "x3" are displayed. , it is exemplified that a reach is established in the third pseudo series.

When the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) character SP reach, and the win or loss is announced at the end of this SPSP reach (Figures 72 (F), (G), A pattern that proceeds in the order of (I), or a pattern that proceeds in the order of (F), (H), and (I)).

In addition, in the case of a jackpot (that is, when variable patterns D and E are selected), the decorative pattern (the first pattern The first reflective performance, the promotion performance, and the second reflective performance are executed before the decorative pattern) is stopped and displayed.

[Specific example: Pattern in which the icon change effect (jackpot notice), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 73 is a screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect (jackpot notice), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A. FIG. 73 shows a specific example of the performance executed when either of the jackpot variation patterns D and E of the first special symbol is selected. In addition, when the variable performance starts, the icon changes twice (jackpot notice) where the icon changes to blue and then rainbow, an operation promotion performance, a background performance that displays a night background, and two times. It is assumed that it has been decided that the normal pseudo continuous performance will be executed during the pre-reach performance.

Similar to FIG. 72(A), FIG. 73(A) shows a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 in normal mode A, and the icon displayed in the area 53 is A situation is illustrated in which a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) in a manner indicating that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is a loss is stopped and displayed. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as a white pending icon.

After the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest white reservation is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbols is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first mode) starts (see FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B)). In FIG. 73(B), the decorative pattern of the first mode is scrolled while the default background image of normal mode A is displayed, and the white reservation remains unchanged in the corresponding area 53. The icon is shifted and displayed as a white icon, and an example of how the icon change effect is being executed is illustrated. This icon change effect is executed in such a manner that an icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to blue is displayed. In response to the execution of this icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 73(B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

When the player operates the performance button 26 during the validity period related to the operation promotion performance, the operation promotion performance ends in accordance with the operation, and the background image changes to a night background by executing the background performance (FIG. 73) See C). In FIG. 73(C), the icon that has changed to blue is displayed with the night background being displayed due to the execution of the background effect, and the left pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is shown at a pseudo-stop. An example of how this is done is shown. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the icon change effect (jackpot notice) is being executed, which displays an icon change suggestion image that suggests that the icon changes into a rainbow. In response to the execution of this icon change effect, the blue icon changes to a rainbow colored icon (jackpot notice).

Thereafter, with the night background being displayed, when the pseudo-continuous pattern that suggests the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as a medium pattern, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 73(D)). In FIG. 73(D), the left pattern, the right pattern (both decorative patterns of the first aspect), and the pseudo continuous pattern are shown in a state where the night background and the rainbow-colored icon (jackpot notice) are displayed. An example of a stopped state is shown.

After that, when the pseudo continuous pattern that suggests the execution of the normal pseudo continuous effect in the second pseudo continuous effect pseudo-stops as a medium pattern, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed and the variable display of the pseudo third continuous effect starts. (See FIG. 73(E)). In addition, in FIG. 73(E), the left pattern and the right pattern (both of the first aspect A state in which a decorative pattern) and a pseudo-continuous pattern are pseudo-stopped is illustrated.

When a reach is established with 3 symbols in the pseudo third row, for example, a white reach line is displayed superimposed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) as the reach is established (see Fig. 73(F)), or a reach is established sound is emitted from the speaker. It is output from 24. In FIG. 73(F), a night background, a rainbow-colored icon, characters such as "x3" indicating a pseudo-sequence number, and a red pseudo-sequence effect image are displayed, and the pseudo-third-sequence effect image is displayed. This example shows how reach was established.

When the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) character SP reach, and a jackpot is announced at the end of this SPSP reach (Fig. 73 (F), (G), A pattern that proceeds in the order of (I), or a pattern that proceeds in the order of (F), (H), and (I)). Before the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, the first reflection effect, promotion effect, and The second reflection effect will be executed.

In FIG. 73, the icon change effect as a jackpot notice is executed during the background effect, and the preliminary effect (displaying the rainbow-colored icon) as a jackpot notice is executed during the background effect, during the pseudo-continuous effect, and when reach is achieved. It is being executed during the performance to notify. For this reason, compared to the flow in Figure 72 where no jackpot notice is executed during these productions (in other words, there may be a loss), in the flow in Figure 73, for example, the reach symbols are relatively reliable. It is easy to get 3 symbols (or 7 symbols), the percentage of highly reliable SPSP reach is high, and the percentage of jackpot is high (100% probability of jackpot).

[Specific example: Pattern in which chance effect and symbol change effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 74 is a screen diagram illustrating how the chance effect and symbol change effect are executed in normal mode A. FIG. 74 shows an effect executed in normal mode A when a preliminary determination result indicating that any one of the variation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected is obtained. A specific example is shown. In addition, when the display of the pending icon related to the prefetch target starts, a chance effect that displays a weak chance effect and a symbol change effect are executed in the two previous and one previous variable effects of the prefetch target. It is assumed that this has been determined.

In FIG. 74(A), two pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 in normal mode A, and three pending icons forming a weak chance are displayed at the end of the two previous variable effects to be read ahead. A state in which even numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are displayed in a stopped state and a loss is notified is illustrated. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as a white pending icon, and the pending icon related to the prefetch target is displayed as a blue pending icon in response to execution of the pending icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three even-numbered symbols forming the weak chance eye starts, the first special symbol judgment for the one before the pre-read target is executed. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the earliest white reservation is displayed as the icon without changing, and the blue reservation related to the prefetch target is shifted and displayed to the area 53 side (FIG. 74(A) and (See (B)).

Almost at the same time as the icon and the pending icon are shifted and displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, and the numbers constituting the three even symbols that were stopped and displayed in a manner forming a weak chance are changed to the default color ( (for example, blue) to green all at once (see FIG. 74(B)). In addition, during the symbol change performance, the even numbered symbols forming the weak chance are slightly moving.

Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 74(C), the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first aspect) starts scrolling downward and the scrolling speed gradually increases to be scrolled at high speed. Then, the scroll speed gradually decreases and, for example, the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) pseudo-stop in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol. Note that here, since it is predetermined to display the weak chance in the previous variation performance of the look-ahead target, as illustrated in FIG. 74(D), three weak chances forming the weak chance are displayed. After the even numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped, they are stopped and displayed.

When a predetermined fixed time has elapsed after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three even symbols forming the weak chance eye started, the first special symbol determination related to the look-ahead target is executed, and the first special symbol Fluctuation display starts. Accordingly, the blue hold related to the prefetch target is displayed as the icon without changing (see FIG. 74(E)).

Almost at the same time as the icon and the pending icon are shifted and displayed, a symbol change effect is executed, and the numbers constituting the even symbols that are slightly moving in a manner that forms a weak chance are displayed in a default color (for example, blue). to green all at once (see FIG. 74(E)). Thereafter, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is scrolled at high speed and then comes to a pseudo-stop (see FIG. 74(F)), and after developing into a reach effect, a win or loss is announced. In addition, if it is determined to perform a pseudo continuous effect at the time of starting the variable effect related to the pre-read target, the pseudo continuous effect is executed before developing into a reach effect.

[Specific example: Pattern in which the chance effect, symbol change effect, and icon change effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 75 is a screen diagram illustrating how the chance effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in normal mode A. FIG. 75 shows a specific example of the performance executed in normal mode A when a preliminary determination result indicating that any one of the variation patterns B to E of the first special symbol is selected is obtained. It shows. In addition, when the display of the pending icon related to the look-ahead target starts, a chance eye effect that displays a weak chance eye in the two previous fluctuating effects of the look-ahead target and displays a strong chance eye in the one previous fluctuating effect. It is assumed that it has been decided that the symbol change effect and the symbol change effect will be executed. Furthermore, it is determined that at the start of the variable effect related to the pre-read target, the icon change effect (jackpot notice) that changes the icon into a rainbow will be executed.

The flow from FIGS. 75(A) to (C) is the same as that of FIGS. 74(A) to (C), so a description thereof will be omitted here. As illustrated in FIG. 75(D), in the previous variable performance of the look-ahead target, three odd-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) forming a strong chance are stopped and displayed after being pseudo-stopped. Ru.

When a predetermined fixed time has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and the three odd symbols forming the weak chance eye started, the first special symbol determination related to the look-ahead target is executed, and the first special symbol Fluctuation display starts. Along with this, the pending icon related to the prefetch target that was put on blue hold in response to the execution of the held icon change effect remains unchanged and is displayed as the corresponding icon (FIG. 75(E) reference).

Almost at the same time as the icon and the pending icon are shifted and displayed, a symbol change effect is executed, and the numbers constituting the odd symbols that are slightly moving in a manner that forms a strong chance are changed to a default color (for example, green). to red all at once (see FIG. 75(E)). Further, the icon change effect (jackpot notice) is executed to display an icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes into a rainbow. In response to the execution of this icon change effect, the blue icon changes to a rainbow colored icon (jackpot notice).

After that, with the rainbow-colored icon displayed, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is scrolled at high speed and then pseudo-stops (see Figure 75 (F)), and after developing into a reach effect, a jackpot is reached. be notified. In addition, if it is determined to perform a pseudo continuous effect at the time of starting the variable effect related to the pre-read target, the pseudo continuous effect is executed before developing into a reach effect.

In FIG. 75, the icon change performance as a jackpot notice is being executed while the chance eye is being displayed and during the symbol change performance. For this reason, compared to the flow in FIG. 74 in which no jackpot notice is executed during these presentations (in other words, there may be a loss), in the flow in FIG. 75, for example, three symbols with relatively high reliability or With 7 symbols, it is easy to reach a reach, the probability of highly reliable SPSP reach is high, and the probability of a jackpot is high (100% probability of jackpot).

[Modified example of SPSP reach mode]
For example, it may be possible to display the decorative pattern of the first mode or the decorative pattern of the second mode during SPSP reach (specifically, during battle performance). FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the aspect of SPSP reach (battle performance). As illustrated in FIG. 76, two types of presentation modes of battle presentation in SPSP reach are prepared in advance, and these modes may differ from each other in the mode of decorative symbols displayed as reach symbols. Specifically, during the battle performance, a mode A (see FIG. 76(A)) in which decorative symbols of the first mode are displayed in three symbol rows forming a reach in the upper left corner of the LCD screen 5; There is a mode B (see FIG. 76(A)) in which the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed. At the time of a jackpot, mode B is more likely to appear than mode A, and mode B is less likely to appear than mode A when it is a loss. For this reason, aspect B has higher reliability for jackpot than aspect A. The player can enjoy the game while expecting that the battle performance will be executed in mode B. In addition, title display, operation promotion effects, and cut-ins during SPSP reach are executed when SPSP reach is mode B, but do not need to be executed when SPSP reach is mode A, and the appearance rate is It may be lower.

For example, when starting a variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52), the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines that the variable patterns corresponding to the variable effect to be started this time are D, E, I, J. If so, it is determined which of mode A and mode B the battle performance is to be performed. For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a battle performance mode lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and determines the battle performance mode based on the information on whether or not it is a jackpot and the type of the corresponding variation pattern. Determined by random number lottery.

The battle performance mode lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining the performance mode of the battle performance is predetermined. The ratio determined for aspect B (the number of determination values assigned to aspect B) is higher for jackpots than for losses, and is lower in the order of fluctuation patterns E>D>J>I. Furthermore, the proportion determined by aspect A is lower for jackpots than for losses, and is higher in the order of variation patterns E<D<J<I.

In another embodiment, during SPSP reach, either an operation promotion effect (weak mode) that displays a normal button image or an operation promotion effect (strong mode) that displays a protruding button image is executed. (See FIG. 65). In cases where the reliability of a jackpot is higher in a strong mode than in a weak mode, when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed during SPSP reach, it is better to perform the operation promotion effect (strong mode). The blue cut-in may be more likely to be displayed and the red cut-in less likely to be displayed, or the blue cut-in may be less likely to be displayed and the red cut-in may be more likely to be displayed.

Specifically, for example, the relationship between the level of reliability regarding the combination of operation promotion performance and cut-in may be any of the following (1) to (4).
(1) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In (1) above, regardless of the cut-in presentation mode, if the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed, the reliability is high, and if the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed, the reliability is low. The relationship between degrees is easy to understand.
(2) Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) .
In (2) above, there is a case where the reliability relationship is opposite to that of cut-in only. As a result, the display of the blue cut-in may raise expectations more than the display of the red cut-in, and it is possible to effectively prevent the blue cut-in from becoming less interesting. be. Moreover, even if the operation promotion performance (weak mode) is started, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game without losing his/her sense of anticipation.
(3) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In (3) above, the reliability is easy to understand because the reliability is high when the red cut-in is displayed and the reliability is low when the blue cut-in is displayed, regardless of the performance mode of the operation promotion performance.
(4) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In (4) above, the reliability is the lowest for the downfall, the reliability is medium for the uptrend, and the reliability is the highest for the production modes with high reliability, so the relationship between the reliability is easy to understand.
Note that the relationship between the level of reliability regarding the combination of the operation promotion effect and the cut-in is not limited to the relationships (1) to (4) above, and may be any relationship.

[Small design]
In another embodiment, the variable display may be started with the variable display of the special symbol, and the "small symbol" which is stopped and displayed as the special symbol is stopped may be displayed at the lower left of the liquid crystal screen 5. For example, the small pattern is a pattern in which the decorative pattern in the second mode is reduced to 1/8 the size, and is composed of three small patterns: a small left pattern, a small medium pattern, and a small right pattern. .

The small symbols notify whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss, depending on the combination of numbers indicated by the three small symbols that are stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, at the time of a jackpot, the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol (and the right symbol) and the middle symbol so as to form a combination that notifies the jackpot, and then the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. At this time, along with the pseudo stop of the medium pattern, the small pattern (left small pattern, medium small pattern, and right small pattern) is pseudo stopped with the same number combination as the decorative pattern, and then the combination of the three small patterns is decorated. A jackpot is announced by stopping and displaying the same number combination as the symbol. In addition, in the event of a loss, the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol (and right symbol) and the middle symbol so that the combination that notifies you of a loss (Reach-to-win or Reach-to-reach loss) is made, and then the combination of the three decorative symbols is Stop display in the same manner without changing. At this time, along with the stop display of the three decorative patterns, small patterns (small left pattern, small medium pattern, and small right pattern) are stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative patterns. For this reason, for example, when transitioning to the customer waiting state, small patterns are stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative patterns.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbols and the variable display of the decorative symbols are synchronized. Therefore, like the decorative symbols, the small symbols are also corresponding displays corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed.

Note that the small symbols may be displayed in a variable manner by sequentially displaying specific combinations determined in advance. For example, "1, 3, 5" → "2, 4, 6" → "3, 5, 7" → "4, 6, 8" as "small left design, small medium design, small right design" →... Such combinations may be displayed in a variable manner, and in the case of a jackpot, the small symbols are pseudo-stopped with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbols and then stopped, and in the event of a loss, the small symbols may be stopped and displayed in a combination different from the decorative symbols. Thereby, the number of symbols used as small symbols can be smaller than that of decorative symbols, and the data capacity can be reduced.

The decorative symbols and the small symbols have in common that they start to be displayed in a variable manner when the special symbol starts to be displayed, and they are stopped and displayed when the special symbol stops being displayed.

However, the decorative pattern and the small pattern differ in the following points. First, decorative patterns are usually displayed relatively large in the center of the screen, while small patterns are displayed relatively small in the lower left of the screen, and the display mode (for example, shape, (size, speed of fluctuating display, direction of fluctuating display) will not change, nor will the display position change during the fluctuating performance.

For example, when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a decorative symbol may slowly begin to vary or move slightly upwards and then begin to scroll downwards, whereas a small symbol is displayed at a constant speed and in a constant direction. The high-speed fluctuation display starts. Note that the speed at which the small symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols in the first mode and the second mode scroll at high speed, or may be the same. Further, the speed at which the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be faster (or slower) or may be the same.

Moreover, some of the decorative symbols in three rows may come to a pseudo-stop during the variable display of the special symbols. On the other hand, for the small symbols, some of the three rows of small symbols do not come to a pseudo stop. For example, when a decorative pattern is executed, when the left pattern is pseudo-stopped, the right pattern scrolls slowly (e.g., the effect is displayed in a reach promotion effect), and the right pattern becomes the same as the left pattern. There may be a pseudo-stop with the same symbol, and the middle symbol may be displayed in a fluctuating manner. In addition, when the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped with the same symbol, a highly reliable reach effect (for example, SPSP reach) is performed after the middle symbol is displayed variably in such a way that the middle symbol is likely to stop when the player loses the reach. may develop. Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous performance is executed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped with different symbols.

On the other hand, for small symbols, even if a reach effect is performed or a reach effect is executed, the speed at which the small and medium-sized symbols are displayed will not slow down, or the small and medium-sized symbols will not be displayed while the left and right small symbols are pseudo-stopped. . Further, even if a pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the left small symbol, the medium small symbol, and the right small symbol do not pseudo-stop. That is, even when the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped, the small symbols in the three rows remain variably displayed without pseudo-stopping.

Further, the decorative pattern of the first mode is reduced and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of SPSP reach) to become the decorative pattern of the second mode. On the other hand, small designs are not displayed in a reduced size. In other words, even when the decorative patterns are reduced, the small patterns in the three rows are not reduced and displayed, but are displayed in the same size while changing.

Further, although the decorative pattern is used for the first reflective effect, the second reflective effect, and the third reflective effect, the small pattern is not used for these effects. For this reason, even when a highlight light is added to a decorative symbol that has been pseudo-stopped in a jackpot mode, a highlight light is not added to the small symbol.

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative pattern may be partially or completely displayed by superimposing another effect image (for example, a button image) on the front side or by moving the effect accessory 7 toward the front side. may become invisible. On the other hand, the small pattern is displayed in front of other performance images and is displayed in a position where it can be seen even when the performance accessory 7 is operated, so that part or all of it does not become invisible. For example, when the operation promotion effect is executed, the medium symbols in the 3 rows of decorative symbols may become invisible, but some of the small symbols in the 3 rows do not become invisible; Even while the symbols are not visible (or are not displayed), the small and medium-sized symbols remain displayed (variably displayed). In addition, in other embodiments, the small pattern may become invisible when the performance accessory 7 is operated.

[Variations of decorative patterns]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, symbols 1 to 6 and 8 are selected in the normal losing ready symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(A)) that is referred to when the judgment result of special symbol determination is a losing. The proportions at which the symbols and nine symbols are selected are set in advance to be equal to each other. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol selection table for probability change (see FIG. 20(A)), the proportions at which decorative symbols other than 3 symbols, 5 symbols, and 7 symbols are selected are set in advance to be equal. As a result, the types of numbers constituting the decorative pattern, such as numbers 1 to 9, can be given a function that indicates the reliability of a jackpot.

However, not all odd-numbered symbols were more difficult to select than even-numbered symbols in the event of a loss. For this reason, regardless of the type of numbers, the default color for numbers that make up odd-numbered designs is green, and the default color for numbers that make up even-numbered designs is blue, but this decorative design (specifically numbers) It was not possible to give the color-related elements a function that suggests the reliability of a jackpot.

Therefore, in order to provide a function that indicates the reliability of the elements related to the color of decorative symbols, the ready-to-win symbol selection table for normal losses and the ready-to-reach symbol selection table for loses in variable probability situations (Fig. 19 (A) and Fig. 20 (A) ) may be configured in advance so that even numbered symbols have a higher selection rate than odd numbered symbols.

Specifically, for example, in the normal loss ready-to-win symbol selection table, among the ready-to-win symbol selection random numbers from "0" to "99", 9 random numbers are set for each of 1 symbol, 5 symbol, and 9 symbol. , 7 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. Furthermore, 15 random numbers are assigned to each of 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols.

In addition, for example, in the ready-to-win symbol selection table for probability change, for example, among the random number of ready-to-win symbols from "0" to "99", five symbols are selected for each of 1 symbol, 3 symbol, 5 symbol, and 9 symbol. A random value of 0 is assigned to each of the 7 symbols. Furthermore, 20 random numbers are assigned to each of the 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols.

By configuring the losing ready-to-win symbol selection table as described above, when a ready-to-win symbol is achieved with an odd-numbered symbol, it becomes easier to get a jackpot than when a ready-to-win symbol is achieved with an even-numbered symbol. Thereby, the color-related elements of the decorative designs (specifically, the numbers) can have a function of indicating the reliability of a jackpot. In addition, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is 16R probability variation, even number symbols and odd number symbols may be selected as reach symbols, while if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is 6R normal Odd symbols are not selected (see FIGS. 19(B) and (C), and FIGS. 20(B) and (C)). Therefore, elements related to the color of the decorative symbols can also have a function of indicating the reliability of transitioning to the variable probability gaming state. That is, for example, with SPSP Reach, when odd-numbered symbols of a predetermined color (for example, 7 symbols) are displayed, the jackpot expectation level is higher than when even-numbered symbols of a color other than the predetermined color (for example, 2 symbols) are displayed. It can be said that there is a high degree of expectation that the game will shift to a variable gaming state. It should be noted that if the reach-to-reach symbol is an even number symbol, it is a loss or a jackpot, and if the reach-to-reach symbol is an odd number symbol, it may be a jackpot.

In addition to having the above-mentioned configuration of the losing reach symbol selection table, it may also be set in advance so that even-numbered symbols are more likely to be displayed than odd-numbered symbols as a random symbol that is stopped and displayed to notify a loss. . Specifically, for example, in order to determine the winning combination in the process of step S1540 in FIG. 51, even-numbered symbols are more likely to be determined as decorative patterns forming a winning combination than all odd-numbered designs. You can also refer to the table. In addition, all the decorative patterns that form a rosette may always be even-numbered patterns, or certain decorative patterns (for example, the left pattern) among the rosettes are odd-numbered patterns, and other decorative patterns (for example, the right pattern) are even-numbered patterns. But that's fine.

Note that the default color of the numbers constituting the decorative pattern (elements related to the color of the decorative pattern) is not limited to the above-mentioned colors, and may be any color. For example, the color of the numbers constituting the odd numbered symbols may be red, and the color of the numbers constituting the even numbered symbols may be purple.

Also, the numbers that make up the odd-numbered design and the numbers that make up the even-numbered design only need to be different colors, and the numbers that make up the odd-numbered design may have multiple colors, and the numbers that make up the even-numbered design may have multiple colors. . Specifically, if among the odd numbered symbols, the color of the number "7" constituting the 7th symbol is red, and the color of the numbers composing the odd numbered symbols other than the 7th symbol is green, an even numbered symbol is formed. The color of the numbers may be blue (i.e., a color other than red or green).

Note that a plurality of colors may be associated with one number constituting each decorative pattern. For example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are prepared in advance as the colors of the numbers that make up each decorative pattern, and in this order, the reliability of hitting the jackpot and the reliability of transitioning to a variable gaming state are determined in this order. (that is, the degree of expectation not to shift to the time-saving gaming state) may be set in advance so as to be high. For example, reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a white odd number symbol than when the reach symbol is a white even symbol, and furthermore, reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a red odd symbol. (It may even be a guaranteed jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the colors of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, a plurality of types of characters may be prepared in advance as additional displays for one number constituting each decorative pattern. For example, a character as an additional display may be different for each number constituting a decorative pattern, and a plurality of characters may be associated with one number as an additional display. Specifically, the characters A to C, which are additionally displayed with 7 symbols, do not need to be additionally displayed with decorative symbols indicating other numbers. For example, the reliability of characters A to C for a jackpot and the reliability for transitioning to a probability-variable gaming state (that is, the expectation level for not shifting to a time-saving gaming state) may be set in advance so that they become higher in the order of characters A to C. For example, the reliability is higher when a reach is achieved with a decorative pattern of the first mode to which character B is added than when a reach is achieved with a decorative pattern of the first mode to which character A is added, and further, The reliability is higher when a reach is achieved with the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character C is added (a jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the additional display of decorative symbols. Note that a plurality of types of characters corresponding to any of the symbols 1 to 9 may be prepared in advance as additional displays. For example, characters A to C may be prepared as additional displays corresponding to all of the symbols 1 to 9. It's okay.

With reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, modified examples of the decorative patterns of the first aspect and the second aspect will be described. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the additional display that is displayed in addition to the numbers forming the decorative pattern. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the decorative pattern of the first aspect and the second aspect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern in the first mode is composed of numbers and characters that are additional displays corresponding to the numbers, and the decorative symbols in the second mode are composed of numbers without additional display. configured. In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, regardless of the mode of the decorative pattern, any one of the additional images A to C, which are performance images different from the above-mentioned characters, is a decorative pattern. is always added to the numbers that make up the . The additional images A to C are additional displays that are superimposed on the back side of the numbers forming the decorative pattern in both the first mode and the second mode.

Specifically, in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed behind the number and in front of the character, which is another additional display (see FIG. 78(A)). Furthermore, in the second aspect of the decorative pattern, one of the additional images A to C is displayed superimposed behind the number (see FIG. 78(B)).

The additional images A to C move or do not move, similar to the characters that are additionally displayed. Specifically, the additional images A to C are generated, for example, when the decorative pattern of the first mode is pseudo-stopped, and when the decorative pattern of the first mode changes to the decorative pattern of the second mode (and When it is the other way around), it sways in sync with the minute movements of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern. Further, while scrolling, the additional images A to C do not flicker regardless of the scrolling speed. Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the numbers forming the decorative symbol become still images, and the additional images A to C do not move at all and become still images, similar to the characters that are additionally displayed. In other embodiments, while the special symbols are being displayed in a static state, the numbers forming the decorative symbols may become still images, while the additional images A to C may flicker.

Additional image A is an ocher image, and is an additional display corresponding to odd-numbered symbols other than 7 symbols (see FIG. 77(A)). Additional image B is a silver image with the same pattern as additional image A, and is an additional display corresponding to an even numbered pattern (see FIG. 77(B)). Further, additional display C is a golden image with a pattern different from that of additional images A and B, and is an additional display corresponding to 7 symbols.

Since the type of additional image is uniquely determined for one decorative pattern, it is possible to determine whether the numbers constituting the decorative pattern are odd, even, or "7" depending on the type of the additional image. As a result, for example, when the elements related to the color of the decorative pattern (specifically numbers) are green and the additional image A is (i.e., an odd numbered pattern other than the 7 pattern), the element related to the color of the decorative pattern is blue. It can be suggested that in the case of the presence additional image B (that is, an even numbered symbol), the reliability for a jackpot and the reliability for shifting to a variable probability gaming state are higher. Also, for example, when the element related to the color of the decorative pattern is green and the additional image C (i.e., 7 symbols), the reliability of the jackpot and the transition to the variable gaming state are higher than in other combinations. It can be suggested that the reliability is high.

Since the additional displays A to C are attached to the first mode decorative pattern and the second mode decorative pattern, they are always displayed when the decorative pattern is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. In normal modes A and B (in the normal gaming state) and variable probability modes A and B (in the variable probability gaming state), the numbers that make up the decorative patterns are the same, and additional images A to C can be displayed. be. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity to these different production modes.

Note that the additional image A and the additional image B may be images of different colors, or may be images in which some parts are the same and other parts are different.

Further, a plurality of additional images may be associated with one number constituting the decorative pattern. For example, when additional image A or additional image C is added to one number, the higher the confidence in a jackpot, the more likely additional image C will be added, and the lower the confidence, the more likely additional image A will be added. good. Note that the additional image C is added when it is a jackpot, but it does not need to be added when it is a loss.

[Variation example of reliability suggestion performance]
In other embodiments, the following performance may be performed as a reliability suggestion performance that can be executed while displaying the decorative pattern in the first mode.

For example, instead of the background effect, a line image indicating the character's line may be displayed together with a predetermined character to display a line image indicating the reliability of a jackpot. The dialogue production includes weak dialogue, strong dialogue, and rainbow dialogue that functions as a jackpot notice that definitely predicts a jackpot, and the reliability of the jackpot is high in this order. For example, depending on the operation during the operation promotion performance, a weak line may be executed in place of the bird background, a strong line may be executed in place of the night background, and in the case of a jackpot, a rainbow line may be executed. Note that the dialogue effect differs from the background effect in which a background image with a wide display area is displayed in that a dialogue image is displayed in a narrow display area relative to the entire screen.

For example, instead of the background effect, a step-up effect may be executed in which a predetermined upper limit number of steps (for example, 4) is set as the upper limit, and the step progresses step by step to any step below the upper limit number of steps and ends. Good too. In the step-up performance, for example, by sequentially switching and displaying a plurality of types of performance images prepared in advance, a performance display is performed in which the performance mode changes into a plurality of stages. The step-up performance is a performance that indicates the reliability of a jackpot depending on how many steps the performance progresses to. When the game progresses to a large number of steps (for example, 3), the reliability is higher than when the game progresses to only a few steps (for example, 1), and a step-up performance that progresses to the upper limit function functions as a jackpot prediction. For example, a step-up effect may be performed instead of the background effect in response to an operation during the operation promotion effect. Note that the step-up effect differs from the background effect in which a background image is displayed in a wide display area in that the effect image is displayed in a narrow display area.

Note that, for example, the normal pseudo continuous effect may be executed only in the normal mode A, and the story pseudo continuous effect may be executed only in the normal mode B. Further, the pseudo-continuous effect, the chance effect, and the pattern background effect may be executed only in normal mode A, or may be executed only in normal mode B. Furthermore, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) may be executable in normal modes A and B, while the operation promotion effect (strong mode) may be executable only in normal mode A.

In addition, depending on the value of the setting value related to the jackpot probability, the execution rate of all reliability suggestion effects may be made different, or the execution rate of some reliability suggestion effects (for example, only background effects) may be made different. Good too. For example, the execution rate of the predetermined reliability suggestion effect may be higher (or lower) in the order of the setting values "1" to "3". For example, if the setting value is "3", the background effect can be executed in normal mode A, and if the setting value is "2" or "1", the background effect will not be executed even in normal mode A ( In other words, the appearance rate is 0%), so it may be suggested by executing the background effect that the set value is set to "3".

In addition, as another embodiment, the production control board 130 may execute a part of the processing executed in the image and sound control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150), or the production control board 130 may execute part of the processing executed in the production control board 130. A part of the process may be executed by the image-acoustic control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150). In addition, the production control board 130, the image and sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 are configured integrally, so that the processing executed in the production control board 130, the process executed in the picture and sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 are integrated. The processes executed in the control board may be executed by one control board.

Moreover, the above embodiments are mutually applicable. For example, the present invention may be realized by a configuration that combines the first embodiment, a modification of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even with other configurations. Furthermore, the order of processing, set values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values as long as they do not depart from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The explanatory diagrams and the like illustrated in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other embodiments may be used.

Moreover, the above-mentioned effects are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Furthermore, the above embodiments and modifications are applicable to each other, and the present invention may be realized in various combinations.

[Configuration and effects of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention]
As explained above, the gaming machine of this embodiment may have the following configuration.

A game machine (for example, 1) according to an embodiment determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. It is a machine,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to this configuration, while the corresponding display is in the normal mode or the special mode in the common effect, the preview effect can be appropriately executed depending on which mode it is in the preview effect. Thereby, it is possible to execute the preview performance in a way that makes it stand out effectively. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring when the display of the correspondence display and the execution of the preview effect are executed at the same time.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Selection means (for example, 100) that selects the variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern, based on the result of the determination;
A performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, a first preview performance can be executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first preview performance and the second preview performance can be executed,
If it is determined that the special game will be executed,
The second variation pattern is more likely to be selected than the first variation pattern.

According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate advance notice effect depending on the type of variation pattern. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent execution of a performance that feels redundant or excessive. Further, when a special game is executed, more preview performances can be executed than when the special game is not executed, so that highly interesting performances can be realized while the corresponding display is displayed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The first preview performance can be performed before the start of the common performance,
The second preview performance can be executed after the start of the common performance.

According to this configuration, different performances can be performed before and after the common performance. This makes it possible to create an exciting performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The first preview performance can be performed before the start of the common performance,
The second preview performance can be executed after the start of the common performance,
The first preview performance is less likely to be executed after the common performance starts than before the common performance starts.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made different before and after the common performance, and furthermore, it can be expected that the first preview performance will be executed after the start of the common performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
After executing a common performance (for example, reach performance) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode, a specific display (for example, promotion display) that displays the corresponding display in a specific mode (for example, jackpot mode). It is possible to perform
The rate at which the specific performance is performed differs depending on which timing among the plurality of timings the common performance is performed.

According to this configuration, since it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the common performance was executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance until the common performance is started.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
After executing a common performance (for example, reach performance) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode, a specific display (for example, promotion display) that displays the corresponding display in a specific mode (for example, jackpot mode). It is possible to perform
The rate at which the specific performance is executed differs depending on whether the display mode of the corresponding display in the common performance is the special mode.

According to this configuration, since it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of correspondence display is displayed in the common performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance during the common performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a performance in any one of a plurality of performance modes including a first performance mode and a second performance mode,
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
The display mode is controlled to the first production mode (for example, normal mode A), and the corresponding display is either a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in the first mode) or a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern in the second mode). or a first preview effect (for example, background effect) that is executed when
The second preview performance (for example, title display) and,
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to this configuration, the type of preview performance can be made different or the same depending on the type of performance mode, so even though the performance varies depending on the performance mode, there is a sense of unity for the entire performance executed on the gaming machine. It is possible to produce

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Selection means for selecting a variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern, based on the result of the determination;
A performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, the first preview performance can be executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first preview effect is not executed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Selection means for selecting a variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern, based on the result of the determination;
A performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, the second preview effect is not executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the second preview effect can be executed.

According to the above two configurations, it is possible to perform an appropriate preview performance depending on the type of variation pattern. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent execution of a performance that feels redundant or excessive.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
a second preview effect (for example, a title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of a second mode);
There is a third preview effect (for example, a hold icon change effect),
The third preview performance can be executed during the execution of the first preview performance,
The third preview performance is not executed during the execution of the second preview performance,
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to this configuration, since the third preview performance is not executed during the execution of the second preview performance, it is possible to effectively prevent the third preview performance from reducing the interest of the second preview performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The presentation mode of the first preview presentation includes a first mode (for example, bird background) and a second mode (for example, night background),
The presentation mode of the second preview presentation includes a third mode (for example, blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, red title display),
When the first preview performance and the second preview performance are executed,
The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed differs depending on the combination of performance modes of the first preview performance and the second preview performance.

According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the type of preview performance to be executed and its performance mode, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the type of preview performance to be executed and the performance mode thereof, and even when the corresponding display is in the normal mode or in the special mode. It is possible.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
Along with the variable display of the identification information, a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a variable manner,
Stop displaying the correspondence display along with the derivation display of the determination result,
A re-fluctuating effect (for example, a story pseudo-continuous effect) in which the corresponding display is once pseudo-stopped and then displayed in a variable manner again may be performed a predetermined number of times from when the variable display of the corresponding display is started until it is stopped and displayed. It is possible and
It is possible to execute a performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
The production that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed includes:
a first effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
a second effect (for example, a title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of a second mode);
The first performance and the second performance can be performed when the number of times the re-fluctuation performance is small (for example, once),
When the number of times of the re-variation performance is large (for example, twice), the second performance can be executed.

According to this configuration, there are preview performances that are not executed depending on the number of re-variation performances, but in such a case, the number of re-variation performances is large, making it difficult for the player to become bored.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example 1) is equipped with an input means that allows input by the player,
A gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and then derives and displays the result of the determination,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that can be executed in response to an input to the input means when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The presentation mode of the first preview presentation includes a first mode (for example, bird background) and a second mode (for example, night background),
The presentation mode of the second preview presentation includes a third mode (for example, blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, red title display),
When the first preview performance and the second preview performance are executed,
The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed differs depending on the combination of performance modes of the first preview performance and the second preview performance.

According to this configuration, it is not only possible to set expectations for the preview performance itself, but also to make the expectation level different depending on the combination of a plurality of preview performances. As a result, it is possible to arouse interest in not only the single preview performance but also the plurality of types of preview performances in which the corresponding display is in the normal mode and in the special mode.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) determines whether or not to execute a special game, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination to provide an advantageous game to the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game),
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The corresponding display is
A first element related to color (for example, the color of numbers forming a decorative pattern),
a second element (for example, an additional image) added to the first element,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the aspect of the element of the correspondence display.

According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the corresponding display, and as a result, the player's attention can also be drawn to the preview performance of when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and when it is in the special mode. It is possible to attract.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) determines whether or not to execute a special game, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination to provide an advantageous game to the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, 6R normal) or a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, 16R probability change),
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The corresponding display is
A first element related to color (for example, the color of numbers forming a decorative pattern),
a second element (for example, an additional image) added to the first element,
When the first element and the second element are in a specific form (for example, the numbers constituting the decorative pattern are red and the additional image C), the second advantageous state is more favorable than when the first element and the second element are in a certain form. Easy to control.

According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the correspondence display, and it is possible to give the player a special feeling when the elements of the correspondence display are in a specific manner.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
a suggestive effect that suggests that the special game will be executed (for example, an icon changing effect that changes the icon to a rainbow color);
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
After the first preview performance, it is possible to execute a common performance (for example, a reach performance) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first notice effect;
In the case where the suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the first notice effect,
In the common performance, the ratio at which the corresponding display is displayed in the special mode is different.

According to this configuration, since the suggestive effect may be executed during the execution of the first preview effect, it is possible to draw the attention of the player during the first preview effect. Further, since the common performance is executed after the first preview performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the common performance following the first preview performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a performance control means (for example, 130) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings, and a target performance (for example, a preliminary performance),
In the preview performance,
a first notice effect (for example, a hold icon change effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern in a first mode);
There is a second preview effect (e.g., title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is in a special mode (e.g., the icon change effect);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the target performance is in the first performance mode (for example, blue) in response to the execution of the first preview performance, the rate at which the target performance becomes the second performance mode (for example, rainbow color) is the first rate. and
When the target performance is in the first performance mode in response to execution of the second preview performance, the rate at which the target performance is in the second performance mode is a second rate (for example, the first rate). percentage).

According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether the target performance has become the first performance mode due to the first preview performance or the first mode due to the second preview performance. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention both when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and in the special mode.

1 Gaming machine 5 Liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal screen)
7 Performance accessory 13 Grand prize opening 24 Speaker 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image and sound control board 141 General CPU
142 Control ROM
143 Control RAM
144 VDP
145 Acoustic DSP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and then derives and displays the result of the determination,
Prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made;
Equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
A preliminary performance can be executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means,
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the identification information, and performing a notification effect that notifies the result of the determination according to the display mode of the corresponding display;
It is possible to display a suggestion image suggesting that the special game will be executed,
It is possible to execute a preview performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the preview performance,
a first preview effect that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode;
There is a second preview effect that is executed when the corresponding display is in a special mode,
A first effect that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode, and a second effect that is different from the first effect and that can display the corresponding display in the special mode. It is possible and
The same special performance can be performed when the first performance is performed and when the second performance is performed,
The special performance is a performance different from the notification performance,
The rate at which the special performance is performed is different between a case where the suggestion image is displayed after the first preview performance ends and a case where the suggestion image is not displayed after the end of the first preview performance,
When the advance performance is executed, the preview performance is more likely to be executed than when the advance performance is not executed.

Images